documents spro setting

8/12/2019 Documents SPRO Setting

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/documents-spro-setting 1/592

19 Plant Maintenance and Customer Service

This section contains all information needed to implement Plant Maintenance and ServiceManagement.

19.1 Master Data in Plant Maintenance and Customer Service

This menu contains the information for the implementation of Plant Maintenance.

You must have defined the plant maintenance organizational structure in your system before youproceed with customizing.

This involves maintaining the planning plants and maintenance plants as organizational units.A distinction is made in Plant Maintenance between planning plants and maintenance plants.

- Maintenance plantYou can manage technical objects and the work centers responsible for for carrying out thework in a maintenance plant.

- P lanning plantThe planning plant is a plant where you define maintenance task lists, carry out materialsplanning on the basis of the BOMs in task lists and perform maintenance orders, manageand schedule maintenance plans, enter maintenance notifications and process maintenanceorders for the associated maintenance plants.

Recommendation

You should always use planning plants when maintenance planning is to be carried out centrallyin one plant for several plants. If each plant is independent from a maintenance point of view,each plant is then also a planning plant.

Note on the implementation of Plant Maintenance

Note that there are many ar eas that will overlap with the implementation of components 'MM'(Materials Management) and ' PP' (Production Planning) when you are customizing the systemfor Plant Maintenance.

If you discover settings that are not relevant to Plant Maintenance, you should only change ordelete these after consultation with the appropriate project groups.

19.1.1 Basic Settings

In this step, you maintain the settings that cannot be directly assigned to any master data area.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 1

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.1.1 Maintain Authorizations for Master Data

In this section, you see which authorization objects are defined in the standard system for theindividual application functions. You can maintain authorizations for these objects in the R/3System.

The easiest way to maintain authorizations is by using roles.

Note that the maintenance of authorizations using roles is a new function. The previousprocedure is still supported and is described below.

In this step, you can create roles and use the profile generator to generate authorizationprofiles.

Activities

To assign an authorization profile to a user, do the following:

1 . Create a role2. Enter a description

3. Select transactions

4. Create and edit authorizations

5. Assigns users and compare the user master (in doing so, the profile is entered in theuser's master record)

6. Transport roles, if desired

Detailed documentation

For more information about the procedures, see transaction documentation

See also the general documentation on the Profile Generator in the SAP Library. Choose: Basis Components -> Computing Center Management System -> Users and Roles or in theImplementation Guide (IMG), choose: Basis Components -> System Administration -> Usersand Authorizations -> Maintain Authorizations and Profiles using Profile Generator .

Note

You can also use authorization profiles you created manually or were delivered by SAP, inroles. You can create a role without a menu and include the corresponding profile in theauthorization data of the role.

In the fourth step, choose "Edit -> Add authorization -> From profile" to add theauthorization profile data to the role.

Below, you can find information about the previous procedure for versions up to andincluding 4.0.

Authorization objects

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 2

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The following list shows which authorization objects are checked for the individual applicationfunctions.

Functions for. . . Authorization object

Process equipment I_BEGRP Authorization group I_IWERK PM planning plant

I_SWERK Maintenance plantI_BETRVORG Business operationsI_INGRP Maintenance planner groupI_KOSTL Cost center

Classify equipment C_TCLA_BKA Class types

Process functional locations I_BEGRP Author ization group I_IWERK PM planning plant


Classify functionallocations C_TCLA_BKA Class types

Process network links I_BEGRP Authorization group I_IWERK PM planning plant

I_SWERK Maintenance plantClassify network links C_TCLA_BKA Class types

Material M_MATE_STA Maintenance status

M_MATE_BUK Company code M_MATE_WRK Plant M_MATE_VKO Distribution channel M_MATE_LGN WarehouseClassify material C_TCLA_BKA Class type

Bills of material C_STUE_BER Bills of material

Process permits I_SOGEN Permits

Process measuring points I_BEGRP Authorization group

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 3

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Authorizations for preventive maintenance

Maintenance plans I_INGRP PM planner group maintenance itemI_KOSTL Cost center for maintenance itemI_BEGRP Authorization group

Authorization for PM task lists

Task lists I_ROUT General task list maintenanceI_ROUT1 Task list authorization detail

Authorizations for notification processing

PM notifications I_IWERK PM planning plantI_SWERK Maintenance plantI_QMEL Notification typesI_VORG_MEL Business operations

You can obtain an overview of the possible operations using transaction 'OIAH' .

Classify notifications C_TCLA_BKA Class types

Authorizations for order processing

PM orders C_AFKO_AWK Order typesC_AFKO_DIS MRP controllersC_DRAW_TCD Documents transactionsC_DRAW_BGR Authorization group documentsI_IWERK Maintenance planning plant

I_SWERK Maintenance plantI_AUART Order typesI_KOSTL Cost centerI_SOGEN PermitsI_INGRP Maintenance planner groupI_VORG_ORD Business operations orders


Classify orders C_TCLA_BKA Class types

Comp.confirmations I_IWERK maintenance planning plant

You transport authorizations as follows:

1. Display the list of authorizations.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 4

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



2. Select the object class.

3. Choose Authorization -> Transport .

4. Select the authorizations you wish to transport.5. Confirm your selections and enter the correction number.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 5

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Description of authorization objects

Object ITCODE Plant maintenance transaction authorization

DefinitionTransaction code authorization in Plant Maintenance (PM)

This authorization object determines which transactions a user may perform in the PM area.

During sequential processing, the system checks the authorizations for the transaction codes of the master data.

Defined fieldsThe transaction code is assigned to the authorization object.

Note:

The authorization object is stored as test object in the table for transaction codes.

The routing and work center areas are not controlled via the transaction codeauthorization. They have their own authorization objects.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 6

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object I_INGRP Maintenance planner group

DefinitionAuthorization for the maintenance planner group

You can use this authorization to control which users can display, change or create objectsassociated with a particular maintenance planner group.

This authorization is checked within Plant Maintenance in the following areas:

- equipment master record

- functional locations/reference functional locations

- maintenance i tem

- maintenance order/maintenance history

Defined fields

The authorization object has the following fields:- Transaction code IE* Equipment

IL* FunctLocation/Reference FunctLocationIW* Maintenance notification/maintenance orderIP04 - IP06 Maintenance items

- Planning plant: all the planning plants that you have defined

- Planner group:all the maintenance planner groups that youhave defined

ExampleUser A works in planning plant 0001 and is only allowed to maintain the master data(equipment, functional locations and reference locations) for maintenance planner groups 001,002 and 003. In the case of other transactions, User A has display authorization for all

maintenance planner groups.Procedure:

Create two authorizations for the authorization object:

- 1st authorization:

- Transaction code: IE01 - IE10, IL01 - IL18

- P lanning plant: 0001

- P lanner gr oup: 001 - 003

- 2nd authorization:

- Transaction code: only display authorization:IE03, IL03, IL13, IP06,IW23, IW33


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 7

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Planner group: *

Assign the two authorizations to User A.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 8

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_BEGRP Maintenance plan: authorization group

DefinitionMaster data authorization in Plant Maintenance

You can use this authorization object to control which groups of master data a user can display,create or change.The authorization group is defined in the master record of the piece of equipment, functionallocation or reference location, object link, maintenance item or measuring points.The authorization is checked in the case of:

- equipment


- object links

- maintenance i tems

- measuring points/counters

- measurement documents/counter readings

Defined fieldsThe following fields are allocated to the authorization object:

- t ransact ion code

- authorization group

ExampleUser A is to be allowed to change only certain pieces of equipment. He or she is not allowedto access any other pieces of equipment.You can achieve this by allocating an authorization group, for example authorization group 001,to the pieces of equipment for which he or she has authorization. You can do this in the

equipment master record. You then create the following authorization:- Transaction code: IE*

- Authorization group: 001

When the authorization is assigned to User A, he or she can carry out all transactions forequipment of authorization group 001. User A can therefore display, create and change allpieces of equipment of this authorization group.

If you want to assign further authorizations to the user for other objects or other authorizationgroups, you must create another authorization and then assign it to User A.

Note re measurement documents and counter readingsIf an authorization group is assigned to a measuring point or counter, the documents entered forthe measuring point/counter also inherit this authorization group when the document is entered.

This means that you can use the combination transaction code authorization group to attain forthe user the authorization to enter, change or simply display measurement documents or counter

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 9

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



readings.

An explicit assignment of authorization group to a measurement document or counter reading isnot possible.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 10

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_IWERK Maintenance plan: maintenance planning plant

DefinitionPlanning plant authorization in Plant Maintenance (PM)

Using this authorization object, you can control which users may edit PM data with whichtransactions in the planning plants.

The system checks the authorization for the following functions:

editing of master data, reports, orders, and maintenance plans

Defined fieldsThe following are assigned to this authorization object:

- Transaction code

- P lanning plant

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 11

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_SWERK Maintenance plan: planning plant

DefinitionMaintenance plant authorization in Plant Maintenance (PM)

Using this authorization object, you can control which users may edit PM data with whichtransactions in the maintenance plants.


Editing of master data, reports, orders, and maintenance plans

Defined fieldsThe following are assigned to the authorization object:

- Transaction code

- Maintenance plant

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 12

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_KOSTL Cost center authorization

DefinitionCost center authorization in Plant Maintenance

You can use this authorization to control which users can display, change or create objectsassociated with a particular cost center.

The authorization is checked in Plant Maintenance in the following cases:


- functional location/reference functional location

- maintenance notification


Defined fieldsThe authorization object contains the following fields:


- controll ing area

- cost center

Object: I_SOGEN Permits

DefinitionThis authorization object allows you to control which users in which maintenance plant areauthorized to assign or issue a particular permit.The authorization is checked in Plant Maintenance in the case of:

- equipment

- functional locations/reference functional locations- maintenance orders

Defined fieldsThe authorization object comprises two fields:

- maintenance plant

- permit

ExampleA user is to have the authorization in maintenance plant 0001 to issue all permits. Theauthorization will therefore look like this:

- Maintenance plant: 0001 (only maintenance plant 0001)

- Permit: * (all permits)

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 13

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: C_TCLA_BKA Class types

DefinitionThis authorization (C_TCLA_BKA) defines access to classes via the class type.

This authorization is checked in all functions that use the classification system to classify objectsor maintain classes.

Defined fieldsFields Possible entries Description

ClTyp (User-defined) Class type001 Material classes (standard)002 Equipment classes (standard)003 Functional locations (standard)004 Reference functional locations

(standard)005 Inspection characteristics (standard)and so on

Note

The valid class types are defined in Customizing forClassification , in the section onClasses .

Example:

Field Entry

Class type 001

In this case, the user can only access classes of class type 001 (Material classes).

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 14

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_ROUT Task lists and general maintenance task lists

DefinitionRouting authorization in Plant Maintenance

Using this authorization object, you can protect the authorization to access plant maintenanceroutings. The system checks the authorization when the user enters the routing transactions.


- Activity with the create, change, and display functions

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 15

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_ROUT1 Work scheduler and task list status

DefinitionYou can use this authorization object to define which users have access to the task lists of aparticular maintenance planner group. You can also further limit access authorization on thebasis of the task list status.The authorization object is checked in Plant Maintenance in the the task list functions(equipment, functional location and general maintenance task lists).

Defined fieldsThe authorization object has four fields:

- Transaction code: IA* ( task l is ts )

- Maintenance plant

- Maintenance planner group

- Task li st s ta tus

ExampleA user is allowed to display all the task lists of planner group 010 in maintenance plant 0001as long as the task lists have the status 'F' . The authorization looks like this:

- Transaction code: IA03 Display equipment task listIA07 Display general task listIA09 Display task listsIA13 Display functional location task listIA18 Display task lists by class

- Maintenance plant: 0001

- Planner group: 010

- Status: F

Object: C_STUE_BER Bills of materialINCLUDE C_STUE_BER OBJECT DOKU ID UO

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 16

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: S_SCD0 Production resources/tools: change documents

DefinitionAuthorization for access to change objects and change documents.

Defined fields- ACTVT activity

- 06 delete change documents.

- 08 display change documents.

- 12 maintain change document objects.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 17

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_QMEL PM notifications: notification types

DefinitionYou can use this authorization to control which users can access notifications of a partcularnotification type.The authorization is checked in Plant Maintenance.


- Transaction codedefines the transactions in which notifications of a particular type can be maintained ordisplayed

- Noti ficat ion typedefines with which type of notifications a user can work

ExampleUser A is allowed to process notifications of notification type 0001.The authorization for User A looks like this:

Transaction code: * (all transactions)

Notification type: 0001 (only notification type 0001)

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 18

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_AUART Order: order type

DefinitionThis authorization allows you to control which users have access to orders and historical ordersin a particular plant.The authorization is checked within Plant Maintenance.


- planning plantdefines the planning plant in which you can work with orders

- order typedefines the types of order with which you can work

Example

User A is only to be allowed to work with orders of order type 0001. However, he or she isto be allowed to work with this order type in all planning plants.Authorization for this user will therefore look like this:

- Planning plant: * (all)

- Order type: 0001 (only order type 0001)

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 19

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: I_VORG_MEL Business operations notification

DefinitionYou can use this authorization object to control which users can perform which functions forthe notifications.The authorization object is used in Plant Maintenance and Quality Management.

Defined fieldsThe authorizaton object comprises two fields:

- Noti ficat ion typeYou can use this field to limit authorization for carrying out particular business transactionsto a subset of notification types.

- Business transactionKey for an operation that a user can carry out

You can assign a user the business operations that he or she can carry out. You can limit the

business transactions to particular notification types.Example

User A is allowed to print notifications of all notification types.The authorization will look like this:

- Business transaction: PMM5 Print notification

- Notification type: * all notifications

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 20

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





- equipment


- maintenance orders


- maintenance plant

- permit




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 21

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Object: Material M_MATE_STA Maintenance status

DefinitionMaintenance status authorization for material master recordsThe data contained in a material master record is divided into user departments or views(Purchasing, MRP, and so on). The maintenance status is a single-character key for the relevantuser department or view.

This object determines which user departments or views a user is authorized to process; that is,which data he or she may process from this view.

Note

To use material master functions, a user needs the authorization for at least one userdepartment.

Defined fields

Fields Possible values MeaningACTVT 01 User may create data.

02 User may change data.03 User may display data.06 User may flag data for

deletion.08 User may display change

documents.STATM Here, you specify the

maintenance status for whichthe user is authorized.

The maintenance statuses possible are as follows:

User department Maintenance statusWork scheduling AAccounting BClassification CMRP DPurchasing EProduction resources/tools FCosting GBasic data KStorage LForecasting PQuality management Q

Warehouse management S

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 22

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Sales VPlant stocks XStorage location stocks Z

NotesThis authorization object also determines:

- Whether a user may flag a material master record for deletion. In this case,06 must beentered in field ACTVT ; the maintenance status is irrelevant here.

- Whether a user may change the material type. In this case,02 must be entered in fieldACTVT ; the maintenance status is irrelevant here.

- Whether a user may process an MRP profile or forecast profile. In this case, the followingvalues must be entered in fieldACTVT :

- 01 to create

- 02 to change or delete

- 03 to displayThe maintenance status must beD for the MRP profile orP for the forecast profile.

- Whether a user may create an overview of all extendable materials. In this case,01 mustbe entered in fieldACTVT ; the maintenance status is irrelevant here.

- Whether a user may call up the materials list. In this case,03 must be entered in fieldACTVT ; the maintenance status is irrelevant here.

- Whether a user may create or change production versions from task lists. In this case,02must be entered in fieldACTVT , and A in field STATM .

Object: Material M_MATE_BUK Material company code

DefinitionThis object determines whether a user is authorized to process material master data at company

code level.NoteThis object only has an effect if the system is configured such that valuation is at companycode level. It has no effect if valuation is at plant level.

Defined fieldsFields Possible values Meaning

ACTVT 01 User may create data.02 User may change data.03 User may display data.06 User may change deletion flags.08 User may display change

documents.BUKRS Here, you must specify the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 23

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



company codes for whichdata may be processed.

Object: Material M_MATE_WRK Material plant authorization

DefinitionThis object determines whether a user is authorized to process material master data at companycode level.

NoteThis object only has an effect if the system is configured such that valuation is at companycode level. It has no effect if valuation is at plant level.


ACTVT 01 User may create data.02 User may change data.

03 User may display data.06 User may change deletion flags.08 User may display change



Object: Material M_MATE_VKO Distribution channel

DefinitionThis object determines the combinations of sales organization and distribution channel for whicha user may process sales and distribution data in material master records.



documents.VKORG/VTWEG Here, you must specify the

combinations of salesorganization and distributionchannel for which data may be

processed.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 24

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System



Object: Material M_MATE_LGN Warehouse

Definition

This object determines whether a user is authorized to process the warehouse management dataof a warehouse number in a material master record.

If the user has this authorization, he or she is also authorized to process the data for allstorage types of the warehouse number(s).



documents.LGNUM Here, you must specify the

warehouse numbers for whichdata may be processed.

Object: Material M_MATE_BKA Export control class



Defined fields

Fields Possible entries DescriptionClTyp (User-defined) Class type

001 Material classes (standard)002 Equipment classes (standard)003 Functional locations (standard)004 Reference functional locations


Note

The valid class types are defined in Customizing forClassification , in the section on

Classes .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 25

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System



Example:

Field Entry

Class type 001


19.1.1.2 Define User Status

Use

This section explains how to adapt general SAP status management to your requirements.

General information on status management

Management of the different statuses in the SAP System is divided up according to

- sys tem s ta tus and- user status

System status

The SAP System contains in a central table a basic store of statuses that are valid for allapplications and can be used by all applications.

These statuses are maintained by SAP and cannot be changed. They are referred to as systemstatuses.

Business transactions

The SAP System contains in a central table a basic store of business transactions that are validfor all applications and can be used by all applications.

These business transactions are maintained by SAP and cannot be changed.

Business transaction - system status

A further central table, also predefined by SAP, defines a system status for every businesstransaction and indicates whether or not the corresponding system status is deleted or set duringthe business transaction.

Objects - business transactions

Another table defines the business transactions that are allowed for each SAP object (order,equipment and so on). This allocation is also predefined by SAP.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 26

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System



Result

The allocations listed above defines

- Which system statuses are the maximum possible for an object- Which system statuses can be set for the different individual business transactions

Status profile

You can define your own statusprofiles@ in the IMG activityDefine Status Profiles . Everystatus profile must be allocated to at least one object.

Every status profile contains one or more statuses allowed.

For each of these statuses, you can determine the system response within the businesstransactions predefined by SAP.

In the status profile you can

- define your own statuses (user statuses) and document their function in a respective long

text- determine the statusnumbers for user statuses which predefine the possible sequence for

processing user statuses

- define an initial status which is activated automatically when creating the object

- determine which user status is automatically activated when carrying out a businesstransaction

- define which operations are allowed or prohibited if a certain status is active

Status number

You can define a status number for every user status.

The status number determines the sequence in which the user statuses can be activated.

If you do not assign a status number to a user status, the user status can always be set.However, there can only be one user status with a status number active at any one time.If you assign a status number to a user status, you must also specify a lowest and a higheststatus number for the status. These limit the status number interval from which the followinguser status can be chosen.

Example of equipment status

SAP supplies the following business transactions for equipment:

- Set deletion indicator (From release 3.0B)

- Cancel deletion indicator (From release 3.0B)

- Install equipment

- Dismantle equipment

When maintaining the status profile, you can determine for every status within the profile

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 27

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System



whether equipment of this status can be installed or dismantled and whether a deletion indicatorcan be set or not.

You can also determine in status maintenance whether, for example, the deletion indicator is setautomatically and whether the system should respond with a warning or an error message whena deletion indicator is set.

Maintenance objects for which status profiles can be maintained:

- Equipment

- Functional locations

- Maintenance notifications

- Service notifications

- Maintenance orders

- Service or der s

Notes

In the menu for the configuration of equipment, you can specify a status profile as a defaultvalue for each equipment category.

For maintenance notifications, only a single status profile is allowed.

Actions

Define the user statuses for the individual maintenance objects.

19.1.1.3 Create Authorization Keys for User Status Authorizations

In this step you define authorization keys which you can use to set up authorization checks

when you manually set or delete a user status. When the system sets a user status as areaction to business transaction, it does not perform an authorization check.

When you set or delete a user status, the system checks whether the user is authorized for thisaction. In addition to the status profile and the object type, the system also checks theauthorization key assigned to the user status in question.

Example

You want to define that certain user statuses can be changed only by a specified employeegroup.

To do this, create an authorization key and assign it to the relevant user statuses.

In the general authorization maintenance you can then assign authorizations for this key via theauthorization object B_USERSTAT.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 28

y ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

1. Check whether you want to define authorizations for your user statuses.

2. If necessary, create authorization keys as follows:a) Choose "New entries".

b) Enter a key and an explanatory text in the appropriate fields and choose "Save".

You have now created the authorization key.

3. Assign the authorization key to one or more user statuses in your status profile.

4. Define corresponding authorizations and include them in the relevant authorization profiles.

19.1.1.4 Define Currency for Maintenance Statistics

In this step, you can define the currency in which plant maintenance statistical data is to bemanaged.

When specifying the currency for maintenance statistics, the following points should beconsidered.

- The selected currency is valid for the whole client.

- All the fields in plant maintenance that are currency-dependent and that go into thestatistical data are automatically translated into the currency for the statistics.The date with which the exchange rate is calculated is determined by the system on thebasis of the field and cannot be changed. For example, the acquisition date of a piece of equipment is taken as a basis for the conversion of the acquisition value. For theconversion of the value fields of a maintenance order, the order creation date is taken asbasis.

Recommendation

You should always define a currency for statistics. If you work without a currency forstatistics, all the value fields of the Plant Maintenance System are stored in the originalcurrency of the document or master record. This will lead to different currencies also beingstored in the statistics file.

As a result, any analysis of the statistics file made on the basis of the currency fields will beof little use, as currency conversion will not be carried out for evaluations and therefore valuefields containing different currencies will be added together.

Note on changing the currency for statistics

Changing the statistics currency is also possible even after records have already been stored inthe statistics file.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 29

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



However, this means that the currency fields in the information structures of the statistics filehave to be restructured.

You can set up the statistics file again with report ' RMIPS000'. However, this is only

necessary if statistical data already exists and the currency for the statistics has been changed.Activities

Define the currency for the plant maintenance statistical data.

19.1.1.5 Permits

You use permits in maintenance and service order processing. You can use permits to definecertain rules or conditions which are to be observed during the execution of maintenance tasks.

You can define the time during the order processing, the permit must be granted:

- before an order is released

- before an order is technically completed

You can find further information on working with permits in the SAP library, underPlant Maintenance (PM) -> Technical Objects (PM-EQM) -> Permits (CS-SE/PM-EQM-SF).

19.1.1.5.1 Define Permit Categories

Use

In this Customizing activity, you define the permit categories. You can use the permit categoryto group permits together. Every permit must be assigned to a permit category.

Example

You want to group your permits together into:

- Wor k permits

- Access per mits

To do this, you must define two permit categories and assign each permit to a permit category.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 30

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.1.5.2 Define Permit Groups

In this Customizing activity, you defineone

permit group and assign a permit class to it; so that the system recognizes which permit classto use for the classification of the permit.

This makes it possible to automatically assign permits to a maintenance- or service order, if theorder data correspond to the characteristic attributes of the classified permits.

Requirements You can only define one permit group. The permit class must belongto class type049 (class type for permits).

19.1.1.5.3 Set List Editing for Permits

Use

In this Customizing activity, you can configure the list of permits.

We recommend defining several variants, so that, for example, you can consider outstandingpermits and those already issued separately.

Naturally, each user can predefine a selection for just those permits which they can issuethemselves.

Here, you can define the possible selection fields which occupy selection fields with concretevalues and make the field selection for the list display.

Procedure

When you execute the function, you reach a screen in which you have several selection options.

You usually find the functions:

- Selection screen list display mode (this can be missing, depending on the Customizingactivity)

- Selection screen list change mode (this can be missing, depending on the Customizingactivity)

- Maintain field selection list

When you choose selection fields, you reach an additional window, in which you must mark'Variant for all selection screens' .By choosing Continue , you reach another screen in which you can specify attributes for the

selections fields.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 31

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The attributes have the following meaning:

- ProtectedThis means that this field is displayed in the selection screen, but is not ready for input.For example, you have a selection field with a value which should not be changed by theuser.

- InvisibleThis means that this field is hidden in the selection screen and cannot be used as aselection criterion.

- VariableThis means that this field is given a variable, not a concrete value.For example, if the selection is always performed using a certain call horizon (forexample, the current month). In this case, you would enter the variablecurrent month .The current month would therefore be proposed as a selection criterion.

Note

Each user can also create their own selection screen. The selection screen defined by you isonly then proposed by the system, if no individual selection screen has been defined for theuser under their user name.

If you want to define an individual selection screen for each user, and the user-specificselection screen should be proposed automatically when the report is called up, the name of thereport variant must begin withU_USERNAME .

Maintenance of selection variants

When you execute the function, you reach the initial screen with all the selection fields. Thereyou can define the standard selection screen. This selection screen is then always proposed if noindividual selection screen has been defined for the user under the nameU_USERNAME .The name of the selection variant is alwaysSAP_TCODE_XXXX . XXXX stands for therelevant application transaction.

Maintenance or user-specific selection screensThis function is not set using Customizing.The individual user maintains the user-specific selection variants by calling up and executing theindividual transaction.The user can call up the functionSettings from the list, and generate their own selectionscreen there using the functionSet variants .The system thereby automatically generates the variant 'U_USERNAME' , which is always calledup for the user after saving for subsequent transactions used.

Setting the field selection settings

You maintain the field selection for the list by executing the report, and then choosingSettings -> Display variants -> Administration in the list.

Note that the setting you make here for the field selection becomes a presetting, which is then

always used if the individual user has not defined their own field selection.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 32

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



For more information about working with lists, see "PM - Cross-Application Functions" in theSAP library.

19.1.1.6 Measuring Points, Counters and Measurement Documents

In this section you make the settings for the measuring points.

You need measuring points if you want to manage measurement readings or counters for

technical objects in the system.

19.1.1.6.1 Make System Settings for Measuring Points and MeasurementDocuments

In this IMG activity you can make global system settings for measuring points, counters andmeasurement documents. At the moment there is just one system setting in this IMG activity:

- Generation of interval documents for the counter reading transferThis concerns an optional activity that is only required in rare cases. You can also makethe system settings at a later date.

Example

A commercial aircraft is mapped in the SAP system as a hierarchical structure of technicalobjects (functional locations and equipment). It contains approx. 2500 pieces of equipment,which are individually maintained using a maintenance plans based on counter readings. Thesame two counters are assigned to every piece of equipment:

- F light hours

- Number of starts and landings

When using the counter reading transfer, it suffices to enter the counter readings just once foreach aircraft (for each tail number). The system then calculates the difference from the lastentry and automatically communicates this difference (and correspondingly the object structure)to all the lower-level functional locations and pieces of equipment.

This simple counter reading transfer is directly activated at the receiving measuringpoints/counters. You do not need any special system setting for this.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 33

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Depending on the frequency of the entries, each aircraft has a daily tally of 5000 or moremeasuring documents. For a normal stock of 50 to 500 aircraft this gives rise to a mass of documents that can barely (or not at all) be managed by the current database. The high volumeof documents is because the counter reading transfer for every counter reading at the highest

level generates a single document for every counter at the lower levels.Use

Because only the most recent counter reading is relevant for the maintenance plan scheduling,an option was created to accumulate the counter readings from the lower levels into intervaldocuments. This means that the same measurement document is used as long as the equipmentis installed at the same functional location or main equipment. Thus there is only onemeasurement document for each installation interval of a piece of equipment. This gives rise tothe name "interval document".

As regards the individual measuring point/counter, this global system setting only has onedefault character. You can further set individual measuring points/counters such that the counterreading transfers from them are mapped in single documents.

RequirementsIf you have already used the simple counter reading transfer before Release 4.6, please see SAPnote 428786.

Otherwise you can activate the interval documents at any time.

Resetting the system settings for interval documents is quite difficult during operations: Becausethe system setting has to be considered for the performance optimization of many programs, itcan only be reset after all the interval documents have been archived and the counter readingtransfer to all measuring points/counters has been reset to single documents.

Using interval documents gives rise to the following restrictions:

- The standard list for measurement documents (transaction IK17) can no longer displaydetailed single values for lower-level measuring points / counters, as there are no moresingle documents. This also applies to the corresponding graphics.

However the system can list the corresponding source documents for each intervaldocument, and it can calculate the virtual counter reading for a particular measuringpoint/counter for any reference time point.

- Archiving the measurement documents must take place on uniform key days system-wide.Before archiving, the interval documents must be split usint program RIARCMR1 for therespective key day. For further information, see SAP note 431536.

- If you use the customer exit IMRC0001 or the corresponding Business Transaction EventPM000040_E, you must, if necessary, adapt your implementation to the logic of theinterval documents.

Standard settings

The interval documents are not activated in the standard system.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 34

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Because of the limitations outlined above, you should only activate this option, if you areforced to by the size of your database.

Activities

Activate the system setting "Transfer-generated interval documents".

If, at the time of activation, measuring points/counters already exist in your system, then youcan use programm RIMRCINT to convert these to interval documents. A merging of pre-existing single documents into interval documents is neither necessary nor intended.

19.1.1.6.2 Define Measuring Point Categories

Use

In this IMG activity, you define measuring point categories. You always need measuring pointcategories when you want to enter counter readings or measurement readings for equipment orfunctional locations.The measuring point category defines:

- Whether a measurement position is uniqueYou use the measurement position to define the sort sequence of measuring points for themeasuring point object (for example, measurement position 1 "Pressure in front left tire",measurement position 2 "Pressure in front right tire".)You can use the uniqueness check for measurement positions to prevent a measurementposition from being defined multiple times for one object. You can also check uniquenessat client level.

- Which catalog type is used for measurement recordingYou can also use catalogs for measurement recording or counter recording.In catalogs, you can define allowed values for a measuring point, which you can selectwhen recording measurements via the catalog hierarchy.You can use this functionality if you want to predefine qualitative or descriptivemeasurement readings, or want to use these predefined values when recording counterreadings.

- Which system response occurs if measurement range limits are exceeded

- Which allowed tolerance time exists for recording future measurement readingsThe tolerance time is given in seconds.Measurement readings and counter readings are actual data and cannot be in the future, sothis function only makes sense if the measurement readings are copied from another systemwhose CPU time (= time of measurement recording) is different from the CPU time of the SAP system.

Requirements

Catalogs should be maintained.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 35

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Standard settings

The standard system contains a measuring point category.

Activities

1. Check the delivered measuring point category.

2. Adjust the delivered measuring point category to meet your requirements.

3. Define new measuring point categories if required.

19.1.1.6.3 Create Number Ranges for Measuring Points

In this step you define number ranges for measuring points.

Notes

As the numbers for measuring points are assigned internally, you should work with the standardsettings. If you want to make changes, you should always use number range 01.

Activities

1. Define number ranges for the measuring points.

2. If necessary, change the standard settings.To do this, use number range 01.

You transport number range objects as follows:

Choose Interval -> Transport in the accounting documentNumber Range screen.

All intervals for the selected number range object are deleted in the target system first. Afterthe import, only the intervals you export are present. The number statuses are imported withtheir values at the time of export.

Dependent tables are not transported or converted.

19.1.1.6.4 Create Number Ranges for Measurement Documents

In this step you define number ranges for measurement documents.

Notes

As the numbers for measurement documents are assigned internally, you should work withstandard settings. If you want to make changes, you must always use number range 01.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 36

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

1. Define the number ranges for the measurement documents.

2. If necessary, change the standard settings.To do this, use number range 01.





19.1.1.6.5 Define Field Selection for Measuring Points and MeasurementDocuments

Use

In this IMG activity you can define the field selection for measuring points and measurementdocuments.

If you choose influential fields, you will find fields in the list that will allow you to make anobject-based field selection.

This allows you, for example, to control that a certain field selection applies to selectedmeasuring point categories.

Activities

General Information on Field Selection

All screens, for which a field selection is possible, are summarized into individual screenmodification groups (e.g. all detail screens for the confirmation of a maintenance order).

The following types of fields are defined for each screen group:

- Modif iable Fie lds

- For the modifiable fields, use indicators to specify how the individual fields in the screenare represented. You have the following options:

- The field is ready for input (default setting)

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 37

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- The field requires an input (required field)

- The field is only displayed

- The field is hidden

- The field is highlighted

If, for example, in the list and detail screens of the confirmation in the order, you specifythat the work center is a required entry, you must maintain the work center for allconfirmations.

- Influencing FieldsFor the influencing fields, you specify how the modifiable screen is represented in thescreen, depending on a valueFor example, you define that the work center is a required entry for a certain order type.

Activities

Your Options for Defining the Field Selection

You maintain the indicators of the modifiable fields, independently of a influencing value

1. Define the screen groups for which you want to modify fields.

2. Maintain the indicators for the modifiable fields and the values for the influencing fields.You have the following options for defining the field selection:

3. Place the cursor on a screen group.

4. Choose Modifiable .All the fields, which you can modify for this screen group, appear on the screen.

a) Maintain the indicators.

b) Save your entries

You can maintain a influencing value for an influencing field andthen the indicators forthe modifiable fields

a) Place the cursor on a screen group.

b) Choose Influencing .All of the fields, for which you can enter influencing values, appear on the screen.

c) Double-click on the influencing field, to which you wish to assign a concrete value.All of the fields, which can be modified depending on the influencing value, appearon the screen.

d) Maintain a value in the fieldInfluence value and the corresponding indicator for themodifiable fields.

e) Press Enter .Your entries are copied.

f) Maintain other values for the influencing field or choose other fields using the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 38

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



function key 'Influencing' .

g) Save your entries.

You can maintain an indicator for a modifiable field and specify thevalues of the

influencing fields .a) Place the cursor on a screen group.

b) Choose Modifiable .All the fields, which you can modify for this screen modification group, appear onthe screen.

c) Double-click on a modifiable field, for which you wish to maintain influencing values.All influencing fields appear on the screen.

d) Place the cursor on a influencing field, for which you wish to assign a value, andpress New Values .A dialog box appears on the screen.

e) Maintain the value and indicator for the influencing field.

f) Press Continue .The values are copied.


19.1.1.6.6 Set List Editing for Measuring Point Lists


Procedure


You usually find the functions:- Selection screen list display mode (this can be missing, depending on the Customizing

activity)



When you choose selection fields, you reach an additional window, in which you must mark'Variant for all selection screens' .By choosing Continue , you reach another screen in which you can specify attributes for theselections fields.


- Protected

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 39

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This means that this field is displayed in the selection screen, but is not ready for input.For example, you have a selection field with a value which should not be changed by theuser.



Note





Maintenance or user-specific selection screens

This function is not set using Customizing.The individual user maintains the user-specific selection variants by calling up and executing theindividual transaction.The user can call up the functionSettings from the list, and generate their own selectionscreen there using the functionSet variants .The system thereby automatically generates the variant 'U_USERNAME' , which is always calledup for the user after saving for subsequent transactions used.



Note that the setting you make here for the field selection becomes a presetting, which is thenalways used if the individual user has not defined their own field selection.


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 40

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.1.6.7 Set List Editing for Measurement Document Lists


Procedure











Note



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 41

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








You maintain the field selection for the list by executing the report, and then choosing

Settings -> Display variants -> Administration in the list.Note that the setting you make here for the field selection becomes a presetting, which is thenalways used if the individual user has not defined their own field selection.


19.1.1.7 Warranties

In this section, you make the settings for the warranties. You can make settings for warrantiesthat you can use, as well as for warranties that you give to your contractual partners.

19.1.1.7.1 Check Warranty Categories

In this step you check the warranty category.

You can determine for each of the warranty categories whether warranties of this warrantycategory can be classified using the classification system.

Classification of warranties is useful when you want to manage several warranties and groupingwarranties by means of the classification system makes it easier to find individual warranties.

Remember that you can define various warranty types, which facilitates the broad structuring of warranties alongside the classification system. Searching via warranty types is possible viamatchcodes.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 42

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Standard settings

In the standard system, a distinction is made between two warranty categories.

For warranty category 'I' , you are the warrantee.For warranty category 'O' , you are the guarantor.

Notes

You should change the settings only if you do not want to use one of the warranty types.

- Delete warranty category 'I' , if you are never the warrantee, or you do not want tomanage these warranties at your equipment.

- Delete warranty category 'O' , if you never want to manage warranties that you makeavailable to your customers using your customer equipment.

Activities

1. Check the delivered warranty categories.

2. Determine for each warranty category whether you want to use the Classification Systemfor warranties of the corresponding warranty category.

19.1.1.7.2 Define Warranty Types

In this section, you can define your own warranty types.

Each warranty type must be allocated to a warranty category.

Example

You can use several warranty types for a warranty category to distinguish, for example,

manufacturer warranties from vendor warranties.Standard settings

When creating the warranty types, you will see some fields which are not ready for input.These fields are reserved for future developments and cannot, at present, be maintained.

Activities

Define your warranty types.

Allocate each warranty type to a warranty category.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 43

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.1.7.3 Define Number Ranges for Warranty Types

In this step, you can define number ranges for the individual warranty types.

You have the following options for assigning numbers:- internal number assignment

With internal number assignment, numbers are assigned automatically by the SAP system.The number range 01 must be created.

- external number assignmentWith external number assignment, numbers are assigned manually by the user. The numberrange 02 must be created.

Activities

For each warranty type, define an internal or external number range.





19.1.1.7.4 Maintain Transaction Start Default Values for Sample Warranties

In this step, you can define defaults for the transactions:

Create master warranty

Change master warranty

Display master warrantyYou can define here which

- warranty type is to be proposed;

- whether the activity overview screen or

- the detail screen for entering a warranty with counters should be displayed, or

- whether the initial screen is to be skipped when the transaction is called.

Activities

Check which screen comes next for the individual transactions of your business requirements.

Maintain the defaults for the master warranties.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 44

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.1.7.5 Define Warranty Counters

In this step you can define warranty counters and specify one warranty counter as a defaultcounter. This counter will be copied automatically when you create a master warranty.

Note

You must make these settings when you set up performance based warranties.

Activities

Define the warranty counters.

Additional information

It is possible to transport settings into another client or SAP system, but remember that thisshould be done only if the characteristics in the target system correspond exactly to thecharacteristics defined here.

19.1.1.8 Partners

In this section, you adapt the presettings for the field selection for list display of partner datato your requirements.

The settings apply to partner data for:


- Equipment

- Notifications

- Orders

19.1.1.8.1 Define Partner Determination Procedure and Partner Function

Use

In this step, you define the partners for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service.

- The following partner types are defined in the system:

- Customer (customer number)

- Contact per son

- Vendor (vendor number)

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 45

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- User

- Personnel number

- Organizational unit

- Position- You can define partner roles centrally for all the applications in Logistics and assign a

particular partner type to these.For example, you can assign the partner type "Customer" (with customer master andcustomer number) to the partner function "Sold-to-party".

- You can define partnerdetermination procedures and assign any number of partner functionsto each one. You can define whether a particular role in the notification or order shouldbe changeable, and whether it is obligatory.

- A group of partners (processor, person responsible) belongs to each notification type andorder type. You therefore assign an appropriate partner determination procedure to eachnotification type and order type.

You also assign the partner functions to each notification type and order type. Here you definewhich which role should be assigned to a particular function (for example, employeeresponsible).

- For pieces of equipment, you define the partner determination procedure in Customizingfor Plant Maintenance and Customer Service under Assign partner determination procedureto equipment category. You can synchronise the functionsVendor, current customer,customer, final customer, operator with the partner functions.

Recommendation

Use the partner determination procedures contained in the standard system and their assignmentsto notification types and order types. If you want to use your own partner determinationprocedures, you can use the notification types, order types, and partner determination procedures

predefined by SAP as a reference.Activities

1. Define the partner functions and partner determination procedures.

2. Assign a partner determination procedure to each notification type and order type and namethe corresponding partner functions for the header screens of the notifications and orders.

19.1.1.8.2 Copy Partner Functions to Master and Movement Data

In this work step, you can define which of your partner functions should be copiedautomatically into the corresponding movement data.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 46

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You can make this assignment unique for each partner profile and each partner function.

In the master data, you can maintain partners for:


- Equipment- Ser ial number s

The partner functions can be copied fron the master data objects in:

- Notifications

- Orders

Special case: Service Management and SD delivery

Partner functions indicated here are copied from SD deliveries in the serial number masterrecords.

Recommendation

You can use this indicator to reduce the manual maintenance requirements for maintainingpartner data in the processing of maintenance and service tasks.

If you do not set the indicator, you can still copy the partners in the notification or in theorder using the function code or maintain new partners manually.

If the indicator is set, you can, of course, still add new partners to the notification and order.

19.1.1.8.3 Define Field Selection for List Display of Customer Data

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for customer data list displays.

The fields that you choose at this point are used for the field selection. Here you can definethe layout of maintenance lists or the structure display by numbering the fields which shouldappear in the lists or by marking them as 'suppressed' .

Numbering fields defines the sequence in the list, so that the field with the number ' 1' appearsfirst in the list, the field with the number '2' second, and so on.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 47

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Notes

- The individual user cannot activate fields which are selected as 'suppressed' for hisuser-specific field selection.

- An individual can define his own user-specific list from the field list you have defined.However, he can only use those fields which are numbered and those marked as ' notsuppressed' for this purpose.

- If you provide fields with a number, these fields are displayed to the user in the relevantapplication transactions in the lists.

- If a user does not define his own field selection, the fields you have activated will bedisplayed to him.

Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for customer data list displays.

19.1.1.8.4 Define Field Selection for List Display of Vendor Data

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for vendor data list displays.



Notes





Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for vendor data list displays.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 48

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.1.8.5 Define Field Selection for List Display of Personnel Data

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for HR data list displays.



Notes





Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for HR data list displays.

19.1.1.8.6 Define Field Selection for List Display of Contact People

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for contact person list displays.



Notes



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 49

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for contact person list displays.

19.1.1.8.7 Define Field Selection for List Display of Organizational Units

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for the list display of organizationalunits.



Notes




- If a user does not define his own field selection, the fields you have activated will be

displayed to him.

Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for the list display of organizational units.

19.1.1.8.8 Define Field Selection for List Display of Positions

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for the list display of positions.


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 50

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




Notes





Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for the list display of positions.

19.1.1.8.9 Define Field Selection for List Display of User Data

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for user data list displays.



Notes





Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for user data list displays.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 51

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.1.8.10 Define Field Selection for List Display of Address Data

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for address data list displays.The fields that you choose at this point are used for the field selection. Here you can definethe layout of maintenance lists or the structure display by numbering the fields which shouldappear in the lists or by marking them as 'suppressed' .


Notes


- An individual can define his own user-specific list from the field list you have defined.However, he can only use those fields which are numbered and those marked as ' not

suppressed' for this purpose.- If you provide fields with a number, these fields are displayed to the user in the relevant

application transactions in the lists.


Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for address data list displays.

19.1.1.8.11 Field Selection for Partner Addresses

You can use this step to define which fields should be displayed for creating or changing anaddress for each partner function. The field selection for each partner function is valid in bothnotifications and orders. It is not possible to distinguish between the field selections for creatingand changing.

Requirements

Create the relevant transaction variant which reflects your field selection. It is advisable todisplay a transaction variant using only one screen variant.

Create Transaction Variant

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 52

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.1.9 Search Helps in Plant Maintenance and Customer Service

In this step, you learn how to revise or redefine the available search helps (previously knownas matchcodes).

You can find information about the functions for search help maintenance in the SAP Libraryunder Basis -> ABAP Development Workbench -> ABAP Dictionary -> Search Help .

Recommendation

To maintain the search help functions, technical knowledge of the ABAP Dictionary is required.The search help functions should be maintained by the system administration.

Standard settings

The search helps provided in the standard system will suffice in many cases.

Activities

1. Check whether the search helps in the standard system are sufficient for your requirements.

2. If necessary, add the search helps for the relevant search help objects.

Further notes

Search helps are created for all clients.

Note that having a large number of search helps can impair system performance. Check whichsearch helps you want to use for your work area. You can deactivate search helps that you donot use.

To improve performance, it may be necessary to structure indices for the new or changedsearch helps.

From Release 4.0, the conventional matchcode search has been replaced by an improved searchhelp. The maintenance transaction AD20 is now used for search help objects. Transaction AD21can now be used to maintain the conventional matchcode objects.

19.1.1.10 Define Object Information Keys

In this step you can define different object information keys.

An object information key can be assigned to the following object types:

- functional location categories

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 53

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- equipment categories

- maintenance and service notification types

- maintenance and service order types

Via the parameterization of the object information key, you determine the data of a technicalobject (equipment, functional location, structure) that is shown in a special information window.

The object information also contains history data from the PM Information System and datafrom the notifications and orders executed.

You can use the parameterization of the object information to define whether the notificationand order information should be displayed:

- for a technical object,

- for the higher-level object, or

- for the entire structure.

Furthermore, you can determine whether the object information should be displayed

- using a pushbutton or

- automatically when object information is selected for the object specified.

To activate the display depending on notification and order data, you can define threshold valueswhich are used to select historical data through the PM Information System. When one of thethreshold values is reached, the object information is displayed and is indicated with this symbol@03@ in the object information mask.

Further notes

In the data fields for classification, you can specify views for the classification, whose datashould be displayed in the object information.

Note that the views for each class type in Customizing can be freely defined. For this reason,F4 help is not possible here. Here you can check the Customizing of the class types.

You can maintain three fields for the classification:

- Automatic view: If you enter the number of a view in this field, the object information isautomatically displayed, if an attribute of the reference object class is assigned to the viewselected.

- Display view: In this field, you can specify a class, whose attributes should be specified inthe object information screen. These attributes are indicated by @30@.

- By marking the field for attributes, the characteristic values of the attributes are output inthe object information.

You should use the standard class type of your objects for the object information.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 54

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Field notification information system and notification selection

If you select the field for completed notifications, then completed notifications are also selectedwhen you use the notification file to make your selection.

The following lines relate to displaying the selected notifications:Here you can determine which notifications you want to display for the object information:

- outstanding notifications and/or

- completed notifications

Requirements

Standard settings

Activities

Example

You want to make sure that object information is always displayed if a contract is created foran object or if at least 5 notifications or at least 4 orders were carried out in the last 365days. The system should take the last 365 days as well as completed notifications into accountwhen selecting notifications.

Completed and outstanding notifications should be displayed in the object information.

To do this, you need to make the following settings.

- Mar k the field automatically .

- Mar k the field Contract .- Enter 365 in the fieldNo. days for notifications in the information system.

- Enter 5 for NotifsCreated .- Enter 4 for Orders created .- Enter 36 5 for Notifications selection .

- Mar k the field SelComplNotifs .

- Mark OutstdgNotifs and CompletedNotifs to display the last notifications in the objectinformation.

Object information is always automatically displayed when one of the threshold values definedabove is reached.

The object information is also included automatically, if:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 55

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- the outstanding or completed notifications indicator is set

- if the contract or classification indicator is set

- if the reference object is under warranty

19.1.2 Technical Objects

In this section, you make the necessary settings for the technical objects, for example,

- pieces of equipment

- functional locations

19.1.2.1 General Data

You can maintain the general data for Plant Maintenance master data in this menu option.

This data will then be universally valid for all the master data objects in Plant Maintenance.

19.1.2.1.1 Define Types of Technical Objects

Use

In this step, you define the types of technical objects.

You can assign each piece of equipment and each functional location to a technical object type.This allows pieces of equipment that have the same use, for example, to be combined intogroups. You can use this grouping for evaluating your master data or maintenance data.

The types of technical objects are also used as a grouping instrument in fleet management.

Activities

Assign a key and a description for each type of technical object.

19.1.2.1.2 Define Plant Sections

You define your plant sections in this step.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 56

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The plant section enables you to subdivide the maintenance plant from the point of view of production responsibility. The person responsible for the plant section is the contact forcoordination between production and plant maintenance.The plant section can be used for evaluation purposes.

Every piece of equipment and functional location can be assigned to a plant section.Note

You can also specify a plant section when processing maintenance tasks.

Activities

Define your plant sections.

19.1.2.1.3 Define Planner Groups

Use

This step allows you to define maintenance planner groups.

Planner groups or maintenance planning groups must be defined separately for each maintenanceplanning plant.

Depending on the size and structure of your company, a maintenance planning group may be anindividual department (for central work preparation), a group of skilled craftsmen or aworkshop.

Every piece of equipment and functional location can be allocated to a maintenance planninggroup.

Maintenance planning groups can also be used for evaluation purposes.

Notes

You must also specify a maintenance planning group when processing

maintenance tasks.

Activities

Define your maintenance planner groups.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 57



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



case, the user may process the object.

19.1.2.1.6 Set View Profiles for Technical Objects

This Customizing activity allows you to create individual screens for technical objects.

The data fields for the technical objects are sorted by contents, so-called screen groups. Youcan define one or more view profiles for each screen group, for example, equipment.

Each view profile enables you to assign pre-grouped and accompanying data fields to individualscreen templates.

These screen templates can be labeled individually using tab pages.

For example, there are screens for:

- General data

- Location data

- Organizational data

- Structur e data- Fleet object data

To make the tab pages visible in the maintenance transactions, they must be labeled as active.

You can assign a view profile to each equipment category or functional location category, andeach fleet object type.

Recommendation

Check the standard system closely.

19.1.2.1.7 Define Object Information Keys






________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 59



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Here you can determine which notifications you want to display for the object information:



Requirements

Standard settings

Activities

Example




- Mar k the field automatically .- Mar k the field Contract .- Enter 365 in the fieldNo. days for notifications in the information system.









________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 61

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.1.8 Define Selection Procedure for Structural Display and BOMs

Here you can define how the display programs for the structural display of hierarchies and billsof material obtain the data.

The settings are only used for performance and do not influence the scope of the datadisplayed.

Example

You have defined very broad and deep structures for your functional locations.

If a user chooses the stuctural display of a functional location as far as the fourth level, thenext level down is read automatically by the program.

This means that under certain circumstances tree-type structures may take much longer to readwhich adversely affects performance.

The same also applies for BOM structures. If a user chooses a bill of material, normally thecomplete bill of material is imported with all the sub-nodes.

Standard settings

In the standard setting, more data is read than the user originally selected.

If you have performance problems with your system for the structural display or listing of BOM hierarchies, you can set the program up so that only the list selected by the user is read.

For BOM structures and functional location structures, only the desired levels are read andexpanded.

Further notes

This setting applies for all clients. For this reason, you can only maintain one entry.

19.1.2.2 Functional Locations

You will find all the actions required for the implementation of the functional locations andreference functional locations in this step.

19.1.2.2.1 Create Structure Indicator for Reference Locations/Functional

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 62

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Locations

Use

In this step, you can define your

structure indicators for reference functionallocations and functionallocations. in this step. Thestructure indicator determines the edit mask and the number of the hierarchy levels when youcreate functional loction structures.

The edit mask defines:

- the total length of the functional location number

- the lengths of the individual blocks of the functional location number

- the characters allowed

- N umber s --> Edit mask N

- Letters --> Edit mask A

- Numbers and le tters - -> Edit mask X

- Special characters and numbers and letters --> Edit mask SNotes

- The characters allowed can be defined by field.

- Once a functional location already exists for a particular structure indicator, you receive awarning when you change the edit mask.

Activities

Define the possible edit masks for functional locations and reference functional locations.

19.1.2.2.2 Alternative Labeling of Functional Locations

In this step you can define whether you want to use alternative labeling systems for functionallocations.

Example

You use a graphical information system in which the functional locations are managed usingdifferent labels or numbers to those in the SAP System.

You want it to be possible for specific users to address the same functional location using the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 63



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Recommendation

To optimize performance, you should execute program RI_IFLOT2IFLOS after activatingalternative labeling.

19.1.2.2.2.2 Define Labeling Systems for Functional Locations

In this step, you can define alternative labeling systems and give a corresponding description.

You can also define whether the labels should be checked for uniqueness across all labelingsystems. Uniqueness is always checked within any individual labeling system.

One of the labeling systems must also be selected as a primary labeling system. This should bethe system used by the majority of users.

The users can switch between the different labeling systems by means of user profiles. If theuser has not created their own profile, then they automatically work with the primary labeling

system.

Recommendation

For labeling systems 1, 2 and 3, the domains TPLNR_1, TPLNR_2 and TPLNR_3 aredelivered with the relevant conversion routines in the standard system. You can use thesedomains to access specific labeling systems in list reports and print programs.

Therefore, you should not work with an unnecessary number of alternative labeling systems. Forexample, if you are using several CAD systems, you should not define as many labelingsystems.

Further notes

When creating a functional location, the user must normally assign a labeling system, structureindicator and location category. However, if in Customizing, only one feature is defined for oneof these parameters, then the corresponding entry field is hidden automatically by the systemand completed internally.

19.1.2.2.3 Define Category of Reference Functional Location

Reference functional locations help you to save time when entering functional locations. Changes

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 65

to PM data, for example, only have to be made once to the reference functional location.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



to PM data, for example, only have to be made once to the reference functional location.

For each category of reference functional location you can define the following:

- the status profi le

- the default value for measuring point categories

These changes are then valid for all the ' genuine' functional locations that are derived from thisreference functional location.

You can define various categories of reference functional locations here.

Note

You should always use reference functional locations when you use several systems of the samecategory and you want to represent them with functional locations.

Example

You have three filling machines with the same structure in your company. These fillingmachines are to be managed in the system with three different functional locations. You want toenter changes made by the manufacturer, for example, to the structure or to the technical data

just once in the system.Solution: You create a reference functional location for a filling machine. The actual functionallocations or the actual filling machines are created with reference to the reference functionallocation "Filling machine". In the case of changes which affect all three filling machines thereference functional location is always changed. When the reference functional location ischanged the actual functional locations, in other words, the actual filling machines, are alsochanged automatically.

Recommendation

The reference functional location category is used only for field selection. When a referencefunctional location refers to ' genuine' functional locations, the categories of the functionallocations can be different. If you do not need a particular kind of field selection in the case of reference functional locations, you do not need to create any new categories of reference

functional location.Actions

Define the categories for the reference functional locations.

19.1.2.2.4 Define Structural Display for Reference Functional Locations

In this step you define the appearance of the structural display for reference functional locations.


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 66

Numbering fields defines the sequence in the list so that the field with the number ' 1' appears

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Numbering fields defines the sequence in the list, so that the field with the number 1 appearsfirst in the list, the field with the number '2' second, and so on.

Notes





Activities

Define the appearance of the structural display for your reference functional locations.

19.1.2.2.5 Define Category of Functional Location

In this activity, you define different categories of functional locations.

You can define the following for each functional location category:

- Status pr ofile

- Partner determination procedure

- Default value for the measuring point categories

- F ield selection

- Whether change documents are created

- A key that defines the appearance of the dialog window for object information.

Activities

Define your functional location categories.

Note concerning the partner determination procedure assignment

When you assign a partner determination procedure, you are only defining the possible partnerfunctions. If you have defined mandatory partner functions in a partner determination procedure,the system tries to assign values (such as a vendor number) to the mandatory partner functions.

The application programs do not preassign values to partner functions that are not flagged asmandatory partner functions in the partner determination procedure.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 67

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.2.6 Define Field Selection for Data Screen for Reference FunctionalLocations

In this step, you can define the field selection for reference functional locations.

Note that this relates exclusively to data fields for reference functional locations.

The programs for functional locations and equipment master records were remodelled for version4.5.

For this reason, the field selection also has its own transaction with different screens.

The field selection for functional locations and equipment can be defined together. Here youmaintain the data fields for the reference functional location.

19.1.2.2.7 Define Structural Display for Functional Locations

In this step you define the appearance of the structural display for functional locations.The fields that you choose at this point are used for the field selection. Here you can definethe layout of maintenance lists or the structure display by numbering the fields which shouldappear in the lists or by marking them as 'suppressed' .


Notes






Activities

Define the appearance of the structural display for your functional locations.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 68

19 1 2 2 8 D fi Fi ld S l ti f F ti l L ti

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.2.8 Define Field Selection for Functional Locations

In this step, you can define the field selection for function locations.

The fields offered here are common data fields for functional locations and equipment.For this reason, you should always take account of the affected values.

These fields are found in the following objects:

- Equipment

- Functional location

In the second setting, you can define the field selection for the fields which are only found inthe functional location.

Recommendation

When you select the affected fields, you see a list of fields which enable you to make anobject-related field selection.

You can, for example, define that a different field selection is valid for selected equipmentcategories than for certain categories of functional location.












- Influencing FieldsFor the influencing fields, you specify how the modifiable screen is represented in the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 69



d) Place the cursor on a influencing field, for which you wish to assign a value, andN V l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



press New Values .A dialog box appears on the screen.




19.1.2.2.9 Set List Editing for Reference Functional Locations


Procedure











________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 71

Note

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








This function is not set using Customizing.The individual user maintains the user-specific selection variants by calling up and executing the

individual transaction.The user can call up the functionSettings from the list, and generate their own selectionscreen there using the functionSet variants .The system thereby automatically generates the variant 'U_USERNAME' , which is always calledup for the user after saving for subsequent transactions used.





19.1.2.2.10 Set List Editing for Functional Locations


Procedure




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 72


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



activity)







Note






This function is not set using Customizing.The individual user maintains the user-specific selection variants by calling up and executing theindividual transaction.The user can call up the functionSettings from the list, and generate their own selectionscreen there using the functionSet variants .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 73

The system thereby automatically generates the variant 'U_USERNAME' , which is always calledup for the user after saving for subsequent transactions used.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







19.1.2.2.11 Set List Editing for Functional Locations in Service


Procedure

When you execute the function, you reach a screen in which you have several selection options.You usually find the functions:





The attributes have the following meaning:- Protected



- VariableThis means that this field is given a variable, not a concrete value.For example, if the selection is always performed using a certain call horizon (for

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 74



If you provide fields with a number, these are displayed to the user in the lists in thecorresponding application transactions, such that the field with the number ' 1' appears first in

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



the list, the field with the number '2' second, and so on.

Every user is also able to define his own field selection.

Example

You want the link number to be displayed in the first position and the link description in thesecond position in the list for all the links defined for a functional location.

Procedure

Choose the corresponding option 'Object links' and provide the field ' Link' with value ' 1' andthe field ' Description' with value ' 2'.

Note

When defining the field selection, you can mar k a field as to be ' suppressed' next to thecolumn 'Display position' .

The following needs to be considered here:Fields which are characterized as to be suppressed can no longer be activated as display fieldsby the individual user.

Recommendation

Mark only those fields as to be suppressed which none of your users wants to or should beable to see in the list display.

Further information

It is not currently possible to transport settings to another client or another SAP System.

19.1.2.2.12.1 Define Field Selection for Functional Location Fields

In this step you make the field selection for the multi-level functional location list.

Field selection object

Functional location data

Actions

Define the field selection.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 76

19.1.2.2.12.2 Define Field Selection for Equipment Usage Data Fields

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this step you make the field selection for displaying the equipment usage data in themulti-level functional location list.


Equipment usage data

Actions


19.1.2.2.12.3 Define Field Selection for Equipment Master Data Fields


Field selection object:

Equipment master

Actions


19.1.2.2.12.4 Define Field Selection for Partner Data Fields



Partner data

Actions


19.1.2.2.12.5 Define Field Selection for Notification Data Fields


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 77


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Notification data

Actions


19.1.2.2.12.6 Define Field Selection for Order Data Fields



Order data

Actions


19.1.2.2.12.7 Define Field Selection for Class Data Fields



Class data

Actions


19.1.2.2.12.8 Define Field Selection for Characteristic Data Fields



Characteristic data from the classification system

Actions


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 78

19.1.2.2.12.9 Define Field Selection for Document Management Fields

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





Document Management System data

Actions


19.1.2.2.12.10 Define Field Selection for Object Link Data Fields



Object link data

Actions


19.1.2.2.12.11 Define Field Selection for Measuring Point and Counter Fields

In this step you define the field selection for the multi-level functional location list.


Measuring points and counters

Actions

Define the field selection

19.1.2.2.12.12 Define Field Selection for Measurement Document andCounter Reading Fields

In this step you define the field selection for the multi-level functional location list.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 79



-Counters

Use

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this IMG activity, you define the field selection for the multi-level list for referencefunctional locations.


- Reference measuring point

- Reference counter


Use



Classes data

19.1.2.2.13.4 Define Field Selection for Characteristic Data Fields

Use



Characteristic data of classification system

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 81

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




Use



Data of document management system

19.1.2.3 Equipment

In this step you configure the equipment master records.

19.1.2.3.1 Equipment Categories

You must allocate an equipment category to every equipment master record that you create.

You determine the features of an equipment master by its equipment category.Decide which equipment categories you need to create on the basis of the control features:

- screen sequence during the maintenance of master data

- number interval and number assignment

- ongoing usage history

- option of installation at functional locations

- documents verifying changes to master data

- use as a production resource/tool

- status pr ofile

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 82

- equipment texts in several languages

In the following steps, you must group equipments you wish to manage under the SAP system

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



g p , y g p q p y g yin accordance with the criteria above and define characteristics for each equipment category.

Adapt the equipment categories configured to your company' s requirements or define newcategories if required.

19.1.2.3.1.1 Maintain Equiment Category

In this IMG activity, you define equipment categories. You use equipment categories todetermine the basic properties that you want the corresponding equipment master record to have.

Using control attributes, you can decide which equipment categories you need and how many.The following control attributes are available:

- Assignment of a reference category (used especially to define history-relevant fields of anequipment master record)

- Descriptive name of the equipment category by assigning a short text

- Prohibition of alphanumeric numbers in external number assignments

- Activation of change documents for documenting master data changes

- Triggering of specific Workflow events during master data maintenance

- Assignment of a view profile for master data maintenance

- Definition of a synchronization between material number and construction type

Notes

In IMG activities that follow, you can define further properties for your equipment categories:

- In addition to the view profile that enables you to easily configure specific tab pages, youcan also assign additional tab pages to each equipment category, such as Sales andDistribution data that is only required in special cases for equipment maintenance. Theseadditional tab pages cannot be configured using a view profile.Note that if you deactivate the additional tab pages, the system is easier to use. If one of the deactivated tab pages is required for a specific equipment master record at a later time,the user can reactivate it (using the correpsonding menu function).

- In addition, you can assign number range intervals for internal and external numberassignments to the equipment category. Note that in a previous step you decided if theexternal number assignment is only allowed to be numeric or if it can also bealphanumeric.

You can make the following settings for the equipment usage period:

- Usage history update

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 83

- Definition of history-relevant fields (the definition is made for each reference category, notfor each equipment category)

- Support of installation at functional locations

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Other important settings for the equipment category are:

- Assignment of a status profile- Assignment of a partner determination procedure

- Support of multilingual texts

Activities

1. Assign the indicators for your equipment categories.

2. Enter the descriptions for your equipment categories.

3. Assign a reference category to each equipment category.

19.1.2.3.1.2 Define Additional Business Views for Equipment Categories

In this step, you can define other views for each equipment category. The views representadditional data screens for the equipment master record.

You can activate or deactivate the following views.

- Sales data view

- PRT view

- Equipment configuration

- Ser ial data view

- View for other data

If you activate a view, the assigned data fields and screens can be automatically maintained.

If the views are deactivated, you can maintain the data fields and screens. However, you mustcall them up explicitly using one of the function keys.

Notes

You can change the views at any time.

The rigid assignment between reference equipment category and screen sequence (up to Version3.1I) is replaced by the settings options for views.

Activities

Define the possible views for each equipment category by activating or deactivating the views.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 84

19.1.2.3.1.3 Define Number Ranges

In this step you can define the number assignment category in the step equipment categories.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You must allocate a unique number for each equipment master record.

You have the following options:

- internal number assigmnentIn this case, the SAP System assigns the numbers.

- external number assignmentIn this case, the user assigns the numbers.

You can define both an internal and an external number range for each equipment category.The same number ranges can be shared by several equipment categories.

Recommendation

SAP recommend that you use internal number assignment.As you can select pieces of equipment according to different criteria using matchcodes, you donot need to use a descriptive external number as a general rule.

Activities

1. Define the number assignment category (internal and/or external) for each equipmentcategory.

2. Set up a group for each different number interval.

3. Define the number interval for each group.

4. Allocate each equipment category to a group.





19.1.2.3.2 Equipment Usage Period

In this step you define the documents verifying master record changes and the installationoptions at functional locations for each equipment category.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 85

19.1.2.3.2.1 Usage History Update

You define the equipment categories for which you want an ongoing usage history to be kept inhi Ch i d fi ld ill b l d i h hi Y

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



this step. Changes to certain master data fields will be logged in the usage usage history. Youdefine the fields concerned for each reference category.

Example

Using the usage history, you can, for example, define that changes to the account assignmentdata (e.g. cost center) are always documented in the system via the usage history.

This means that a change to the cost center in the equipment master record will always bedocumented by the system in such a way that you can display the equipment master record withthe data contents at the time of the change to the cost center at any time.

In contrast to the change doucmentation with change documents, not only the contents of thecost center field are saved before and after the change, but the time-dependent data fields of theentire equipment master record at the time of the change are saved to the database.

Notes

The updating of the usage history is not possible for all equipment master record fields.Exception: fields, whose contents do not usually change for business reasons, for example, thefield Manufacturer or the equipment acquisition date.

The change to these field contents can however be documented using change documents.

If you do not want documentation for equipment changes via the usage history, you can stillmake changes to the equipment master records using change documents.

Activities

Define for which equipment category a usage history should be written.

19.1.2.3.2.2 Define History-Related FieldsYou can define the fields which, when changed, will lead to a record being made in the usagehistory in this step.

Standard settings

The location and asset structure fields have already been selected in the standard system.

Activities

Select the fields that are to be relevant to the history.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 86

19.1.2.3.2.3 Define Installation at Functional Location

In this step you define for each equipment category, whether the installation of a piece of equipment is allowed at a functional location

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



equipment is allowed at a functional location.

Note

You only need to edit this step if you use functional locations.

Activities

You have the option of defining for each equipment category whether the installation of equipment at a functional location is allowed.

19.1.2.3.2.4 Field Selection for Usage ListDocumentation is not yet available.

19.1.2.3.3 Assign User Status Profile to Equipment Category

You can allocate a status profile to each equipment category in this step.

Notes

You should only use different status profiles for the individual equipment categories when this isnecessary from the viewpoint of your processes, for example, because you are dealing withcompletely different device categories.

If you are using different status profiles for different equipment that is administered by thesame users, there is a risk that the status maintenance will be unclear, owing to a high numberof internally defined statuses and next statuses.

Activities

Check that the standard system status fulfills your requirements.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 87

You should only define a user status if the number or level of detail of the system status doesnot conform to your requirements.

If necessary, assign a user status profile to each equipment category.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.3.4 Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Equipment Category

In this step you can allocate a partner determination procedure to each equipment category.

Requirements

Before you make the allocations, the possible partner determination procedures must be defined.

Definition partner determination procedure

Note

When you allocate a partner determination procedure, you are simply defining the possiblepartner functions. If you have defined mandatory functions in a partner determination procedure,the system will try to assign values to the mandatory partner functions (for example, vendornumber).Partner functions that are not marked as mandatory functions in the partner determinationprocedure are not assigned values by the application program.

Activities

Assign a partner determination procedure to each equipment category.

19.1.2.3.5 Define Field Selection for the Equipment Master Record

In this step, you can define the field selection for the equipment master record.

The fields offered here are common data fields for functional locations and equipment.

For this reason you should always take account of the affected values.

These fields are found in the following objects:

- Equipment


- Reference functional location

In the second setting, you can define the field selection for the fields which are only found inthe equipment master record.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 88

Recommendation

When you select the affected fields, you see a list of fields which enable you to make anobject-related field selection.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You can, for example, define that a different field selection is valid for selected equipment

categories than for certain categories of functional location.Note













Activities





________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 89



a) Maintain the indicators

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________











f) Maintain other values for the influencing field or choose other fields using thefunction key 'Influencing' .


You can maintain an indicator for a modifiable field and specify thevalues of theinfluencing fields .



c) Double-click on a modifiable field, for which you wish to maintain influencing values.

All influencing fields appear on the screen.d) Place the cursor on a influencing field, for which you wish to assign a value, and





________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 90

19.1.2.3.6 Allow Multilingual Text Maintenance for Each Equipment Category

In this step you can define for each equipment category whether the maintenance of equipmenttexts is allowed in several languages.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.3.7 Define List Structure for Structural Display

In this step you define the appearance of the structural display for equipment.



Notes

- The individual user cannot activate fields which are selected as 'suppressed' for his

user-specific field selection.- An individual can define his own user-specific list from the field list you have defined.

However, he can only use those fields which are numbered and those marked as ' notsuppressed' for this purpose.



Activities

Define the structural representation for your equipments.

19.1.2.3.8 Define List Stucture for Structural Display of Installed Bases

In this step, you define the layout of the structural display for installed bases.



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 91



This means that this field is hidden in the selection screen and cannot be used as aselection criterion.

- VariableThis means that this field is given a variable, not a concrete value.

l if h l i i l f d i i ll h i (f

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



For example, if the selection is always performed using a certain call horizon (for

example, the current month). In this case, you would enter the variablecurrent month .The current month would therefore be proposed as a selection criterion.

Note











19.1.2.3.10 Set List Editing for Equipment in Customer Service

Here, you can define the possible selection fields which occupy selection fields with concrete

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 93

values and make the field selection for the list display.

Procedure



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








- ProtectedThis means that this field is displayed in the selection screen, but is not ready for input.

For example, you have a selection field with a value which should not be changed by theuser.



Note




When you execute the function, you reach the initial screen with all the selection fields. Thereyou can define the standard selection screen. This selection screen is then always proposed if noindividual selection screen has been defined for the user under the nameU_USERNAME .The name of the selection variant is alwaysSAP_TCODE_XXXX . XXXX stands for the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 94

relevant application transaction.


This function is not set using Customizing.The individual user maintains the user-specific selection variants by calling up and executing theindividual transaction.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The user can call up the functionSettings from the list, and generate their own selectionscreen there using the functionSet variants .The system thereby automatically generates the variant 'U_USERNAME' , which is always calledup for the user after saving for subsequent transactions used.





19.1.2.3.11 Define Field Selection for Multi-Level List Displays of Equipment

In this step you maintain the default settings for the multi-level list display for equipment.

In the subordinate menu options you can determine the field selection for all objects which aredisplayed via the list display of a piece of equipment.

The field selection that you define here determines the standard field selection for your client.

If you provide fields with a number, these are displayed to the user in the lists in thecorresponding application transactions, such that the field with the number ' 1' appears first inthe list, the field with the number '2' second, and so on.

Every user is also able to create his own field selection.

Example

You want to display the link number in the first position and the link description in the secondposition in the list for all links which are defined as equipment.

Procedure

Choose the corresponding option 'Object links' and provide the field ' Link' with value ' 1' andthe field ' Description' with value ' 2'.

Note

When determining the field selection, you can mark a field as to be 'suppressed' next to thecolumn 'Display position' .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 95

The following needs to be considered here:

Fields which are characterized as to be suppressed can no longer be activated as display fieldsby the individual user.

Recommendation

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Mark only those fields as to be suppressed which none of your users wants to or should beable to see in the list display.

Note on the transporting of settings

You can not transport the settings into another client or another SAP System.


In this step you make the field selection for the multi-level equipment list.


Equipment master record fields

Actions


19.1.2.3.11.2 Define Field Selection for Equipment Usage Data Fields



Equipment usage dataActions




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 96



Actions

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







Partner data

Actions





Notification data

Actions





Order data

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 97

Actions


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






Class data

Actions


19.1.2.3.11.8 Define Field Selection for Characteristic Data FieldsIn this step you make the field selection for the multi-level equipment list.


Characteristic data of the classification system

Actions





Document Management System data

Actions


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 98




Permits

Actions

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




19.1.2.4 Settings for Fleet Management

In this IMG activity, you can make settings for fleet management.

You should use fleet management if, for example, you want to use technical objects to:

- Represent fleets of vehicles with specific vehicle data

- Perform consumption calculations

19.1.2.4.1 Assign View Profile and Equipment Categories to Fleet ObjectTypes

In this IMG activity, you define different types of fleet objects, for example:

- Heavy goods vehicles

- Cars

- Fork- lif t t rucks

- Trailers

An individual view profile, which defines the screen template layout for the fleet object-specificdata, can be assigned to each of these fleet object types.

You can still define equipment categories allowed for the fleet object types.

Note, however, that in this setting undefined equipment categories can be used for fleet objects.When creating a fleet object, the system highlights the incompatibility with a warning message.

If you only define one equipment category for each fleet object type, this is proposedautomatically when a new fleet object is created.

Example

For example, you can configure the screen templates differently for fork-lift trucks and heavygoods vehicles differently.

Requirements

The fleet object types must be defined in Customizing first as types of technical object.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 100

Activities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.4.2 Define Consumable Types

In this IMG activity, you can define consumable types. You can assign three consumable typesto each fleet object.

Example

You can define that a particular fleet object requires:

- Lead-free petrol

- Super petrol

- A certain type of engine oil

Further notes

The settings are used solely for checking the permitted values and can be used for reportingfunctions.

19.1.2.4.3 Define Usage Types for Fleet Objects

In this IMG activity, you can define different usage types for fleet objects.

The usage type is freely definable and intended as a criterion for usage-related categorization.

Example

Here you can define, for example, whether a fleet object can be used:

- Exclusively for business

- Privately and for business

- As company transport

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 101

- For Executive Board purposes and so on.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Further notes


19.1.2.4.4 Define Engine Types for Fleet Objects

In this IMG activity, you can define different engine types for fleet objects.

The engine type can be defined freely by you. It is intended as a criterion for usage-relatedcategorization.

Example

For example, you can define the following engine types for fleet objects:

- Electr ic power uni t

- Diesel motor

- 4-cyl inder petrol

- 6-cyl inder petrol

Further notes


19.1.2.4.5 Make Settings for Units of Measurement for Monitoring ofConsumption

In this IMG activity, you can make the settings for determining the energy and fuel

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 102



Standard settings

One entry is available for each standard calculation method. You only have to make therelevant assignments.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.4.8 Set Field Selection for Specific Fields in Fleet Management

In this IMG activity, you can define the field selection for the equipment master record.

The fields provided here are specific data fields from the equipment master record for fleetmanagement.

For this reason, you should always consider influencing values.

If you select the influencing fields, you can find fields on the list which enable object-relatedfield selection.












- Influencing Fields

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 105

For the influencing fields, you specify how the modifiable screen is represented in thescreen, depending on a valueFor example, you define that the work center is a required entry for a certain order type.

Activities


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






















________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 106

All influencing fields appear on the screen.



f) Press Continue .The values are copied

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The values are copied.g) Save your entries.

19.1.2.4.9 Set List Processing for Fleet Management Objects


Procedure







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 107



- Invisible

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



InvisibleThis means that this field is hidden in the selection screen and cannot be used as aselection criterion.


Note

Each user can also create their own selection screen. The selection screen defined by you isonly then proposed by the system, if no individual selection screen has been defined for the

user under their user name.If you want to define an individual selection screen for each user, and the user-specificselection screen should be proposed automatically when the report is called up, the name of thereport variant must begin withU_USERNAME .




This function is not set using Customizing.

The individual user maintains the user-specific selection variants by calling up and executing theindividual transaction.The user can call up the functionSettings from the list, and generate their own selectionscreen there using the functionSet variants .The system thereby automatically generates the variant 'U_USERNAME' , which is always calledup for the user after saving for subsequent transactions used.




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 108


19.1.2.4.10 Set Reference Object Screen for Vehicles

Use

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Use

In this IMG activity you can define the field for the vehicle data (for example, license platenumber), which is displayed in the order or the notification in the reference object area.

The system supports this display for the following reference object screens:

- Equipment (O150)

- Equipment + assembly (O110)

If this screen is activated, the current counter reading of the equipment is displayed. You canalso enter a new counter reading.

Note the following special features for display:

- If the counter reading was not created in the order or in the notification, but through atransaction such as "Consumption-Relevant Measurement Document Recording" (transactionIFCU), the counter reading is displayed inred in the order or in the notification.

- If the document displayed is linked with the order or the notification (for example, createdwith it), the counter reading is displayed inblack .

Activities

In the IMG activity, enter the technical name of a field from the "FLEET" structure. Forexample, if you want to display the license plate number in the order, enter the following:

- Scenar io: O150

- Field name: LICENSE_NUM

19.1.2.4.11 Consumption-Relevant Counter Reading Update

19.1.2.4.11.1 Define Tolerance Check for Usage Control

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 109



Requirements

Only the operating supplies indicated as default are considered for the "consumption-relevantmeasurement document recording" (transaction IFCU).

The operating supplies without a default indicator are not considered for theconsumption-relevant measurement document recording at present.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.4.11.4 Define Key and Cost Object for Updating Material Documents

Use

In this IMG activity you can set the booking of material documents, if the consumption of auxiliary- and expendable materials are recorded for a vehicle.

Here, for example, you create the movement type for goods issue and specify to which COobject the settlement should be (for example, cost center, settlement order or standing order).

You specify the key entered here for the goods movement in equipment for vehicles.

The information about the settlement type (for example, cost center, standing order, settlementorder) are passed on to the BAPI for goods movement.

Note

Note the following anomaly for orders: If you select a standing order and a settlement ordersimultaneously, the system nevertheless only gives one order number as the account assignmentobject.

19.1.2.5 Object Links

In this menu option you can make the settings for the object links.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 111

19.1.2.5.1 Define Object Types

In this step you can define new object categories for the object links.

Every object link is allocated to an object type. A status profile can be allocated to each objecttype.

You can use several object types in an object network.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Standard settings

An object type is contained in the standard system.

Note

If you want to use just one status profile for all object links and do not need the object typeas a selection criterion, you can use the standard system.

In this setting, you can still determine whether any alphanumeric object link numbers may begiven.

19.1.2.5.2 Define Media for Object Links

In this step you can define the media that are allowed for object links.

The medium indicates the kind of link (electricity, gas, telecommunications cable etc.) and youcan define it freely.

You can enter the material number for an object link for informative purposes in the fieldprovided.

Example

You are defining a medium for a cooling system. Only one particular type of coolant isallowed in this cooling system, and so you enter the number of the permitted coolant in the"Material" field.

Note

You should also supply a descriptive text for each medium, as this will be displayed in theassociated transactions.

Activities

Define the media for your object links.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 112

19.1.2.5.3 Define Number Ranges for Object Links

Use this menu option to define the number ranges for object links.

You have the following options:

- internal number assignment

With internal number assignment, the numbers are assigned automatically by the SAPsystem. The number range 01 must be created.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- external number assignmentWith external number assignment, the numbers are assigned manually by the user. Thenumber range 02 must be created.

Activities

Define the number ranges for your object links, depending on whether you require internal orexternal number assignment.



All intervals for the selected number range object are deleted in the target system first. After

the import, only the intervals you export are present. The number statuses are imported withtheir values at the time of export.


19 .1 .2 .5 .4 Set List Editing for Object Links from Equipment

Verwendung

In dieser IMG-Aktivität können Sie die möglichen Selektionsfelder festlegen, die Selektionsfeldermit konkreten Werten belegen und die Feldauswahl für die Listdarstellung vornehmen.

Vorgehensweise

Wenn Sie die Funktion ausführen, erhalten Sie ein Bild, auf der Sie mehrereSelektionsmöglichkeiten haben.

In der Regel finden Sie folgende Funktionen:

- Selektionsbild Liste Anzeigemodus (kann je nach IMG-Aktivität fehlen)

- Selektionsbild Liste Änderungsmodus (kann je nach IMG-Aktivität fehlen)

- Feldauswahl Liste pflegen

Bei der Auswahl der Selektionsfelder erhalten Sie ein weiteres Bild, auf dem Sie das FeldVariante für alle Selektionsbilder markieren müssen.

Mit Weiter gelangen Sie auf ein weiteres Bild, in dem Sie bestimmte Attribute für die

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 113



Einstellungen für die Feldauswahl setzen

Die Feldauswahl für die Liste nehmen Sie vor, indem Sie den Report ausführen und auf derListe Einstellungen -> Anzeigevarianten -> Verwaltung wählen.

Beachten Sie, daß Sie mit der hier vorgenommenen Einstellung für die Feldauswahl eineVorbelegung treffen, die immer dann genutzt wird, wenn der einzelne Benutzer für sich keineeigene Feldauswahl definiert hat.

Alles zu Arbeiten mit Listen finden Sie in der SAP-Bibliothek unter "PM -An end ngsübergreifende F nktionen"

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Anwendungsübergreifende Funktionen".

19.1.2.5.5 Set List Editing for Object Links from Functional Locations


Procedure








- Protected



- VariableThis means that this field is given a variable, not a concrete value.For example, if the selection is always performed using a certain call horizon (forexample, the current month). In this case, you would enter the variablecurrent month .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 115

The current month would therefore be proposed as a selection criterion.

Note


If you want to define an individual selection screen for each user, and the user-specificselection screen should be proposed automatically when the report is called up, the name of thereport variant must begin withU USERNAME

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



report variant must begin withU_USERNAME .









19.1.2.6 Define Transaction-Based Default Values for Object Types

This step allows you to define the default values for the object types for the maintenancetransactions associated with the objects in Plant Maintenance.

Recommendation

Before you maintain the default values, you should check which of the object categories thatyou have entered will be used most often in the productive system.

This should then be set as the default value in the case of the appropriate transaction.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 116

Requirements

You must have maintained the following object categories:

- equipment category

- functional location category

- reference functional location categoryActivities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

Define the object category default values for the maintenance transactions associated with theobjects in Plant Maintenance.

19.1.2.7 Material Data Settings for Plant Maintenance

You can make the settings specific to Plant Maintenance for material master records in thisstep.

Requirements

You must have edited the settings for Materials Management (material master data) alreadybefore you process this step.

19.1.2.7.1 Define Structural Display for Material Data

You can make the settings for the structural display of the material master records in this step.

These settings apply exclusively to the Plant Maintenance area.



Notes



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 117



Activities

Define the structural display for the material data.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.7.2 Set List Editing for Material Data


Procedure











________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 118

Note


If you want to define an individual selection screen for each user, and the user-specific

selection screen should be proposed automatically when the report is called up, the name of thereport variant must begin withU_USERNAME .

Maintenance of selection ariants

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________











19.1.2.8 Serial Number Management

In this section, you can make settings for serial number management.

Serial number management allows you to distinguish between individual items of a material thatare managed with a single material number.

Example

Company X produces three different types of solar collectors:

- Type A

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 119

- Type B

- Type C

There is a material master record for each type in the system. For control purposes, thecompany wants to know which customer received which collector type, and which serialnumber(s) of the collector type were supplied to the customer, when the individual solarcollectors were delivered.

It is therefore necessary to assign a serial number to the customer delivery in addition to thematerial number.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



A serial number master record is created with the assignment of the serial number. You canmaintain data fields specific to the serial number in the master record.

At a later date, it may be necessary to enter equipment master records for materials that havealready been serialized and delivered to customers, for example, if the producer of the solarcollectors also has to perform maintenance activities for the customers and therefore wants touse all the functions available in the equipment master record for a serialized material.

In order to keep this option open at any time, you must define a number range for serialnumbers. The numbers assigned from this number range are not the serial numbers but reservedkeys that stand for the combination of material number and serial number and the equipmentnumber that may possibly be assigned.

You can also define one or more serial number profiles.

The serial number profile defines how and under which conditions a serial number is assignedfor a material.

Note

A material can only be assigned serial numbers after the required serial number profile hasbeen entered in the material master for a specific plant.

19.1.2.8.1 Define Serial Number Profiles

Use

In this step, you define serial number profiles.

A serial number profile must be assigned to each material that is to be serialized. Thisassignment is made at plant level in the material master record. This means that you can assigna separate serial number profile to a material for each plant. However, a material can have amandatory serial number in one plant but not in others.

In a serial number profile, you define the following:

- Information about whether for a business operation:

- Serial numbers for which no master record exists in the system can be assigned

- Serial numbers which already exist in the system must be entered

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 120

- The equipment type that the system should propose as default when automaticallydistributing serial numbers in the case of the equipment master record

- Information about whether a stock validation is made for stock-relevant operations and howthe system should deal with inconsistencies.Note that this setting can only deliver meaningful results in combination with the setting of whether an operationrequires serial numbers .

- The business operations, for which a serialization- can be under taken

t b d t k

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- must be undertaken

- is automatically undertaken

- is not under taken

- The business operations for which an equipment master record must or must not be createdfor each serial number

- The equipment category which the system should propose for the automatic assignment of serial numbers in the case of equipment master records

Activities

Define the serial number profiles.

19.1.2.8.2 Define Serialization Attributes for Movement Types

In this Customizing step, you can define the serialization attributes of individual movement typesor movement type groups.

Maintaing this setting is only necessary if you think the assignment of the serialization attributesat operation level is too rough.

Currently, only the serialization operation MMSL (Maintain goods entry and goods issuedocument) is supported.

Notes

If you do not assign a movement type group to a movement type, then the system always usesthe settings from the serial number profile, that is defined for the respective serializationprocedure key.

Here you should only make settings, if you really absolutely need a movement-type-specificcontrol of the serialization attributes.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 121

Example

For example, in the serial number profile for the serialization procedureMMSL, you define thatserial numbers can be issued for goods movements (serial number usage02 ).

For certain movement types, however, you want to ensure that serial numbers must be used.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



To do this, you could define a movement type group here with the corresponding assignmentsand assign this movement type group to the required movement types in the next step.

19.1.2.8.3 Define Default Equipment Categories for Serial Numbers

Use

In this step, you define a central default equipment category for the serial numbermanagement.This equipment category is proposed by the system if the system cannot find an equipmentcategory in the serial number profile for a serialization operation.

Note

If you create master records for serial numbersmanually the system automatically proposes thedefault equipment categories

defined here. The internal number range of the equipment category you selected is copiedautomatically.

Note on serial number range

The numbers assigned via this setting are irrelevant for actual serial number management, sinceyou work with serial numbers or material numbers in the application transactions. The numbersassigned here, however, are keys for the equipment file, as a basic equipment master record iscreated in the background for each serial number.

For this reason, the internal number range of the selected equipment category will be proposed.

Activities

You can always make only one valid entry in this setting.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 122

19.1.2.8.4 Deactivate Lock for Internal Assignment of Serial Numbers

In this activity, you can deactivate the lock, which is set in the standard system for the internal

assignment of serial numbers. Several users can thereby create serial numbers for a material atthe same time.

Note

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



If the lock is deactivated, the system automatically updates the created serial numbers to thedatabase when internal serial numbers are assigned.

This results in gaps in the serial numbers created, as soon as you cancel the create operationwithout saving . However, you can fill in these gaps at any time by creating the missing serialnumbers manually.

19.1.2.8.5 Transfer of Stock Check Indicator to Serial Numbers

You must only execute this activity if you have changed the stock check indicator in the serialnumber settings and goods movements were already performed with serial numbers.

Further notes

Since the indicator, as to whether stocks should be checked for individual stocks, is copiedfrom the presettings in the data records, for this to be subsequently changed, the existing serialnumbers must be adjusted to the changed presettings.

These adjustments are made using a report which you can start here. Execute program' RISERNR9'

The runtime can be long depending on the number of data records.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 123

Note the report documentation

19.1.2.8.6 Set List Editing for Serial Numbers


values and make the field selection for the list display.Procedure

Wh t th f ti h i hi h h l l ti ti

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








When you choose selection fields, you reach an additional window, in which you must mark'Variant for all selection screens' .

By choosing Continue , you reach another screen in which you can specify attributes for theselections fields.





Note



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 124



When you execute the function, you reach the initial screen with all the selection fields. Thereyou can define the standard selection screen. This selection screen is then always proposed if noindividual selection screen has been defined for the user under the nameU_USERNAME .The name of the selection variant is alwaysSAP_TCODE_XXXX . XXXX stands for therelevant application transaction.Maintenance or user-specific selection screens

This function is not set using Customizing

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








19.1.2.8.7 Field Selection for Multi-Level List Display of Serial Numbers

In this section, you adapt the presettings for multi-level lists for serial numbers to yourrequirements.

This is a list which you can call up as a serial number history from the serial number masterrecord.


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 125


Notes



If id fi ld i h b h fi ld di l d h i h l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





19.1.2.8.7.1 Define Field Selection for Goods Movement Fields

In this step, you determine the field selection for the multi-level list display of serial numbers.

Field Selection Object

Goods movements for serial numbers

Activities

Determine the field selection.

19.1.2.8.7.2 Define Field Selection for Delivery Fields



Delivery

Activities


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 126

19.1.2.8.7.3 Define Field Selection for Inspection Lot Fields



Inspection lot

Activities


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




19.1.2.8.7.4 Define Field Selection for Sales Order Fields



Sales order

Activities


19.1.2.8.7.5 Define Field Selection for Maintenance Order Fields



Maintenance order

Activities


19.1.2.8.7.6 Define Field Selection for Maintenance Notification Fields


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 127


Maintenance notification

Activities


19.1.2.8.7.7 Define Field Selection for Refurbishment Order Fields

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this work step, you define the field selection for the multi-level list display of serialnumbers.


Refurbishment order

Activities


19.1.2.8.7.8 Define Field Selection for Production Order Fields

In this work step, you define the field selection for the multi-level list display of serialnumbers.


Production order

Activities


19.1.2.8.7.9 Define Field Selection for Inventory Data Fields

In this step, you define the field selection for the multi-level list display of serial numbers.


Inventory data for serial numbers

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 128

Activities


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.2.8.8 Archive Serial Number History

With this activity, you can define the residence time for objects to which the serial numberhistory refers, that is, how long the history must be available in the system. The serial numberhistory affects the following objects:

- Deliveries

- Sales documents- Goods movements

- Inspect ion lots

- Production and refurbishment orders

- Handling units

- Inventor ies

19.1.3 Bills of Material

You can set up your BOMs in this section. You will be editing the following on the basis of key points:

- Central configuration for controlling EC management and BOM history

- Definition of the technical areas in which the BOMs are to be used

- Configuration of default values

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 129

- Configuration of the link with other areas (for example, Materials Management, MaterialRequirments Planning, Costing and so on)

Note

Check whether the BOMs have already been configured during customizing of the ProductionPlanning System (PP).

If this is the case, you should only edit this section after consulting the person responsible forthe customizing of the PP BOMs.

This is particularly important in the case of central settings (engineering change management,control data, modification parameters, default values and general data).

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p g )

19.1.3.1 Control Data for Bills of Material

You can maintain the central parameters for your BOMs in this section.

19.1.3.1.1 Set Modification Parameters

This step allows you to define the following central settings for your BOMs:

- Activating validity maintenanceIf you activate validity maintenance, you then have the option of specifying a "valid from"date when maintaining a BOM. If validity maintenance is not active, BOMs are createdwith the current date or if necessary with the internal system low date (1.1.1990).

- Activating the low dateIf you activate the low date (1.1.1990), this will be proposed as the "valid from" dateinstead of the current date.

- Activating engineering change management

- If you activate engineering change management, you have the option of making BOMchanges with a history in reference to a change number (in other words the state of theBOM before and after the change will be recorded in the system).If you deactivate engineering change management, you cannot make any changes in theBOM with a historical record.You only determine in this step whether or not BOM maintenance can be carried out withengineering change management. You specify in the menu option "Determine historyrequirement for BOMs" whether the use of engineering change management is compulsoryin particular cases.

- Size unit for 'p iece '

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 130

Here you can define a proposed unit of measurement for the BOM header and the BOMitems. Remember that the base unit of measure for equipment BOMs and functionallocation BOMs is always ' piece' .

- Explosion type BOM itemYou only use this indicator when you have activated the BOM engineering changemanagement.

- Activating the CAD switchIf you want to maintain BOMs from a CAD system, activate the CAD switch. This switchensures that an additional field appears in the BOM header and BOM item. This field tellsyou whether the BOM header or BOM item was maintained from the CAD system.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Note

The modification parameters set here are valid both for material BOMs and equipment BOMs.This is, as a rule, a one-time setting which should not be changed once the system isproductive.

Default settings

The following settings are supplied in the standard system:

- validity maintenance and EC management are active- the current date is proposed

- CAD is active

Recommendation

It is recommended that you use the SAP standard settings.

Activities

Define the central settings for BOMs.

19.1.3.1.2 Define BOM StatusYou can define the possible BOM statuses in this menu option.

The BOM status controls other activities in different areas (for example, engineering, costing,material requirements planning).

Example of default settings

1 - BOM active

This BOM can be exploded in material requirements planning, for example, and can be releasedfor the planned order.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 131

2 - BOM inactive

The editing options above are not possible.

Recommendation

SAP recommends that you accept the settings defined in the standard system. In this case, noaction is required on your part.

Activities

Define the possible BOM statuses.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.3.1.3 Define Default Values

This menu option allows you to define the following default values for the maintenance of BOMs:

- Base quantityAll compoment quantities in a BOM refer to the base quantity. The SAP System proposes

the base quantity when you create a BOM.

- BOM statusThe BOM statuscontrols activities in other organizational areas. The SAP System proposes the BOM statuswhen you create a BOM.

- Size unitThe size unit entered here will be used for variable-size items if you do not maintain aunit for them. It will be specified in millimeters (= mm).

- Unit of measure for variable-size partThe unit of measure of the variable-size part will be proposed when you maintainvariable-size items.

Further notes

The default values that you enter here are valid both for material BOMs and for equipmentBOMs.

Requirements

You must have already processed menu option"Define BOM status".

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 132

Recommendation

You should use the default value supplied by SAP for the unit of measure for variable-sizeparts. It does not make sense to change this value.

Activities

Define the following default values for maitaining BOMs:- base quantity

- BOM status

size unit

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- size unit

- unit of measure for variable-size part


You can define the following in this section:

- BOM usage in plant maintenance

- control data and default values for the header data- history requirement for particular BOMs depending on their usage and status

19.1.3.2.1 BOM Usage

You can create various BOMs for a material:

- Production BOMsYou can create a production BOM for a material that you produce yourself, for example.The production BOM contains all the parts needed for production.

- Maintenance BOMsThe maintenance BOM contains only the parts that can be repaired or replaced duringregular maintenance tasks or repair tasks.

In this section, you maintain the BOM usage. You define which user departments (production,plant maintenance, engineering and so on) a BOM of a particular usage can be used in.

The BOM usage must be specified when a BOM is created. If you then add components of theBOM, you can enter for each BOM item an item status which defines the possible usages of this special item. If you only allow the area of Plant Maintenance in theBOM usage, this meansthat even the individual items can only be relevant to Plant Maintenance.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 133

Standard settings

BOM usage '4' is supplied as plant maintenance in the standard system. This means that BOMsdefined as usage '4' are exclusively relevant to plant maintenance. Other areas such asproduction, for example, cannot use usage ' 4' .

Note

You can create BOMs for materials within maintenance BOM management for which no plantdata is maintained. This function is only possible for BOMs that are exclusively relevant toplant maintenance.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1.3.2.1.1 Define BOM Usages

When you maintain BOM usage, you define the user departments (production, plantmaintenance, engineering and so on) by which a BOM of a particular usage can be used.

Note

- BOM components that are needed by several user departments (for example, production andplant maintenance) can also be used jointly in material BOMs.

- Once BOMs exist for a BOM usage, the usage can no longer be deleted. Furthermore, theusage can also only be changed to a limited extent.

- The indicator that shows the usage is relevant to plant maintenance should only be usedwhen this is the case.

Recommendation

You should decide first of all whether you want to use separate BOMs for the individual areaswithin the company or whether you want to use joint BOMs for several areas.

If you have BOMs that are related to a particular area, you can maintain the BOMs separatelyfor each area. However, this may involve an increase in the amount of time it takes tomaintain all the BOMs.

Use the BOM usages that have already been set up and change the item status control if necessary. Define any further BOMs according to your requirements.

Activities

Define the BOM usages.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 134

19.1.3.2.1.2 Define Default Values for Item Status

You can define default values for the item status for each BOM usage in this menu option. Theitem status is proposed in BOM maintenance when you create new BOM items.

Bear in mind that the status spare part indicator refers to the production BOMS and not to themaintenance BOMs. This means that you maynot use the item status spare part indicator inmaintenance BOMs.

Requirements

You must have already defined the BOM usage.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Recommendation

When defining the default values, pay attention to the settings allowed in the definition of theBOM usages. The SAP System checks the consistency of the settings automatically.

In the case of maintenance BOMs, you should always check the indicator maintenance relevant.

Note

You should at least define default values for the item status indicators that you have alreadyspecified as required entries when defining the BOM usage.

Activities

Configure the default values as necessary for the item status of the individual BOM usages.

19.1.3.2.1.3 Define Copy Default Values for Item Status

If you want to use the BOMs of other user departments as a reference when creatingmaintenance BOMs, you can specify in this menu option that the item status of the copied itemis to take on certain features for maintenance BOMs.

Example

You want to use production BOMs as a reference for plant maintenance. The item statuses' production' and ' construction' ar e allowed in the production BOM. You only want the itemstatus ' PM' allowed when the maintenance BOM is maintained.

Define for the corresponding BOM usage (reference) and the BOM that is to be created (e.g.usage ' 4' for plant maintenance) the item statuses that are to be assigned to the individual itemswhen a BOM is created with a reference.

The following rules apply:

- If a BOM usage has default copy values, they will be followed whenever items are copied.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 135



Activities

Define the engineering offices or laboratories.

19.1.3.2.4 Define History Requirement for Bills of Material

You can define in this menu option whether changes can only be made with a history (changemaster record) to BOMs of a particular BOM usage and BOM status.

Note

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



If you do not make any settings, you can maintain BOMs either with or without a history.

Once a BOM has been changed with a history, you can only change it again with a history.

Exception:

There is a special authorization that lets you change BOMs without a history that havepreviously been changed with a history.

Example

You want changes to active maintenance BOMs to be documented in the system. This meansthat you must activate the history requirement for BOM usage '4' and status '1' when you areworking with the default settings.

Requirements

If you want BOMs to be maintained with a history, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

- EC management must be active

- validity maintenance must be active

Activities

Define the BOM usages and statuses for which BOM changes must occur with a history.

19.1.3.3 Item Data

You can make the settings that relate to the BOM items in this section.

You define the following amongst other things:

- item categor ies

- object types

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 137

- spare part indicators

19.1.3.3.1 Define Item Categories

When you enter a new BOM item, you must allocate it an item category. This category definesthe features and functions of the item. Screen selection and structure of the item detail screensin BOM maintenance is also controlled by the item category.The item category answers the following questions:

- Is the entry of a material required?

- Is inventory management by quantity carried out for this item?

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Is inventory management by quantity carried out for this item?

- Is the item a text item without any functionality?

- Is the entry of individual sizes to be possible for this item (variable-sized item)?

- Which quantity sign is defined?

- Are sub-items supported?

- Is it a structure element in plant maintenance?No plant check is made for the material in the case of maintenance structure elements.You should only use an item category like this exclusively for items that are used purelyfor structuring maintenance BOMs.

- Is the item a document item?In the case of document items, you can enter a document that you have created in thedocument management system .

- What is the screen selection and item detail screen structure?Screen selection is defined for each item category by means of the item control key.

Note

- Note that you cannot combine all the features and functions with one another when you aredefining new item categories. The system carries out the corresponding checks.

- It is also important that you choose the correct item control key. Use the item categoriesthat exist as a guide or ask your consultant for his or her advice. The definition of newitem control keys is not supported.

- Do not delete item categories that still have BOM items.

Default settings

The following item categories are supplied in the standard system:

- document item

- stock item

- text item

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 138

- non-stock item

- variable-sized item

- PM structure element (plant maintenance)

Recommendation

You should use the standard item categories supplied by SAP. You should not change them.You should only create new item categories when you cannot represent the required functionalityusing the standard item categories supplied.

Actions

Define any item categories required

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Define any item categories required.

19.1.3.3.2 Define Object Types

BOM items differ according to their objects. There are BOM items with materials, documentsand without objects (for example, text items). You can define an object category here for eachtype of BOM item that will show you the type of item in each case in the general itemoverview screen.

The assignments are for information purposes only.

You should plan to use only simple BOM structures with few object categories. For example, if you do not use document administration you can easily avoid great deviance in the objectcategores.

Example

Object category BOM item object ---------------------------------------- M Material D Document ' ' No object

Actions

Define the object categories for each BOM item.

19.1.3.3.3 Define Material Types Allowed for BOM Item

You can define in this menu option the material types supported in the creation of BOM itemsin relation to the BOM usage and the BOM header material type.

You can mask the entries in the fields "BOM usg", Mat type BOM h" and "Mtype BOMitem", in other words you can enter an "*" (wildcard) instead of a particular usage. This then

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 139

represents all the possible usages.

The SAP System checks the material type when you enter new BOM items as follows:

- The entries that are fully qualified are checked first and then the masked entries.

- Your choice of a "(not) allowed" indicator determines whether or not the entry is allowed.

Example

You can define the material types allowed in the creation of new BOM items as follows:

-------------------------------------------------------------------- BOM Material type Material type Allowed/ usage BOM header BOM item not allowed

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 HALB * + 1 HALB VERP -

-------------------------------------------------------------------- * = masked (i.e. all the entries supported for a field)

Material type VERP is not allowed in the creation of BOM items (indicator -) for usage 1"Production" and material type HALB in the BOM header. All other material types are allowed

(indicator + ).Requirements

You must have edited the following menu options already:

- "Define BOM usages"

- "Define allowed material types for BOM header"

Default settings

All material types are allowed for the creation of BOM items for all BOM usages supplied inthe standard system with all material types in the BOM header.

Recommendation

If you use the BOM usages supplied in the standard system, you can also use the defaultsettings in this menu option.

Actions

Define the material types that are allowed for the creation of BOM items for each BOM usageas required.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 140

19.1.3.3.4 Maintain Variable-Size Item Formulas

Variable-sized items allow you to record the cutting measurements for a basic material (rawmaterial) in the BOM item.

You can define variable-size item formulas for variable-sized parts in this menu option, whichcan then be used to calculate the quantity of the variable-sized part.

The quantity of a variable-sized part is calculated as follows:- If you have not entered a formula key in the BOM item, the measurements are multiplied

by one another.

- If you have entered a formula key in the BOM item, calculation occurs on the basis of thealgorithm recorded in the appropriate formula key.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

Enter new formulas for variable-sized items if necessary.

19.1.3.3.5 Define Spare Part Indicators

You can define various spare part indicators in this menu option.The spare part indicator identifies BOM items as spare parts in production BOMs. You cancreate lists of spares on the basis of this indicator.

You can classify spares on the basis of the spare part indicator (for example, A spares, Bspares and so on, and a country-specific classification of spares is possible similar to this).

Note

The spare part indicator isnot needed for maintenance BOMs, as these consist solely of spareparts.

19.1.3.3.6 Define Material Provision Indicators

In this step you define the material provision indicators.

The material provision indicator identifies BOM items for material provision. It is evaluated inmaterial requirements planning. You can also use the material provision indicator in BOMevaluations as a selection criterion.

There are two types of material provision:

- material provided by a customer

- material provided by a vendor

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 141

Activities

1. Decide which types of material provision apply in your case.

2. Define the material provision indicators accordingly.

19.1.3.4 Determination of Alternative Bills of MaterialA material can have several BOMs of different usages. There may be several alternatives foreach usage in the case of multiple BOMs.

You can allow several usages for equipment, but you can only create one BOM for each usage,in other words you cannot create a multiple BOM for a piece of equipment

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



in other words you cannot create a multiple BOM for a piece of equipment.

Note

You can skip this menu option if you are only defining one usage for your maintenance BOMsand if you are not using multiple BOMs in the case of multi-level equipment BOMs (in thematerial assemblies below the equipment).

Define in this section:

- the priority with which the individual BOM usages are to be observed- the alternative that is to be selected within a usage

Determination of the BOM usage or the alternative BOM is realized in the following steps:

- The BOM selection ID and other features defined by the BOM status are determined bythe particular application ID of the user department in each case. A BOM usage priorityorder is connected with selection ID.

- The preferred BOM usage for a selection ID is determined by a priority order.

- An alternative must be specified within the BOM usage in the case of multiple BOMs. TheSAP System checks the alternative selected by

- plant

- mater ial number

- "valid f rom" date

19.1.3.4.1 Define Priorities for BOM Usage

You can define your selection priorities in this menu option for the automatic selection of aBOM usage:

- The selection of a suitable BOM usage depends on the selection ID of the user department(plant maintenance is '03' in the standard system).

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 142

- You can define within the selection ID the BOM usage that is to have priority. To dothis, enter an order of priority for the BOM usages.

Note:

The allocation of applications ('INST' in the standard system) to selection IDs ('03' in thestandard system) is dealt with in the chapter 'Defining application-dependent selection IDs'.

Recommendation

Find out the BOM usages that you are using for plant maintenance. If you are only workingwith one usage (' 04' in the standard system), you only need to check the default settings.

Activities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Define the BOM usage priorities.

19.1.3.4.2 PM-Specific Selection Criteria for Alternative Determination

You can define the criteria and selection terms for the determination of BOM alternatives inthis menu option.

19.1.3.4.2.1 Define Selection Criteria for Alternative Determination

You can define a selection ID in this menu option that can be used for determining alternativeson the basis of priorities.

Example:

You are using the standard applicationINST for plant maintenance. You can now allocate aselection ID (03 in the standard system) to the standard applicationINST , by means of whichyou can define the determination of BOM usages by priorities. BOM usage4 is assigned toselection ID 03 in the standard system with the highest and only priority. If you have several

BOM usages for plant maintenance, you define the order of the usages here. This assumes thatyou have already defined several BOM usages for plant maintenance.

Standard settings

In the standard SAP delivery, the BOM usage4 is assigned to the selection ID03 with firstand sole priority.

Note

If you have changed the selection termINST for the selection of an alternative, you must usethe appropriate selection term here for the alternative selection.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 143

Recommendation

SAP recommends that you accept the settings defined in the standard system. In this case, noaction is required on your part.

Activities

Configure the selection IDs for your maintenance BOMs.

19.1.3.4.2.2 Check Selection Term for Alternative Determination

You can define the selection term in this menu option by means of which an alternative is

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p yselected for maintenance BOMs.

Standard settings

The sytem can only work with a single selection term.

This selection term is defined as ' INST' in the standard system and you cannot change it.

Note

If you have chosen a different term to 'INST' in the selection criteria, you must enter the newterm here.

Activities

Check the selection term.

19.1.3.4.3 Define Alternative Selection by Material

You can define the selection of an alternative BOM on the basis of material numbers in thismenu option.

The SAP System determines an alternative BOM for the required BOM usage by- plant

- mater ial number

- "valid f rom" date

Note

This method of selecting an alternative BOM is not allowed for equipment BOMs and BOMsfor functional locations.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 144

Recommendation

- Edit this menu option when you want to use multiple BOMs.

- Configuring an alternative selection is only of use when the system is running.

Activities

Define the alternative selection.

19.1.3.5 Make User-Specific Settings

This menu option allows you to specify default values for users who work with bills of

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This menu option allows you to specify default values for users who work with bills of material. You can change the default values at any time if necessary.

You can specify the following default values:

- item incr ement

- item category for the "New Materials Items" screen

- item category for the "New Document Items" screen

- item category for the "New Class Item" screen- material provision indicator

- PM assembly (maintenance BOMs)

- dialog print options (BOM evaluations)

Recommendation

You should maintain the following values:

- item category for the "New Material Items" screen

- item category for the "New Document Items" screen

You can define default values which are valid for all users by making entries for a user'DUMMY'.

Activities

Specify the user-specific default values.

19.2 Maintenance Plans, Work Centers, Task Lists and PRTs

You can make the settings in this chapter that are necessary for the processing of regularmaintenance tasks.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 145


You can configure the general data in this menu option. These settings will then be valid forall the dependent menu options.

19.2.1.1 Maintain Authorizations for Planning

In this section, you see which authorization objects are defined in the standard system for theindividual application functions. You can maintain authorizations for these objects in the R/3System.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The easiest way to maintain authorizations is by using roles.



Activities


1 . Create a role

2. Enter a description








Note


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 146

In the fourth step, choose "Edit -> Add authorization -> From profile" to add theauthorization profile data to the role.





Process equipment I_BEGRP Authorization group

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



q p _ g p I_IWERK PM planning plant








Material M_MATE_STA Maintenance status M_MATE_BUK Company code M_MATE_WRK Plant M_MATE_VKO Distribution channel M_MATE_LGN WarehouseClassify material C_TCLA_BKA Class type

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 147







T k li I ROUT G l k li i

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





PM notifications I_IWERK PM planning plantI_SWERK Maintenance plantI_QMEL Notification typesI_VORG_MEL Business operations




PM orders C_AFKO_AWK Order typesC_AFKO_DIS MRP controllersC_DRAW_TCD Documents transactionsC_DRAW_BGR Authorization group documentsI_IWERK Maintenance planning plantI_SWERK Maintenance plantI_AUART Order typesI_KOSTL Cost centerI_SOGEN PermitsI_INGRP Maintenance planner groupI_VORG_ORD Business operations orders


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 148






3. Choose Authorization -> Transport .4. Select the authorizations you wish to transport.

5. Confirm your selections and enter the correction number.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 149






Defined fieldsThe transaction code is assigned to the authorization object

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The transaction code is assigned to the authorization object.

Note:



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 150




This authorization is checked within Plant Maintenance in the following areas:- equipment master record


- maintenance i tem


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Defined fieldsThe authorization object has the following fields:

- Transaction code IE* EquipmentIL* FunctLocation/Reference FunctLocationIW* Maintenance notification/maintenance orderIP04 - IP06 Maintenance items

- Planning plant: all the planning plants that you have defined- Planner group:all the maintenance planner groups that you

have defined

ExampleUser A works in planning plant 0001 and is only allowed to maintain the master data(equipment, functional locations and reference locations) for maintenance planner groups 001,002 and 003. In the case of other transactions, User A has display authorization for allmaintenance planner groups.

Procedure:









________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 151

- Planner group: *


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 152

Object: I_BEGRP Maintenance plan: authorization group

DefinitionMaster data authorization in Plant Maintenance

You can use this authorization object to control which groups of master data a user can display,create or change.The authorization group is defined in the master record of the piece of equipment, functional

location or reference location, object link, maintenance item or measuring points.The authorization is checked in the case of:

- equipment


- object links

- maintenance i tems

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



maintenance i tems

- measuring points/counters

- measurement documents/counter readings

Defined fieldsThe following fields are allocated to the authorization object:

- t ransact ion codeauthorization group

ExampleUser A is to be allowed to change only certain pieces of equipment. He or she is not allowedto access any other pieces of equipment.You can achieve this by allocating an authorization group, for example authorization group 001,to the pieces of equipment for which he or she has authorization. You can do this in theequipment master record. You then create the following authorization:

- Transaction code: IE*

- Authorization group: 001

When the authorization is assigned to User A, he or she can carry out all transactions for

equipment of authorization group 001. User A can therefore display, create and change allpieces of equipment of this authorization group.

If you want to assign further authorizations to the user for other objects or other authorizationgroups, you must create another authorization and then assign it to User A.

Note re measurement documents and counter readingsIf an authorization group is assigned to a measuring point or counter, the documents entered forthe measuring point/counter also inherit this authorization group when the document is entered.

This means that you can use the combination transaction code authorization group to attain forthe user the authorization to enter, change or simply display measurement documents or counter

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 153









- Transaction code

P lanning plant

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- P lanning plant

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 155







- Transaction code

- Maintenance plant

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Maintenance plant

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 156






- functional location/reference functional location

- maintenance notification


Defined fields

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The authorization object contains the following fields:


- controll ing area

- cost center



- equipment




- maintenance plant

- permit




________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 157






SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



004 Reference functional locations(standard)

005 Inspection characteristics (standard)and so on

Note


Example:

Field Entry

Class type 001


________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 158






SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 159



Defined fieldsThe authorization object has four fields:

- Transaction code: IA* ( task l is ts )

- Maintenance plant


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








- Status: F


________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 160




- 06 delete change documents.- 08 display change documents.


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 161






E l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 162






Example

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



User A is only to be allowed to work with orders of order type 0001. However, he or she isto be allowed to work with this order type in all planning plants.Authorization for this user will therefore look like this:



________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 163






You can assign a user the business operations that he or she can carry out. You can limit the

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



business transactions to particular notification types.

ExampleUser A is allowed to print notifications of all notification types.The authorization will look like this:

- Business transaction: PMM5 Print notification- Notification type: * all notifications

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 164



- equipment

- functional locations/reference functional locations- maintenance orders


- maintenance plant

- permit

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 165


DefinitionMaintenance status authorization for material master records

The data contained in a material master record is divided into user departments or views(Purchasing, MRP, and so on). The maintenance status is a single-character key for the relevantuser department or view.


Note


Defined fields

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Fields Possible values Meaning

ACTVT 01 User may create data.02 User may change data.03 User may display data.06 User may flag data for





User department Maintenance status

Work scheduling AAccounting BClassification C

MRP DPurchasing EProduction resources/tools FCosting GBasic data KStorage LForecasting PQuality management QWarehouse management S

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 166








ACTVT 01 User may create data.02 User may change data.03 User may display data.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



03 Use ay d sp ay data.06 User may change deletion flags.08 User may display change




DefinitionThis object determines the combinations of sales organization and distribution channel for whicha user may process sales and distribution data in material master records.




combinations of salesorganization and distributionchannel for which data may beprocessed.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 168


DefinitionThis object determines whether a user is authorized to process the warehouse management dataof a warehouse number in a material master record.




documents.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





Object: Material M_MATE_BKA Export control classDefinition

This authorization (C_TCLA_BKA) defines access to classes via the class type.



ClTyp (User-defined) Class type001 Material classes (standard)002 Equipment classes (standard)

003 Functional locations (standard)004 Reference functional locations


Note


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 169



maintenance tasks.

Requirements

Standard settings

Activities


Example

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.1.4 Define ABC Indicators

You can define your 'ABC indicators' with this step.

You can form object categories by means of the ABC indicator.The characteristics of the ABC indicator can be used as a selection criterion in evaluations.

You can determine which particular values are to be valid as ABC indicators and the meaningthat is given to these values.

The ABC indicator can be entered in equipment as well as functional locations.

Actions

Define the ABC indicators

19.2.2 Maintenance Plans

This Implementation Guide contains all the information you need to implement maintenanceplans for your company' s periodic maintenance.

19.2.2.1 Set Maintenance Plan Categories

In this IMG activity, you can make the settings for maintenance plan categories.

You can use the maintenance plan categories to control different business processes for

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 171



- External number assignmentIn this case, the user assigns the numbers manually. A number range must be selected forexternal number assignment

When numbers are assigned externally, numbers that are purely numerical are checked forvalidity against the number range.

Activities

Create the relevant number range according to whether an internal or an external numberassignment is made.You transport number range objects as follows:




SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.2.3 Define Number Ranges for Maintenance Items

In this step, you define the number interval for the maintenance items.Default settings

In the standard SAP R/3 System, the number range is defined with internal number assignment.

In the standard system, there are two number ranges:

- 01 for internal number assignment

- 02 for external number assignment

Note

A number range is used for the maintenance items. You can change the number range.

Recommendation

You are advised to work with the default settings because maintenance items are not usuallyselected with significant numbers.

Actions

Check the number range for the maintenance items.



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 173



19.2.2.4 Define Sort Fields for Maintenance Plan

In this step, you can define sort fields for the maintenance plan.You can assign the sort field in the maintenance plan, which facilitates the selection andgrouping of maintenance plans.

Example

You have created a large number of maintenance plans. For maintenance plan scheduling usingdeadline monitoring, you would like to restrict the maintenance plans that are to be scheduled,for example, to all maintenance plans of a certain plant. You can do this by assigning the plantnumber as the sort field. This enables you to perform plant-related deadline monitoring.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



y p p g

Recommendation

Many customers who have large numbers of maintenance plans and several plants consider theplant-related scheduling of maintenance plans to be a desirable function. As you cannot specifya plant key in the maintenance plan header, you can define a freely-definable selection fieldwith the help of a sort field.

You should consider and assign this sort field from the point of view of grouping and selection,particularly for maintenance plan scheduling.

19.2.2.5 Define Field Selection for Maintenance PlanYou can define the field selection for maintenance schedule overview lists for the maintenanceplan data in this step.



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 174

Notes





Activities

Define the field selection for maintenance schedule lists for the maintenance plan data.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.2.6 Define Field Selection for Operation Data

In this step you can define the fields and their sequence for the list display of operation data inthe scheduling overview.



Notes





Activities

Define the fields and their sequence for the list display of operation data in the schedulingoverview.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 175

19.2.2.7 Set List Editing for Maintenance Plan Overall Overview


Procedure

When you execute the function, you reach a screen in which you have several selection options.You usually find the functions:





SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








Note



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 176







h h k h f h f ld l b h h h

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




For more information about working with lists, see "PM - Cross-Application Functions" in the

SAP library.

19.2.2.8 Set List Editing for Maintenance Items


Procedure







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 177



- InvisibleThis means that this field is hidden in the selection screen and cannot be used as a

selection criterion.


Note

Each user can also create their own selection screen. The selection screen defined by you isl h d b h f d d l l h b d f d f h

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



only then proposed by the system, if no individual selection screen has been defined for theuser under their user name.










________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 178


19.2.2.9 Set List Editing for Maintenance Plans


Procedure






SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



When you choose selection fields, you reach an additional window, in which you must mark'Variant for all selection screens' .By choosing Continue , you reach another screen in which you can specify attributes for theselections fields.The attributes have the following meaning:




Note


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 179







SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






19.2.2.10 Set List Editing for Maintenance Item Dates


Procedure


You usually find the functions:- Selection screen list display mode (this can be missing, depending on the Customizing

activity)




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 180






Note

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Each user can also create their own selection screen. The selection screen defined by you isonly then proposed by the system, if no individual selection screen has been defined for the

user under their user name.If you want to define an individual selection screen for each user, and the user-specificselection screen should be proposed automatically when the report is called up, the name of thereport variant must begin withU_USERNAME .







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 181



19.2.2.11 Configure Special Functions for Maintenance Planning

Use

In this IMG activity you can configure special functions for maintenance plans.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.3 Work Centers

You can configure work center control in this section.


You have the option of defining various controls for the work center in the chapter "Generaldata". These include:

- task list usage

- scr een sequence

- operation parameters

- person responsible for the work center

- location

19.2.3.1.1 Define Work Center Types and Link to Task List Application

Use

In this IMG activity you define the work center types. Every work center is assigned to a

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 182

work center type during creation, which determines the following:

- The allowed task list application (for example, plant maintenance, production)

- The screen sequence (for example, basic data, capacity data)

- The field selection

- Whether changes to the work center should be documented with change documents.

In the graphical display of line hierarchies, the work centers can be represented with differentcolors depending on the work center type. To do this, define a color for the respective workcenter type.

You can maintain a status profile for each work center category. This entry is only consideredfor resources. If you enter a status profile, then the resources of all user statuses defined inthis status profile are available. You can find further information on resources in theimplementation guide (IMG) of the process industry under Resources.

Standard settings

In the standard system, task list applicationI is used for task lists in plant maintenance.

Likewise 'Statistical work center types' are also delivered. You cannot use a work center

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



allocated to a ' Statistical work center type as aprocessing work center.

Recommendation

If you have to define several types, you should also define the key of the work center type asthe screen sequence key and the field selection key respectively.

The field selection should not be changed. You should use the SAP default settings.

Activities

Notes

1. Clarify which work center types you need and determine thereby whether the work centersare only used in Plant Maintenance and Customer Service or also in other areas (forexample, production).

2. Determine the work center types and descriptions.

3. Assign the keys of work center types for the screen sequence that serves as a reference.4. Assign the keys of work center types for the field selection that serves as a reference.

5. Link the work center category to a task list application.

Example

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 183

19.2.3.1.2 Define Field Selection

In this step, you can select fields for the following screens:

- Task lists

- Header scr eens

- Sequence screens

- Operation screens

- PRT over view

- PRT details

All of the screens where field selection is possible are combined into individual screen groups(for example, all list or detail screens for task lists).

For each screen group you define the modifiable and influencing fields:

- For modifiable fields, you use an indicator to determine how the individual fields aredisplayed on the screen:

Field is ready for input (standard setting)

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Field is ready for input (standard setting)

- Field requires an entry (required entry)

- Field is display only- F ield is hidden

- Field is highlighted

If, for example, you determine for the list and detail screens for confirmation within thenetwork that "work center" is a required entry, you must maintain the work center in allconfirmations.

- For the influencing fields, you determine how the modifiable field is displayed on thescreen, depending on a value (for example, "work center" is a required entry for a certainorder type).

Note

The field selection settings you define can be transported and will remain unchanged when youupgrade to a new release.

If a modifiable field becomes a required entry because of a change to an influencing field, thesystem does not check whether this field is filled in objects that already exist.

You cannot modify required fields that are already hard-coded for the application.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 184

Standard settings

There are no default settings for field selection.

The modifiable and influencing fields are defined for each screen group and cannot be extended.

Activities

You have several options for defining a field selection:

To maintain the indicators for modifiable fields independently of any influencing value, proceedas follows:


2. Choose the function keyModifiable .All of the fields that you can modify for this screen group are displayed.

3. Maintain the indicators and save your entries.

To maintain an influencing value for an influencing field and then the indicators for modifiablefields, proceed as follows:


2 Choose the function keyInfluencing

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



2. Choose the function keyInfluencing .All of the fields for which you can maintain influencing values are displayed.

3. Double-click on the influencing field for which you want to maintain a value.

All of the fields which you can modify for the influencing value are displayed.

4. Maintain a value in the fieldContents and the corresponding indicators for the modifiablefields.

5. Choose Enter .Your entries are accepted.

6. Maintain additional values for the influencing field, or select additional fields using thefunction key Influencing .

7. Save your entries.

To maintain an indicator for a modifiable field and specify the values of the influencing fields,proceed as follows:


2. Choose the function keyModifiable .All of the fields which you can modify for this screen group appear on the screen.

3. Double-click on a modifiable field for which you want to maintain influencing values.All of the influencing fields appear on the screen.

4. Place the cursor on an influencing field for which you would like to enter a value andselect New Values .You see a dialog box.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 185

5. Maintain the value and indicators for the influencing field, and chooseContinue .The values are accepted.


Transport your settings, if necessary. To do this, selectField selection -> Transport .

19.2.3.1.3 Set Parameters

Use

In this menu option, you define the parmeters. You assign these parameters to the default valuekey.

You can give these default values any meaning you want. The most commonly used defaultvalue in Plant Maintenance is the "duration of internal processing".

Under certain circumstances, you must also be able to plan other default values such as"personnel times" and/or "cleaning times".

Notes

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Note that the meaning of the fields is defined by the key words.

You should choose short simple terms if you want to use the parameter later in the formaldefinition.

19.2.3.1.4 Define Standard Value Keys

Use

You can define the standard value keys in this step. The standard values are planned values forcalculaing the execution time maintenance task list and service task list.

Maintenance processing and service processing only take into account the the duration of anoperation for the scheduling of the orders. For work centers that are used by maintenance orservice only, use the standard value key for whichno standard values> /> are defined.

Notes

A fixed default value "labor" is automatically assigned when you create work centers for

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 186



19.2.3.2 Task List Data

In the chapter "Task List Data", you can define the keys for the control and allocation of awork center to a task list. You also have the option of defining data for the work center,which can be copied into the operation in the task list either as default data or reference data.This includes:

- control key

- standar d text

- wage type

- wage group

- qualification

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.3.2.1 Define Task List Usage Keys

Use

In this IMG activity, you can specify the task lists in which a work center or productionresource/tool may be used.

For example, you can categorize work centers into maintenance work centers or inspection workcenters according to their relevance and their usage in maintenance plans or inspection plans.

You can also allow multiple, cross-application uses in any combination.

Requirements

Standard settings

Activities

1. Define the usage key.

2. Assign the task list type to the usage key.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 188

Example

19.2.3.2.2 Maintain Control Keys

Use

Control keys are assigned to every work center in the master data screen "Default values".

Use the control key of the operation to determine

- the business functions you want to carry out

- how you want to deal with the operation.

The most important parameters are:

- capaci ty p lanningThis indicator allows

- the operation to be scheduled

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- capacity requirement records to be created for this operation.

- costingThis indicator ensures that the operation is taken into account in costing.

- external processingThis indicator allows the operation to be performed externally.

- Completion confirmationThis indicator allows you to control

- whether the operation can be confirmed

- the type of the completion confirmation of this operation

- Printing of time ticketsThis indicator allows time tickets to be printed for this operation.

- general costs activityThis indicator is used for project system operations and can therefore not be activated for

maintenance and service orders. If you activate the indicator in the control key, you willnot obtain costs for confirmed times or for external services to the corresponding operation.

In the master data screendefault values of the work center, you can determine whether thecontrol key is stored in the task list as a reference or as a default value. In maintenance- andservice processing, the control key is always taken as the default value.

Note

Remember that the ' milestone confirmation' function is not supported in maintenance- and

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 189

service processing. This means that for control keys that create a milestone confirmation in thePP system, every operation requiring confirmation must be confirmed explicitly for maintenance-and service orders.

A subsequent change to the parameters of the control keys is crucial if the control keys havealready been used in task lists.

19.2.3.2.3 Define Suitabilities

Use

In this step, you can define the suitability required for carrying out a certain activity for eachplant. On the master data screenDefault Values in the work center, you then decide whetherthe suitability is to be stored in the task list as a reference or as a default value.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Example

Suitabilities are, for example, certain checks, completed courses or short-term training.

19.2.3.3 Configure Screen Sequence for Work Center

In this step, you determine the screen selection for each work center category.

You control

- the sequence of the screens by means of the consecutive number, for example:

1. Basic data

2. Default values

3. Capaci ties

4. Scheduling data

5. Cost center allocation

6. Technology, etc.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 190

- the need to maintain data when creatingfor example, allocation of a cost center is mandatory

Actions

Determine the screen selection for each work center category.

19.2.4 Task Lists

This implementation guide contains all the information for the implementation of the tasklists formaintenance processing.

Notes

Before deleting entries in Customizing, you must make sure that the entries are not in use inthe task lists of other applications (for example, inspection plans or standard networks).


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this step you can configure the following:

- specification of the required specialist areas (usage) and the business functions of therespective task list (status)

- the link to materials management

- the definition of the task list responsibilities

- setting of the task list display (for the object overview)

19.2.4.1.1 Maintain Task List Status

Use

In this step you define the possible status of a task list.The status of the task list determines in which other application areas the respective task listmay be used. The status controls the following functions:

- Release for use as a reference by other task lists (for task lists that can be referenced)

- Release for cost ing

- Release for use in the order

- Consistency checks are not used for PM task listsThe status is used for automatic level selection within costing and capacity planning.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 191

19.2.4.1.2 Define Task List Usage

You can define your task list usages in this step.

With the task list usage you can define different categories of task lists for Plant Maintenance.

You can use the different task list usages for analysis purposes.

Note:

In the standard SAP R/3 System, task list usage '4' is supplied for Plant Maintenance. Thistask list usage covers all maintenance requirements.

SAP Recommendation:

If you do not require different task list usages for analysis purposes you should use the SAP

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



If you do not require different task list usages for analysis purposes, you should use the SAPdefault setting. Ensure that you have a range of other selection options in addition to task list

usage.

19.2.4.1.3 Configure Planner Group

In this step, you can determine the planner groups for each plant. A planner group isresponsible for maintaining task list data.

Do not confuse planner groups with maintenance planner groups.

19.2.4.2 Control Data

In this chapter, you can define the central control parameters for task list maintenance.Three different task list types exist for plant maintenance:

- equipment task list

- functional location task list

- general maintenance task list

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 192

19.2.4.2.1 Define Number Ranges for General Maintenance Task Lists

You can determine the type of number assignment for the general maintenance task lists inmenu option "General maintenance task list number ranges". Here you have two options:

- Internal number assignmentIn this case, the SAP System assigns the numbers.

- External number assignmentIn this case, the user assigns the numbers.

In each case, you can set up an internal and external number range for the general maintenancetask lists.





19 2 4 2 2 D fi N b R f E i T k Li

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.4.2.2 Define Number Ranges for Equipment Task Lists

In this step, you can define the type of number assignment for equipment task lists.

The numbers are assigned internally.

SAP Recommendation

Work with default settings.





19.2.4.2.3 Define Number Ranges for Task Lists for Functional Locations

In this step you determine the type of number assignment for task lists for functional locations.

The numbers are assigned internally.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 193

SAP Recommendation

Work with default settings.





19.2.4.2.4 Define Profiles with Default Values

You can simplify data entry as follows in task list maintenance:

- Data is proposed or used as a reference from the work center

- Data is proposed from the profileWhen maintaining a task list, you can enter a profile ID. When creating a new task list ora task list object (for example, header, operation), the values from this profile ID areproposed. You can overwrite this data if necessary.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p p y

Maintenance of default values for header data

The values of the fields "Use" and "Task list status" are also used for task list maintenance.During fast entry of a maintenance task list, you can jump directly from item maintenance tothe operation screen. The header data in the task list is automatically filled out with the settingsdefined here.

In this way, you save your users from having to re-enter these values when maintaining tasklist data from the maintenance transaction.

Note

Values you have maintained in the work center have priority over values from the profile.

SAP delivers the graphics profile 'NETWORK' .

Use the graphics profile 'NETWORK' .Actions

1. Check which useful default values can minimize the required input in your company.

2. Define several different profiles if necessary.

3. Maintain the default values in task list management.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 194

19.2.4.2.5 Define Presetting for Free Assignment of Material

In this section you determine the BOM usage for materials which are allocated freely (they arenot a component of a bill of material) in the task list.

Recommendation

SAP recommends that you use the BOM usage which is primarily used in the PlantMaintenance area.

Technical background

With the free material allocation, you can allocate materials at any time to general task lists,equipment task lists or task lists for functional locations. This means that you can create a tasklist for a PM object and allocate materials to it without the material being a component of theobject BOM (for example, equipment bill of material).

For these ' free' materials that are not allocated to the object BOM, the system creates a bill of material in the background. This bill of material cannot be maintained with applicationtransactions.

Here you can only define the BOM usage of the internal bill of material.

In all cases, only one entry is valid per client. The standard BOM usage for Plant Maintenanceis '4'

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



is 4 .

19.2.4.2.6 Define Field Selection

Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the field selection for the screens of the task lists.

Standard settings

Note that you cannot hide fields which are mandatory fields in the standard or lock them forentry.

Activities




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 195










Activities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________















________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 196





You can maintain an indicator for a modifiable field and specify thevalues of theinfluencing fields .a) Place the cursor on a screen group.





SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





19.2.4.3 Operation Data

In this section, you can configure the operations.

19.2.4.3.1 Maintain Control Keys

Use the control key of the operation to determine

- the business functions you want to carry out

- how you want to deal with the operation.

The most important parameters are:

- capaci ty p lanningThis indicator allows

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 197

- the operation to be scheduled

- capacity requirement records to be created for this operation.

- costingThis indicator ensures that the operation is taken into account in costing.

- external processingThis indicator allows the operation to be performed externally.

- Completion confirmationThis indicator allows you to control

- whether the operation can be confirmed- the type of the completion confirmation of this operation

- Printing of time ticketsThis indicator allows time tickets to be printed for this operation.

- general costs activityThis indicator is used for project system operations and can therefore not be activated formaintenance and service orders. If you activate the indicator in the control key, you willnot obtain costs for confirmed times or for external services to the corresponding operation.

In the master data screendefault values of the work center, you can determine whether thecontrol key is stored in the task list as a reference or as a default value. In maintenance- andservice processing, the control key is always taken as the default value.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Note

Remember that the ' milestone confirmation' function is not supported in maintenance- andservice processing. This means that for control keys that create a milestone confirmation in thePP system, every operation requiring confirmation must be confirmed explicitly for maintenance-and service orders.

A subsequent change to the parameters of the control keys is crucial if the control keys havealready been used in task lists.

19.2.4.3.2 Maintain Suitabilities

Use

In this step, you can define the suitability required for carrying out a certain activity for eachplant. On the master data screenDefault Values in the work center, you then decide whetherthe suitability is to be stored in the task list as a reference or as a default value.

Requirements

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 198

Standard settings

Activities

Example

Suitabilities are, for example, certain checks, completed courses or short-term training.

19.2.4.3.3 Define User Fields

In this step you can define the user fields.

In the task list, you can allocate a certain meaning to the fields which the user can definefreely via a key word ID. You define the corresponding key words for the user-defined fieldsvia the key-word ID.

19 2 4 4 S t Li t Editi f T k Li t

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.4.4 Set List Editing for Task Lists


Procedure









________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 199




Note




When you execute the function, you reach the initial screen with all the selection fields. There

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



When you execute the function, you reach the initial screen with all the selection fields. There

you can define the standard selection screen. This selection screen is then always proposed if noindividual selection screen has been defined for the user under the nameU_USERNAME .The name of the selection variant is alwaysSAP_TCODE_XXXX . XXXX stands for therelevant application transaction.







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 200

19.2.4.5 Presetting for List Display of Multi-Level Task Lists

In this step you perform the settings for the multi-level list display of task lists.

19.2.4.5.1 Make Field Selection for Functional Location Fields

In this step you maintain the field selection for multi-level lists of work lists.


Functional location data.

19.2.4.5.2 Make Field Selection for Equipment Data Fields

In this step you maintain the field selection for multi-level lists of task lists.


Equipment data.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.4.5.3 Make Field Selection for Task List Header Data Fields



Task list header data.

19.2.4.5.4 Make Field Selection for Task List Operation Data Fields



Operation data.

19.2.4.5.5 Make Field Selection for Task List Sub-Operation Data Fields


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 201


Sub-operation data.

19.2.4.5.6 Make Field Selection for Task List Relationship Fields



Relationship data

19.2.4.5.7 Make Field Selection for Task List Component Fields



Task list component data.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.4.5.8 Make Field Selection for Task List PRT FieldsIn this step you maintain the field selection for multi-level lists of work lists.


Task list production resources/tools data.

19.2.4.5.9 Make Field Selection for Task List Maintenance Package Fields



Task list preventive maintenance packages data.

19.2.4.5.10 Make Field Selection for Task List Inspection CharacteristicFields

In this work step, you maintain the field selection for multi-level lists of task lists.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 202


Data for task list inspection characteristics

19.2.4.5.11 Make Field Selection for Task List Service Package Fields



Data for task list service packages

19.2.4.5.12 Make Field Selection for Task List Object Dependency Fields



Data for the task list object dependency

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.2.4.6 Interface for Procurement Using Catalogs (OCI)

19.2.4.6.1 Define Catalogs

In this IMG activity you define all catalogs and specify the call structure, that is, the data thatis required for addressing the catalog. As this is catalog-specific, you must contact the catalogprovider to request the data.

For more information, see the documentation on the field type.

Activities

1. Enter the catalog ID and a description.

2. Define the call structure.


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 203

Further notes

Look at the sample settings for the aspect catalog and for the SAP product catalog.

SAP also offers a product catalog inclusing Catalog Content Management (CCM). For moreinformation, see the Service Marketplace under service.sap.com/ ibc-srm -> Catalog ContentManagement.

19.2.4.6.2 Assign Catalog to Task List Type

Use

In this IMG activity, you assign a catalog to the task list category and to the plant.

Depending on the task list category, during the task list processing the system proposes thecorresponding catalog for procurement.

You can also define the following parameters:

- Organization

- User names

- Password

In addition to these parameters, you must record the catalog parameter by which they are

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In addition to these parameters, you must record the catalog parameter by which they areaddressed in the catalog.

You will find the corresponding catalog parameters in the catalog definition.

Requirements

You have created the catalog under Define Catalog.

19.2.4.6.3 Convert HTML fields to SAP fields

Use

In this IMG activity you define how the HTML fields are converted from the catlog into SAPfields.

There are three types of HTML fields:

- Fields that are converted 1:1 to SAP fields

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 204

- SAP fixed values that are independent of the catalog value

- Help fields (for example, material)

The following table shows the HTML fields and their meaning as they are defined for the OCIinterface:

HTML field Meaning

NEW_ITEM-MATNR Material numberNEW_ITEM-VENDORMAT Material number for the vendorNEW_ITEM-VENDOR Number of the vendor

NEW_ITEM-DESCRIPTION Description of the item to be orderedNEW_ITEM-MATGROUPMaterial groupNEW_ITEM-CONTRACT_ITEM New contract itemNEW_ITEM_CURRENCY Currency. Required when a price comes back, otherwiseoptional. Must have the standard ISO code for currencies.NEW_ITEM_PRICEUNIT Number of units that must be ordered for a certain priceNEW_ITEM_PRICE Price according to catalogNEW_ITEM_QUANTITY Required amountNEW_ITEM_UNIT Unit of measure (in standard ISO code)NEW_ITEM-MANUFACTCODE ManufacturerNEW_ITEM-MANUFACTMAT Product number of manufacturerNEW_ITEM-LEADTIME Delivery time in days

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



NEW_ITEM-SERVICE Required if services should also be copied from the catalog.NEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD1 Customer-specific fieldNEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD2 Customer-specific fieldNEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD3 Customer-specific fieldNEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD4 Customer-specific fieldNEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD5 Customer-specific field

The following tables show which fields of the RIHFCOM_XL structure are copied into thecorresponding target fields of the reservation (RESBD) or service row (ESLL) or operation(COMSRV). The mapping of HTML fields to SAP recipient structure fields is a default.

In the case of materialsSAP target f ield SAP receiver structure field HTML field

RESBD-MATNR RIHFCOM_XL-MATNR NEW_ITEM-MATNRRESBD-IDNLF RIHFCOM_XL-IDNLF NEW_ITEM-VENDORMATRESBD-POSTP RIHFCOM_XL-POSTPRESBD-POTX1 RIHFCOM_XL-KTEXT NEW_ITEM-DESCRIPTIONRESBD-WERKS RIHFCOM_XL-WERKSRESBD-BDMNG RIHFCOM_XL-MENGE NEW_ITEM-QUANTITYRESBD-MENGE RIHFCOM_XL-MENGE NEW_ITEM-QUANTITY

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 205

RESBD-ERFME RIHFCOM_XL-MEINH NEW_ITEM-UNITRESBD-EINHEIT RIHFCOM_XL-MEINH NEW_ITEM-UNITRESBD-LIFNR RIHFCOM_XL-FLIEF NEW_ITEM-VENDORRESBD-INFNR RIHFCOM_XL-INFNRRESBD-KONNR RIHFCOM_XL-CONTRACT NEW_ITEM-CONTRACTRESBD-KTPNR RIHFCOM_XL-CONTRACT_ITEMNEW_ITEM-CONTRACT_ITEMRESBD-MFRPN RIHFCOM_XL-MFRPN NEW_ITEM-MANUFACTMATRESBD-MFRNR RIHFCOM_XL-MFRNR NEW_ITEM-MANUFACTCODERESBD-LIFZT RIHFCOM_XL-LEADTIME NEW_ITEM-LEADTIMERESBD-MATKL RIHFCOM_XL-MATKL NEW_ITEM-MATGROUPRESBD-EKGRP RIHFCOM_XL-EKGRPRESBD-EKORG RIHFCOM_XL-EKORGRESBD-GPREIS RIHFCOM_XL-PREIS NEW_ITEM-PRICERESBD-PEINH RIHFCOM_XL-PEINH NEW_ITEM-PRICEUNITRESBD-SAKNR RIHFCOM_XL-SAKTORESBD-CATALOGID RIHFCOM_XL-CATALOGIDRESBD-CATALOG_PROD_ID RIHFCOM_XL-CATALOG_PROD_ID

In the case of services

SAP target f ie ld SAP receiver s tructure f ield

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



ESLL-SRVPOS RIHFCOM_XL-MATNR NEW_ITEM-MATNRESLL-KSTAR RIHFCOM_XL-SAKTOESLL-MENGE RIHFCOM_XL-MENGE NEW_ITEM-QUANTITYESLL-TBTWR RIHFCOM_XL-PREIS NEW_ITEM-PRICEESLL-PEINH RIHFCOM_XL-PEINH NEW_ITEM-PRICEUNITESLL-BRTWR RIHFCOM_XL-PREIS NEW_ITEM-PRICE

RIHFCOM_XL-WAERS NEW_ITEM-CURRENCYESLL-KTEXT1 RIHFCOM_XL-KTEXT NEW_ITEM-DESCRIPTIONESLL-MEINS RIHFCOM_XL-MEINH NEW_ITEM-UNITESLL-MATKL RIHFCOM_XL-MATKL NEW_ITEM-MATGROUPESLL-IWEIN RIHFCOM_XL-MEINH NEW_ITEM-UNITCOMSRV-KONNR RIHF COM_XL-CONTRACT NEW_ITEM-CONTRACT

COMSRV-KTPNR RIHFCOM_XL-CONTRACT_ITEM NEW_ITEM-CONTRACT_ITEMRIHFCOM_XL-SERVICE NEW_ITEM-SERVICE

All the fields that can be set on the SAP page are defined in the RIHFCOM_XL structure(transaction SE11).

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 206

Note

If you use conversion modules (for example, for copying long texts), then here you must alsoenter the fields that are used in the conversion modules. For more information, see the IMGactivity Define conversion modules.

19.2.4.6.4 Convert HTML Field Values

Use

In this IMG activity you define with which SAP standard values the values from the catalogcan be overwritten.

Entries here are case-sensitive. If you want to use the catalog field valuesea and EA, youmust make a separate entry for each of them.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Example

For the HTML field NEW_ITEM_CURRENCY the value$ in HTML is overwritten withUSDin mySAP ERP.

19.2.4.6.5 Define Conversion Modules

Use

In this IMG activity you can define the conversion modules that are used to convert the datafrom the catalog into valid SAP values.

Standard settings

The following conversion modules are provided with the interface in the standard system.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 207

Name Meaning

IOCI_CONVERT_INFO_REC_W Conversion of the catalog material number to an SAPmaterial number in accordance with the purchasing info record.IOCI_CONVERT_MPM_W Conversion of the catalog material number into an SAP materialnumber in accordance with the manufacturer number.IOCI_CONVERT_OLD_MAT_NO_W Convert to existing material number using the "oldmaterial number" field.IOCI_DESCRIPTION_W Transfer of the catalog material number and the description to theSAP field of the short text

IOCI_SET_POST_W Search of the item category in accordance with the Customizingsettings for the material typeIOCI_LONGTEXT_W Copying of the catalog long text to the material long text or theservice long textIOCI_EXAMPLE_W Template for the customer-specific conversion module

Activities

You can program other conversion modules yourself and adjust them to your requirements. Allthe conversion modules must have the same interface as the function moduleIOCI_EXAMPLE_W.

To use the conversion modules supplied properly, in the IMG activity Convert HTML Fields toSAP Fields in the columnSAP-Fld you must specify the following fields. You must fill themwith your desired catalog fields. The table below shows which field is used in which conversionmodule

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



module.Conversion module SAP-Feld 1 SAP-Feld 2

IOCI_CONVERT_INFO_REC_W VENDOR VENDORMATIOCI_CONVERT_MPM_W VENDOR VENDORMATIOCI_CONVERT_OLD_MAT_NO_W MATERIAL -IOCI_DESCRIPTION_W MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONIOCI_EXAMPLE_W - -IOCI_LONGTEXT_W LONGTEXT -IOC I_SET_ITEM_CAT_W - -

19.2.5 Production Resources/Tools

You can configure the allocation of the production resources/tools in this section.

You can allocate the production resources/tools in task lists and maintenance orders to individualoperations. The PRT allocations are described by several attributes. You can store default valuesfor these attributes in the master record of the production resources/tools.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 208


In this section, you can determine central control parameters that are responsible for thefollowing:

- type and usage in master data management

- procedures in master data management

- operational use of the production resources/tools (PRTs)

Note

Different strategies are available depending on your choice of PRT master record type. Youshould therefore make this decision after careful consideration.

19.2.5.1.1 Define PRT Authorization Group

By means of the authorization group you can protect the production resource/tool master recordsagainst changes by individual user groups.

The authorization group is stored as part of the PRT master record.

The SAP System checks the authorization in the user master record when a PRT master record

in an authorization group is

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



in an authorization group iscreated

- changed

- displayed

- deleted

Note

The PRT status is only relevant for the PRT master record (others).

Actions

Define the PRT authorization groups used in your company.

19.2.5.1.2 Define PRT Status

You can define the PRT status in this step. The status controls the usage of a productionresource/tool in the functional application.

The status allows you to release production resource/tools for different tasks when maintaining

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 209



- PRTs with PRT master records (miscellaneous PRTs)

Note

The PRT group key does not have as large a range of functional uses as the PRT category.

Actions

Define the production resource/tool group keys used in your company.

19.2.5.2 Production Resource/Tool Assignments

In this section, you can configure the allocation of production resources/tools.

You can allocate production resources/tools to individual operations in task lists and workorders. The PRT allocations are described by a series of attributes. You can store default valuesfor these attributes in the master record of the production resources/tools.

19.2.5.2.1 Define PRT Control Keys

The PRT control key determines whether PRTs that are allocated to a task list or an order areincluded in the following business functions:

scheduling

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- scheduling

- costing

- printing production order printing

- completion confirmation

Actions

Define the PRT control keys that are used in your company.

19.2.5.2.2 Formulas

In this section, you can define formulas and parameters which are used in capacity planning,scheduling and costing to calculate:

- capacity requirements

- lead times

- costs

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 211

19.2.5.2.2.1 Set Formula Parameters

In PRT management, you need formula parameters to define:

- formulas which are used for calculating the required total quantity and the total usage valueof a production resource/tool

- formula constants in PRT master records of the type "Others"

Note

In addition, you need formula parameters in work center maintenance for thedescription of standard values

- definition of formulasThese formulas are used for calculating the capacity requirements, the lead times and thecosts in capacity planning, scheduling and costing.

Actions

Define the formula parameters to be used in your company.

19.2.5.2.2.2 Configure Formula Definition

In PRT management, formulas are used for calculating the required quantity and the required

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



usage value of a production resource/tool.

Note

Formulas are also used for calculating the capacity requirements, the lead times and the costs incapacity planning, scheduling and costing.

Actions

Define the formulas to be available for use in your company.

19.2.6 Service ContractsIn this section you make the settings for service contracts.

19.2.6.1 Set List Editing for Service Contracts


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 212

values and make the field selection for the list display.

Procedure





- Maintain field selection listWhen you choose selection fields, you reach an additional window, in which you must mark'Variant for all selection screens' .By choosing Continue , you reach another screen in which you can specify attributes for theselections fields.



- Invisible

This means that this field is hidden in the selection screen and cannot be used as aselection criterion.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



selection criterion.


Note




When you execute the function, you reach the initial screen with all the selection fields. Thereyou can define the standard selection screen. This selection screen is then always proposed if noindividual selection screen has been defined for the user under the nameU_USERNAME .The name of the selection variant is alwaysSAP_TCODE_XXXX . XXXX stands for the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 213

relevant application transaction.







19.3 Maintenance and Service Processing

In this section you make the settings that are required for the processing of maintenance tasks.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




In the menu option "Environment", you maintain the settings which apply at a higher level toall areas of maintenance processing.

19.3.1.1 Maintain Authorizations for Processing

In this section, you see which authorization objects are defined in the standard system for theindividual application functions. You can maintain authorizations for these objects in the R/3

System.The easiest way to maintain authorizations is by using roles.



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 214

Activities


1 . Create a role

2. Enter a description








Note


In the fourth step, choose "Edit -> Add authorization -> From profile" to add the

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p pauthorization profile data to the role.





Process equipment I_BEGRP Authorization group I_IWERK PM planning plant



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 215






Material M_MATE_STA Maintenance status M_MATE_BUK Company code M_MATE_WRK Plant M_MATE_VKO Distribution channel M_MATE_LGN WarehouseClassify material C_TCLA_BKA Class type


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________










PM notifications I_IWERK PM planning plantI_SWERK Maintenance plant

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 216

I_QMEL Notification typesI_VORG_MEL Business operations




PM orders C_AFKO_AWK Order typesC_AFKO_DIS MRP controllersC_DRAW_TCD Documents transactionsC_DRAW_BGR Authorization group documentsI_IWERK Maintenance planning plantI_SWERK Maintenance plantI_AUART Order typesI_KOSTL Cost centerI_SOGEN PermitsI_INGRP Maintenance planner groupI_VORG_ORD Business operations orders



C fi i I IWERK i l i l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







3. Choose Authorization -> Transport .

4. Select the authorizations you wish to transport.

5. Confirm your selections and enter the correction number.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 217






Defined fieldsThe transaction code is assigned to the authorization object.

Note:



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 218




This authorization is checked within Plant Maintenance in the following areas:


- functional locations/reference functional locations- maintenance i tem


Defined fieldsThe authorization object has the following fields:

- Transaction code IE* EquipmentIL* FunctLocation/Reference FunctLocationIW* Maintenance notification/maintenance orderIP04 - IP06 Maintenance items

- Planning plant: all the planning plants that you have defined

- Planner group:all the maintenance planner groups that youhave defined

E l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



ExampleUser A works in planning plant 0001 and is only allowed to maintain the master data(equipment, functional locations and reference locations) for maintenance planner groups 001,002 and 003. In the case of other transactions, User A has display authorization for allmaintenance planner groups.

Procedure:









________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 219

- Planner group: *


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 220



readings.

An explicit assignment of authorization group to a measurement document or counter reading isnot possible.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 222







- Transaction code

- P lanning plant

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 223







- Transaction code

- Maintenance plant

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 224






- functional location/reference functional location- maintenance notification


Defined fieldsThe authorization object contains the following fields:


- controll ing area

- cost center


DefinitionThis authorization object allows you to control which users in which maintenance plant areauthorized to assign or issue a particular permit.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



authorized to assign or issue a particular permit.The authorization is checked in Plant Maintenance in the case of:

- equipment




- maintenance plant

- permitExample

A user is to have the authorization in maintenance plant 0001 to issue all permits. Theauthorization will therefore look like this:



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 225







Note


Example:Field Entry

Cl t 001

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Class type 001


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 226






SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 227



Defined fields

The authorization object has four fields:- Transaction code: IA* ( task l is ts )

- Maintenance plant






SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p


- Status: F


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 228




- 06 delete change documents.

- 08 display change documents.


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 229









SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 230






ExampleUser A is only to be allowed to work with orders of order type 0001. However, he or she isto be allowed to work with this order type in all planning plants.Authorization for this user will therefore look like this:



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 231






You can assign a user the business operations that he or she can carry out. You can limit thebusiness transactions to particular notification types.

ExampleUser A is allowed to print notifications of all notification types.The authorization will look like this:

- Business transaction: PMM5 Print notification

- Notification type: * all notifications

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 232



- equipment




- maintenance plant

- permit




SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 233


DefinitionMaintenance status authorization for material master records

The data contained in a material master record is divided into user departments or views(Purchasing, MRP, and so on). The maintenance status is a single-character key for the relevantuser department or view.


Note



ACTVT 01 User may create data.02 User may change data.03 User may display data.06 User may flag data for




SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




User department Maintenance status

Work scheduling AAccounting BClassification CMRP DPurchasing EProduction resources/tools FCosting GBasic data KStorage LForecasting PQuality management QWarehouse management S

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 234

Sales VPlant stocks XStorage location stocks Z

NotesThis authorization object also determines:

- Whether a user may flag a material master record for deletion. In this case,06 must beentered in field ACTVT ; the maintenance status is irrelevant here.

- Whether a user may change the material type. In this case,02 must be entered in fieldACTVT ; the maintenance status is irrelevant here.

- Whether a user may process an MRP profile or forecast profile. In this case, the followingvalues must be entered in fieldACTVT :

- 01 to create

- 02 to change or delete

- 03 to displayThe maintenance status must beD for the MRP profile orP for the forecast profile.

- Whether a user may create an overview of all extendable materials. In this case,01 mustbe entered in fieldACTVT ; the maintenance status is irrelevant here.

- Whether a user may call up the materials list. In this case,03 must be entered in fieldACTVT ; the maintenance status is irrelevant here.

- Whether a user may create or change production versions from task lists. In this case,02

must be entered in fieldACTVT , and A in field STATM .Object: Material M_MATE_BUK Material company code

Definition

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This object determines whether a user is authorized to process material master data at companycode level.





________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 235










DefinitionThis object determines the combinations of sales organization and distribution channel for which

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This object determines the combinations of sales organization and distribution channel for whicha user may process sales and distribution data in material master records.




combinations of salesorganization and distributionchannel for which data may beprocessed.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 236


DefinitionThis object determines whether a user is authorized to process the warehouse management dataof a warehouse number in a material master record.






Object: Material M_MATE_BKA Export control class



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






Note


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 237

Example:

Field Entry

Class type 001


19.3.1.2 Planning of Background Jobs for PDC

In this step you define parameters to control the processing of background jobs.

You can define the following background jobs for plant data collection (PDC) in confirmations:

- initial download of activities

- transfer of master data tables

- delta download of activities

- upload request

- PDC record update

You determine the following parameters for the background job:

- description of the background job

- priority of the background job (job class)

- computer on which the background job is executed- how many steps the background job is to contain (each step starts a further program)

- whether the background job processesABAP/4 programs or external programs

when and how often the background job should run

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- when and how often the background job should runThe SAP System provides the following selection options:

- ImmediatelyThe system starts the job right after it is released.

- DateYou can specify a date and a time at which you would like the job to be executed. If desired, you can also initiate an automatic repetition of the background job.

- After jobYou can specify the name of the job whose processing is to precede your job. Youcan also specify whether this "appendage" is to be status-dependent.The indicator status-dependent means that the second job is executed only if thefirst one was completed successfully. This is useful if the second job depends on thefirst one.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 238

Example:1. Create analysis2. Print analysis

- After eventYou can specify an event at which you would like the job to be executed.Events are initialized by ABAP/4 programs and external programs and by the SAPSystem itself. An event is a signal that a certain status has been reached in the SAPSystem or in another program.With the start option after event , a "periodic" job is started again with eachoccurrence of a designated event.

Requirements

To print your list in the background, you must have maintained all the print control parametersin the step Define print control .

Standard settings

A standard report is proposed in the standard system.

Activities

1. Enter the following parameters:

- job name

- class

- target host (if necessary)

2. Press Start time in order to specify the start option you want for your job.

3. If you want to have your job processed periodically rather than just once, selectSchedule periodic ll

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



periodically .

4. In the window, select the repetition period that you would like for your job, for example,hourly or daily.

5. Press Steps to identify the program which is to be processed in the background.Press the ABAP key to schedule an ABAP/4 program. Enter the following specificationsfor the ABAP/4 program:

- name

- variant

- author ized userPress the External key to schedule an external program.

6. Enter the following specifications for the external program:

- name

- possible parameters

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 239

- target host for executing the external program

7. Save your background job.

19.3.1.3 Define Download Parameters for PDC

In this step you can define the data structures which should be exported from the SAP Systemby means of the PDC interface.

Activities

Flag the required objects.

Further notes

In the field Update you see the time at which last data transfer to the PDC system took place.


In this section, you maintain the general data for plant maintenance master data.

This data applies to for all master data objects in plant maintenance.

19.3.1.4.1 Define Plant Sections

You define your plant sections in this step.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The plant section enables you to subdivide the maintenance plant from the point of view of production responsibility. The person responsible for the plant section is the contact forcoordination between production and plant maintenance.The plant section can be used for evaluation purposes.

Every piece of equipment and functional location can be assigned to a plant section.

Note

You can also specify a plant section when processing maintenance tasks.

Activities

Define your plant sections.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 240

19.3.1.4.2 Define Planner Groups

Use

This step allows you to define maintenance planner groups.

Planner groups or maintenance planning groups must be defined separately for each maintenanceplanning plant.

Depending on the size and structure of your company, a maintenance planning group may be anindividual department (for central work preparation), a group of skilled craftsmen or aworkshop.

Every piece of equipment and functional location can be allocated to a maintenance planninggroup.

Maintenance planning groups can also be used for evaluation purposes.

Notes

You must also specify a maintenance planning group when processing

maintenance tasks.

Requirements

Standard settings

Activities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities


Example

19.3.1.4.3 Define ABC IndicatorsYou can define your 'ABC indicators' with this step.

You can form object categories by means of the ABC indicator.

The characteristics of the ABC indicator can be used as a selection criterion in evaluations.

You can determine which particular values are to be valid as ABC indicators and the meaning

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 241

that is given to these values.

The ABC indicator can be entered in equipment as well as functional locations.

Actions

Define the ABC indicators

19.3.1.5 Print Control

In this section, you define the print control for shop papers for notifications, orders andmaintenance plans:- Type and form of shop papers

- Location where shop papers are printed

19.3.1.5.1 Define Shop Papers, Forms and Output Programs

In this step, you can define your different shop papers and determine their print layout.

Note

Note the following when maintaining the print layout.

You can maintain the layout of shop papers separately formaintenance notifications


- maintenance plans.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Default settings are provided with each of these work areas.

In the detail display, you see a report name and the description of an allocated form displayedfor each shop paper.

The individual reports are used for the printout. The form determines the layout and the rangeof the fields issued for the shop paper.

Recommendation

Before making changes, you should check the SAP default settings.

If you want to change the layout of the individual lists, you should not change the standardforms but use them for copying. Only edit the forms that you created.

When you create new shop papers, you should bear in mind when assigning a name that youcan work with generic shop paper descriptions for the following menu options 'Pr int proposalsfor shop papers' and 'User -specific print controls'.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 242

You should coordinate the naming conventions of your shop papers with these options.

Note on creating new shop papers.

We recommend that you create a new shop paper by copying an existing form and also copythe corresponding output report.

If you want to make the settings in this menu option for the new shop paper, this form andthe respective output report must already be created.

You can create forms with the menu option Tools -> Word processing -> Layout set. Formsare copied using the function 'Utilities' in the menu Layout set maintenance.

You copy the output report via the menu option Tools -> CASE -> Development -> Program

maintenance.Actions

Edit the shop papers.

19.3.1.5.2 Define Printer

Use

In this step you can set the printer parameters for shop papers. You have the following options:

- User-specific print controlYou can specify output device and printer parameters individually for users and shoppapers.

- Define print diversionYou can activate the print diversion for a certain shop paper.

There are two types of print diversion:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




- Print diversion of the shop papers to the work center printerThe work center printer is only used for the shop papers (completion confirmation slip andwage slip). You choose the work center printer later in the application menuChange Work Center .

- Print Diversion via CustomizingThe activated print diversion always has the highest priority when determining a printer. Ittakes precedence over the user-specific selection and the work center printer.

Some shop papers only allow a diversion at header level, whereas for others the operation andmaterial structures are also filled.

The dialog window for printing shows if a print diversion is active. The printer on which thepapers were output is not specified. Only when you print do you see on which printer the shoppaper was printed. It can also happen that for one paper, multiple pages are printed ondifferent printers.

The following list gives you an overview of the papers and the possible print diversions:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 243

Shop papers

Paper headeroperation components work center printer

2010 x

2020 x

2030 x

2040 x x x

2060 x x x

2062 x x x

2070 x x x2072 x x x

Notification papers

Paper header items

1010 x x1020 x1030 x1500 x x

For shop paper 1500, the header is only output if no items are output.

- Print diversion according to field contentsIf you have activated the print diversion, you can define a special printer and printparameter for a certain shop paper depending on certain field contents (table-controlledprint diversion).The active print diversion always has the highest priority for the printer determination. Italso takes precedence over user-specific selections.As well as table-controlled print diversion, there is alsoprogram-controlled printdiversion , in which you can determine the work center printer in the task level menu

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



, y pChange Work Center .Only one shop paper can be active for each table entry, as otherwise the unambiguousnessof the printer assignment cannot be guaranteed.For each table entry you can create as many records as you want, which differ in fieldcontent or in field name. Each record contains the following specifications:

- its own output device or

- a fax number with a country key as well as

- further self-explanatory settings

Activities

Generic entries are possible when maintaining user-specific entries and for the possible papers

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 244

for each order type.

19.3.1.5.3 Activate Printing in Online Processing

In this step, you can define that collective shop papers for Plant Maintenance and CustomerService are printed from the dialog, and not from the update program.

This setting applies to all clients and applies equally to the printing of notification papersand order papers in the Quality Management System (QM).

The setting 'Pr inting from dialog' should only be used for test purposes.

Example

The setting should always be used when you make changes to the print programs or the layoutof forms, and you want to test the functions of changes from dialog.

It is easier to use the options for error search and analysis of changes in a dialog program thanin an update program.

Recommendation

In the productive system, you should only print from the update program.Activities

Check that printing is activated from the update program.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.1.5.4 Download

In this section you can configure the export of PM data to PC files.

In the standard system you have the option of

- diverting the printing of PM documents to a PC and- exporting PM data structures to PC files in order to process them further.

19.3.1.5.4.1 Define Destination and Database for PC DownloadIn this step you can define to which PC (via TCPIP address) lists are

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 245

transferred from plant maintenance.

Standard settings

The default setting contains entries for the application area

SPACE - is used to download report lists.

N - is used to download maintenance notifications.

O - is used to download maintenance orders.

Note

The download function of maintenance notifications and maintenance orders can be activated viaprint diversion. Using this, you can load your PM papers on a PC instead of printing them.

It is important that, from the point of view of the SAP System, the download is handled as aprintout. This means that the papers have the status ' Printed' after the download.

Activities

Maintain your RFC destination and the key of the record under which the dataset to bedownloaded is stored.

19.3.1.5.4.2 Download Structures to PC

In this step you can create your own databases for MS Access which correspond to thestructures of the SAP System.

This gives you the option of loading data into a PC environment from the SAP System andanalyzing it there or processing it with PC programs. The report creates Microsoft Accessdatabases automatically. Access 2.0 databases are created with tables that have a structurecorresponding to the SAP structures.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p g

In addition to the tables, a Dictionary is created in the required language which you can accesswhile programming your MS Access or Visual Basic application.

Example for Maintenance Notifications

************************************************************************

To download notifications, the following structures are necessary:

RIHQMEL Maintenance notification|| ---> DIIHPA Partner| ---> DIQMFE Notification Item + Causes| || | ---> DIQMMA Activities for the item in the notification| | ---> DIQMSM Tasks for the item in the notification| | ---> DICLASS Class

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 246

| || | ---> DICLDAT Characteristic value assignment|| ---> DIQMMA Activities for the notification| ---> DIQMSM Tasks for the notification

In report variant SAP_NOTIF, the corresponding tables are already listed.

The link between partners and notification is made by the OBJNR field of the notificationheader. It is simultaneously part of the key of table DIIHPA.

Any long texts that may exist are made available in structure IBIPTEXTLN. The key for thenotification tables is made up as follows:

Object | TDOBJECT | TDNAME | TDID---------------------------------------------------------------------Notification header: "QMEL" | QMNUM | "LTXT"Notification item: | "QMFE" | QMNUM+ FENUM | "LTXT"Cause: | "QMUR" | QMNUM+ FENUM+ URNUM | "LTXT"Task: | "QMSM" | QMNUM+ FENUM+ MANUM | "LTXT"Activity: | "QMMA" | QMNUM+ FENUM+ MANUM | "LTXT"

The notification download can be made directly from the notification change transaction and isrecorded just like the notification printing by status tracking and print protocol.

************************************************************************

To download maintenance orders or service orders, the following structures are necessary:

RIHAUFK Maintenance order|| ---> DIIHPA Partner| ---> RIHAFVC Operations| || | ---> RIHRESB Materials| | ---> DIAFFH Tools

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



| | DIAFFH Tools|| ---> DIOBJK Object list

The link between partners and order is carried out via the OBJNR field of the order header. Itis simultaneously part of the key of table DIIHPA.

Any long texts that may exist are made available in structure IBIPTEXTLN. The key for theorder tables is made up as follows:

Object | TDOBJECT | TDNAME | TDID---------------------------------------------------------------------Order header: | "KOPF" | MANDT+ AUFNR | "AUFK"Operation: | "AVOT" | MANDT+ AUFPL+ APLZL | "AUFK"Material: | "MATK" | MANDT+ RSNUM+ RSPOS | "AUFK"Utilities: | "FHMT" | MANDT+ AUFPL+ PZLFH | "AUFK"

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 247

The order download can be made directly from the order change transaction and is recorded just like the order printing by status tracking and print protocol.

************************************************************************

A download can also be carried out from reporting. The various PM Reporting lists serve as abasis for this:

Single-level lists

Report | Name | Structure

---------| -------------------------------------| ------------------RIAFVC20 | Maintenance operation list | RIHAFVCRIAUFK20 | Maintenance order list | RIHAUFKRIEQUI20 | Equipment list | RIHEQUIRIIFLO20 | Display functional location | RIHIFLORIIRLO20 | Reference location list | RIHIRLORIMARA20 | Material list | MARAVRIMPLA00 | Maintenance plan list | MPLARIMPOS00 | Maintenance item list | RIHMPOSRIQMEL20 | Notification list | RIHQMELRIVEDA20 | Contract list for tech. object | RIHVEDA

Structure displays:

Report | Name | Structure(s)---------| -------------------------------------| ------------------RIIFLO10 | FunctLocation structure display | RIHIFLO | | RIHEQUI | | RIHSTPORIEQUI10 | Equipment structure display | RIHIFLO

| | RIHEQUI

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



| | RIHEQUI | | RIHEQUI | | RIHSTPORIIRLO10 | RefLocation structure display | RIHIRLORIMARA10 | Bill of material structure display | RIHSTPO

Multi-level lists:

Report | Name | Structures---------| -------------------------------------| ------------------RIIFLO30 | Functional location list | DIEQUI | | DIEQUZ | | DIIHPA | | RIHIFLO | | RIHQMEL

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 248

| | RIHAUFK | | DICLASS | | RIHCLDA | | DIDRAD | | DIINETRIEQUI30 | Equipment list | DIEQUI | | DIEQUZ | | DIIHPA | | RIHIFLO | | RIHQMEL | | RIHAUFK | | DICLASS | | RIHCLDA | | DIDRAD | | DIINETRIQMEL10 | Notification list | RIHQMEL | | RIHIFLO | | DIEQUI | | DIIHPA | | DIQMFE | | DIQMMA | | DICLASS | | RIHCLDA | | DIQMSM | | RIHAUFKRIAUFK10 | Order list | RIHAUFK | | DIIHPA

| | RIHIFLO | | DIEQUI | | RIHQMEL | | RIHAFVC | | RIHAFRU | | RIHRESB | | DIAFFH

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



For the batch input back into the SAP System, you need a number of structures that begin withIBIP*. Please read the documentation on report RIIBIP00 for more information.

19.3.1.6 General Order Settlement

To be able to enter a settlement rule and perform a settlement run in your application, youmust first perform the following tasks:

- create a settlement profile

- create a settlement structure

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 249

- create a profitability analysis settlement structure (only if you are allocating costs to theProfitability Analysis System)

- define a number range

- specify an exchange rate type

Note

When settling internal, maintenance, and production orders, as well as networks, you can viewthe costs using the reports 6000 (for orders) and 6PA5 (for projects). To be able to use thesereports in a client other than client 0, you must first import them to the appropriate client.

You will find more information on importing reports in the chapter titled "Reporting" in theProduct Cost Accounting Implementation Guide .If the total number of all active maintenance, service and CO orders is greater than100,000, refer to note 45290 in the OSS system.

19.3.1.6.1 Maintain Settlement Profiles

In the settlement profile, you define a range of control parameters for settlement. You mustdefine the settlement profile before you can enter a settlement rule for a sender.

If you want to settle the costs each time to just one cost center or just one G/L account, youneed a settlement profile. As you cannot maintain the settlement parameters during settlement toa receiver, you must save the settlement profile either in the order type or in the model orderor reference order.

Recommendation

The settlement profile includes, among other things, the retention period for the settlementdocuments You should bear in mind the following when you determine the retention period

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



documents. You should bear in mind the following when you determine the retention period.

The settlement documents take up additional storage capacity. When a posting period is finallylocked against further postings in Financial Accounting and Controlling, you can clear thesettlement documents. However, you should build in a safety margin, as you will need thesettlement documents if you have to cancel any settlements or repeat the period end close.

Activities

1. Create a settlement profile.2. Save the profile in the order type.

Additional Information

For more information on this subject, go to the SAP Library and choose AC - Financials ->CO - Controlling -> Internal Orders - > CO Settlement.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 250

19.3.1.6.2 Maintain Allocation Structures

During settlement, costs incurred under the primary and secondary cost elements by a senderare allocated to one or more receivers. When you settle by cost element, you settle using theappropriate original cost element.

An allocation structure comprises one or several settlement assignments. An assignment showswhich costs (origin: cost element groups from debit cost elements) are to be settled to whichreceiver type (for example, cost center, order, and so on).

You have two alternatives in settlement assignment:

- You assign the debit cost element groups to a settlement cost element.

- You settle by cost element - that is, the debit cost element is the settlement cost element.This is a good idea, for example, if the required capital spending for an asset you arebuilding yourself is to be monitored. These costs are settled by cost element to aninventory account in Asset Accounting at the end of the year, or when the measure iscomplete.

Each allocation structure must fulfil the following criteria:

- CompletenessAn allocation structure is assigned to each object to be settled. All cost elements inwhich costs are incurred, must be represented in the appropriate allocation structure.

- UniquenessEach cost element in which costs are incurred may only appear once in an allocationstructure. Only one settlement cost element may be assigned to a source within aparticular allocation structure.

If you require additional debit- or settlement cost elements, you can create these using thefunction Maintain Settlement Cost Elements.

Note

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



When you settle to materials you do not need to create settlement cost elements.

Activities

You create an allocation structure as follows:

1. Choose New entries and issue identification code and a description for your allocationstructure.

2. Choose Assignments to create a settlement assignment.

3. Choose New entries and create one or more settlement assigments for your settlementstructure.

4. Highlight the settlement assignment required and choosesource .Specify the cost elements or the cost element group that are to be settled to particular

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 251

senders using the same settlement cost element.If you specify cost element groups assigned to your controlling area, but not yet in theaccount plan, you can use this opportunity to create them.

5. By choosingsettlement cost element you have two alternatives:

- You assign a account assignment category to the source by receiver category.

- Choose "By cost element" for the receiver categories that you wish to settle by costelement (debit cost element = settlement cost element).To improve performance, use as few differing settlement cost elements as possible.You should try to use settlement by cost element as sparingly as possible.

To obtain a hierarchy listing of an allocation structure from the system , choose "Extras ->Overview list" in the allocation structures overview.

19.3.1.6.3 Maintain PA Transfer Structure

In this activity, you define the PA transfer structures to be used to settle actual and planningdata for orders and projects.

Although it is technically possible, via a joint maintenance dialog, to use the same PA transferstructures from different allocation types in settlement, you should instead define separate PAtransfer structures.

Actions

1. Select the function "New entries" and enter an abbreviation and a name for your PAtransfer structure.

2. Divide your cost elements according to how you want to group them in ProfitabilityAnalysis, and create assignment lines accordingly. These assignment lines are then used totransfer the cost elements to CO-PA value fields.The indicator for quantity billed/delivered is relevant for settling sales orders and projects.Select this indicator for the particular assignment line with which the billed quantity is tobe transferred to CO PA Under "Value fields" you need to assign a CO PA quantity field

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



be transferred to CO-PA. Under Value fields , you need to assign a CO-PA quantity field(quantity/value indicator "2") to such an assignment line for the billed quantity. Duringsettlement to CO-PA, the billed amount is transferred to the assigned field.

3. For each assignment line, enter into the order/project the cost element(s) or the costelement group to be assigned. You should usually activate the "Costs/Revenues" option asthe source. The "Variances on production orders" option is only relevant for the settlementof production orders. In the latter case, you should define a separate operating concern(see the section "Define PA Tranfer Structure for Variance Settlement"). The "Accountingindicator from SM orders" option is only relevant for the settlement of service orders.

4. For each assignment line, enter the value field (or, if costs are split into fixed andvariable portions, both value fields) into which the entered costs are to be imported.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 252

19.3.1.6.4 Assign Value Fields

In this step you define how the value fields in the operating concern are used for settlingorders and projects.

You need to specify a value field for each combination of PA transfer structure and assignmentline. It is possible to assign values and quantities to different fields, and can divide them intofixed and variable values. However, you can also transfer values in total, irrespective of thefixed/variable indicator.

Example

PA str. Assignment line Qty/value Fix. /var. Value fields

AU 10 Marketing costs 1 2 WERBEAU 20 Travel expenses 1 2 VTRGKAU 25 Sales rep.costs 1 2 VTRGKAU 30 Shipping costs 1 1 VERSDAU 100 Revenues 1 2 ERLOS

Prerequisites

- The operating concern to which you want to settle must be defined completely, includingthe value fields you want to use.

- The PA transfer structure and assignments must be defined.

Actions

Assign value fields to your PA transfer structure.

19.3.1.6.5 Define Number Ranges for Settlement Documents

E h ttl t t b id tifi d li itl T d th SAP S t t ttl t

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Each settlement must be identified explicitly. To do so, the SAP System creates a settlementdocument each time an object is settled.

You use settlement documents for the transactions "Reversal of Settlements" and "RepeatedPeriod-End Closing".

In this step you define the intervals, or number ranges, for settlement documents for one ormore controlling areas.

Recommendation

You should define separate number range intervals for settlement documents for each controllingarea. This improves performance if you want to settle objects in different controlling areas atthe same time (for example, on the same day).

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 253



- Plant Maintenance Information System

- Customer Service Information System

Activities

1. Define a key and description for the value category.

2. If you want to evaluate quantities in the order, assign a unit of measure to the valuecategory.

3. Enter the load category for the value category:

- Costs and outgoing payments

- Revenues and incoming payments

Further notes

For performance reasons, it is advisable to group together cost elements into value categories.This reduces the volume of data. If you still want to create value categories according to thecost elements, then you can generate the value categories automatically.

Quantities are only updated in the order if you have assigned a unit of measure to the valuecategory.

19.3.1.7.2 Assign Cost Elements to Value Categories

In this section, you define a cost element, a cost element interval or a cost element group as avalue category.

Recommendation

The checking of whether cost elements are available is improved if you define a cost elementinterval instead of a cost element group.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

1. Choose a value category and call up the detail screen.

2. Define a cost element, a cost element interval or a cost element group as a value category.

Further notes

If you subsequently change value categories, you have to restructure the files PMCO andPMCOQT. For restructuring, you use the program RIPMCO00.

It is also possible to change the value categories if records have already been placed in thefiles.

In addition, you must restructure the info structures in the Plant Maintenance Information

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 255

System if you are updating cost and quantity key figures based on value categories.

You can restructure the information structures using report 'RIPMS001' .

19.3.1.7.3 Check Consistency of Value Category Assignment

In this activity, you check the correct assignment of cost elements to value categories.

When you call the report, you specify the controlling area for which you want to run theconsistency check.

Once the consistency check has run, the system issues a list containing information about the

assignment of value categories for each controlling area.The traffic lights at the end of a node help you to find errors.

Green traffic light:No incorrect assignments exist below this hierarchy level.

Yellow traffic light:Cost elements exist that were not assigned, or the cost element to which the value categorypoints does not exist in the system. Value category contains cost elements with non-convertibleunits of measure.

Red traffic light: Critical assignment errors exist.Critical assignment errors exist. For example, a cost element was assigned to several categoriesor a category was assigned to cost element with different debit types (costs/revenues).

The traffic light status is inherited up the hierarchy.

Furthermore, the cost elements are displayed in different colors, according to category.The following cost element categories are in different colors:

- Costs and credit-side payments

- Revenues and debit-side payments

- Undefined

I i h l h ld l h l f h

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In correct assignments, each value category should only have cost elements of the samecategory. In addition, the category of the value category must match the category of the costelements.

You can go directly to cost element maintenance from the log. To do this, choose theDisplay or Change icon.

The changes are displayed directly in the log after you have chosen theRefresh icon.

Further notes

If you change value categories subsequently, you must set up files PMCO and PMCOQT again.To do this, use program RIPMCO00.

You can also change value categories if records have already been saved to the files.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 256

Furthermore, you must set up the information structures in the plant maintenance informationsystem again, if you update cost and quantity quantity key figures depending on valuecategories.

You can use report 'RIPMS001' to set up the information structures again.

19.3.1.7.4 Define Version for Cost Estimates for Orders

In this step you can define a version for the cost estimate of PM orders.

This cost estimate comes into play whenever you have not yet entered any concrete cost-relevant

components or times in the PM order.The key defined here is automatically transferred to the relevant version table in CO.

You can only maintain one entry here, because only one estimated costs version is allowed.

The cost estimate data can be changed until the order is released. Once the order is released,the cost estimate is completed.

You can enter estimated values for each value category.

Standard settings

Work with the standard delivery.

Note on transporting the setting

If you are not working with the standard delivery, you can transport your new entry to yourtarget system using transaction 'OKEQ' .

19.3.1.7.5 Define Default Values for Value Categories

In this step, you can define default values for the value categories for the entry of costs.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this step, you can define default values for the value categories for the entry of costs.

This setting applies to the creation of historical orders and cost estimates in normal orders.

You can choose from the same value categories as for the cost display of non-historical orders.

Recommendation

To ensure the comparability of the cost structures, you should use the same cost structures(value categories) as for orders performed in the SAP System.

The value categories can be defined using Customizing for the Project System.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 257

19.3.1.8 Quotation Creation and Billing for Service Orders

In this section, you make the settings for the creation of a quotation or billing for serviceorders.

19.3.1.8.1 Profiles for Quotation Creation, Billing, Results Analysis

UseIn this dynamic IMG activity you create dynamic item processor profiles for billing, quotationcreation and results determination.

So that you can bill the items of a sales document or a service order or create a quotation,you must assign a profile to the item of the sales document or the service order.

You can maintain default values for the profile:

- In the step Define item types you can specify a default for the profile of a salesdocument item.

- In the step Credit limit checks, sales document types for service orders you can store adefault for the service order profile.

Profile Steps

The profile has the following steps:

- Prof ile (header)

- Use

- Characteris tics

- Sources

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Selection cri teria

- Material determination

- Criteria for material determination

Profile (header)

You can store a description and a short text for the profile in the profile header.

Use

In this step you specify what you want to use the profile for (use). Maintain all the followingsteps for the use chosen.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 258



- Product

- Statistical key figure

- Transaction currency

- Version

- Plant

- Plant of work center

- Value category

In the BAdIs DIP_AD010003_DC and DIP_AD010003_IC you can create internal dependent orindependent characteristics and their values.

For each characteristic, you can set the following indicator:

- Characteristic relevant controls whether the characteristic should be read by the source.

- Material determination controls whether the material on the level "criteria for materialdetermination" should be available.

- No summarization controls how the summarization should look before the sales document isgenerated.

- Structuring controls whether the characteristic for the structuring of the overview screen(for example, for billing) should be pulled up.

- Sequence: Here you specify the required sequence of the structuring for the characteristicsthat should be pulled up for structuring.

- Set name: Here you enter a set that you would like to use for the structuring.- Partial sets, single values, upper set, from step, to stepand single value control the type of

the explosion of the set in the overview.

Sources

Here you can specify from which source the dynamic items should be mapped.

The following sources exist:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The following sources exist:

- 0001 Actual costs line items

- 0002 Actual costs totals records

- 0003 Statistical key figures line items

- 0004 Statistical key figures totals records

- 0005 Funds line items

- 0006 Funds totals records

- 0021 Planned costs totals records

- 0022 Statistical key figures planned totals records

- 0023 Easy Cost Planning

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 260



Further notes

Create set

Create cost type group

Create cost center group

Create service type group

Create statistical key figure group

19.3.1.8.2 Check Profile Settings

You can use this IMG activity to check whether the settings in the available capacityprofile/billing profile are consistent.

If you receive a ' red light' in the list display, it means that your settings are not consistent.Double-click on a red light to display the places in the profile which have inconsistencies.

The following inspection functions are executed in the standard system:

1. Overlaps in the definition of sources:If selection criteria which overlap are entered in several source lines (for example, a costtype runs to several lines), then the line receives a red light.

2. Overlaps in the material determination:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



pA check is made here for overlaps in the lines for material determination. For example, acost type is not allowed to affect several dynamic posts.

3. Consistency of the sets used:Sets are used in several places in the profile. This check controls the existence of the setsentered.

In addition, you can also create user-defined inspection functions, which are performed in theinspection report and whose results you can display. For example, user-defined characteristicscan be checked. The description of the user exit is defined in the documentation for thefunction module AD1C_PROF_CHECK (function group AD1C, class AD01).

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 262

19.3.1.8.3 Define Apportionment Reasons

In this step, you can define apportionment reasons.

19.3.1.8.4 Assign Conditions to Sales Document Types

In this IMG activity, you define a condition type for each sales document type for the costs.This condition type is used to include the costs to be invoiced or the sales price cost in theprice determination of the sales document. Note that this condition type must be included inthe costing sheet of the sales document.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.1.8.5 Static Processing (Procedure Before 4.5)

Resource-related Billing Before 4.5A

The resource-related billing function that was available prior to Release 4.5A (VA90) will onlybe supported up until the next functional release. A conversion program is provided to enable

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 263

you to switch to the new billing functionality (DP90).

19.3.1.8.5.1 Define Activity Numbers for Resource-Related Billing

Use

In this IMG activity you can maintain material determination for dynamic processing.

You do not need to make any setting in this area for dynamic processing. Instead youshould maintain material determination in the DIP profile. However, if you want to continueusing the material determination in the static processing for dynamic processing, you mustconnect it to dynamic processing with the Business Add-In DIP_AD010007. You can use thefunction module EBBS_READ_TEBCO_FOR_ATTR for the connection.

During resource-related billing, individual materials, internal activities and costs are documentedfor the customer in the billing document. The internal activities and costs are represented in thiscase with material numbers in the billing request or the billing document.

In this step, you allocate

- Cost elements

- Cost center/activity type combinations

- Statistical key figures

to activities. By entering a date for each entry, you determine as of when the entry is valid.

The cost elements, cost center/activity type combinations or statistical key figures contained in

the line items are converted according to these assignments during the billing and are includedin the billing request. The material is used there for the pricing and the text determination.

The material assignments are valid for a specific or all controlling areas.

- If you enter a specific controlling area, the assignment is valid for this entry only.

- If you mask + + + for the controlling area instead of making a specific entry, theassignment is valid for all controlling areas.

- If you specify a specific and masked controlling area, the specific controlling area takesd h k d

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



precedence over the masked one.

Further information about resource-related billing can be found in the SAP Library underLogistics-> Project System -> Revenues and Earnings -> Resource-Related Billing .

Allocating materials to cost elements

The materials are allocated to individual cost element ranges in the controlling area where theupper value of a range is to be specified in each case.

Example

COArea to CostElem As of Mater ia l

0001 399999 01. 01. 1995 DIEN1

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 264

0001 409999 01. 01. 1995 DIEN2

0001 414999 01. 01. 1995 DIEN3

0001 415999 01. 01. 1995 DIEN4

In the example, all line item which apply to the cost elements 415000 to

415999 are listed in the billing document under the material DIEN4.

Allocating materials to cost centers/activity types

The materials are allocated to individual combinations of cost center and activity type in thecontrolling area.

Masking the controlling area with+ + + + is also possible here.

Example

COArea CostCtr. ActType As of Material

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + FAH 01.01.1995 L-FAH

0001 + + + + + + + + + + FST 01.01.1995 L-FST1

0001 KST01 FST 01. 01. 1995 L-FST2

0002 + + + + + + + + + + FST 01.01.1995 L-FST3

The example determines that all internal activities FAH are converted to material L-FAH,regardless of the controlling area and cost center to which it belongs.On the other hand, the conversion for the internal activity FST is more detailed. In controllingarea 0001, a conversion is generally made to activity L-FST1; an exception is cost center

KST01. In controlling area 0002, activity L-FST3 is generally used.Note

If you do not store any rules for converting combinations of cost center and activity type, thematerial is determined by means of the conversion of cost elements.

Allocating material to statistical key figures

Alternatively, you can also use the statistical key figures for the resource-related billing. In thiscase the statistical key figures are converted to material

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



case, the statistical key figures are converted to material.

The allocation of service numbers to statistical key figures is done for each controlling area.

Example

COAr ea StatKeyF ig As of Mater ial

+ + + + KABELM 01. 01. 1995 L-KABELM1

0003 KABELM 01.01.1995 L-KABELM2

In the example, it is determined that statistical key figure KABELM is to be converted intomaterial L-KABELM1 for all controlling areas. An exception is controlling area 0003 in whichL-KABELM2 is used as a material.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 265

Requirements reason, it is necessary to create service materials for these activities.Only then can (resource-related) billing run without errors. document type of the billing request. Condition type Q must be assigned to thedocument type of the billing request, DocTypeLineItem .

Activities

- Create service materials for the material.

- Allocate

- Cost elements- Cost centers/activity type combinations

- Statistical key figuresto the material.

19.3.1.8.5.2 Edit Customer Exits for Billing Types

In this step, you activate user exits for resource-related billing

The following user exits (enhancements) are implemented for resource-related billing:

KSDIEX01 - Expense calculation during resource-related billing

In resource-related billing, individual expense items are created from the information on costs.Here, a determination which is stored in the standard system is made of the service numbersunder which the individual items are displayed in the billing document.

The following functions can be implemented with this enhancement:

- customer-specific selection of expense items to be invoiced

- creation of expense items not selected in the standard system

- customer-specific determination of service numbers

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p

- reading of expense items created for a specific customer for the document flow

Enhancement KSDIEX01 contains the following components:

- EXIT_SAPLEBBI_001: Expense item calculation during resource-related billing

- EXIT_SAPLEBBI_002: Reading of expense items for the document flowPlease refer to the system documentation or the online documentation on transaction CMOD(Project Management of SAP Enhancements, function exits) for more information on how toproceed in the case of enhancements.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 266

Activities

Proceed as follows to activate the enhancements:

1. Call transaction CMOD.

2. Assign a description in field 'Project' for the activation of the selected enhancements.

3. Allocate the enhancements to the 'Project'.

Further notes

19.3.1.8.6 Generate Indices for Maintenance Orders for Sales Order

In resource-related billing, the expenses of internal and maintenance orders assigned to customerexpense items are accounted for.

An order index for customer expense items is not included in the standard system because it isnot always needed and the continuous updates hinder system performance.

If required, generate the index with program RKEBBI02. You can use the index for thefollowing:

- Inclusion of customer order items for customer make-to-order production (without project)or resource-related billing of orders for customer order items (such as maintenanceagreements).

- Search help definition (such as maintenance orders for a maintenance agreement).

19.3.2 Maintenance and Service Notifications

In this section, you make the settings for maintenance and service notifications. The notificationsupports you with a series of tasks, most notably to:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Document subjects

- Define and perform tasks

- Enter costs

- Manage the status of notifications and tasks

- Evaluate notification data

You can classify notifications using the classification.

You can use the catalog system for Quality Management specifically to assign damage, causesof damage, affected object parts and the tasks performed at functional locations and pieces of equipment.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 267

In the SAP System, notifications are assigned to the individual application components using thenotification category.

19.3.2.1 Overview of Notification Type

This step gives you an overview of:

- The notification types that are available in the system.All notification types for all notification categories and notification origins are listed.

- The settings of a particular notification typeYou can display all assignments of notification parameters forone notification type.

Requirements

The notification types and the parameters assigned to the notification must have been assignedfor you to be able to use the overview function described in this step.

Recommendation

Think of this function as a tool for the expert, who wants to gain an overview of Customizing

for the notification type.Activities

When implementing notifications, first work through the sections Notification Creation andNotification Processing. These provide an ideal basis for using this function.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.2.2 Notification Creation

In this section, you define notification types. You define the screen structure and the basic datathat you require in the notification for each notification type.

The basic data includes the following:- The catalogs used in the catalog profile to define the subject matter, defect characteristics

and tasks.You can find general instructions for impementing catalogs in the sectionQuality Management -> Quality Planning -> Basic Data under Catalogs. The informationbelow therefore only relates to the additional steps that are required for notifications.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 268

- Partners Involved in a NotificationYou can use various partner types in notifications, such as, vendors, customers,administrative office, system user. This means that you access master data from otherapplications. At the moment, the the following master record types are available forpartners in the SAP system:

- User Master RecordMaintained centrally in the SAP system by system administration.

- Organizational UnitThis is set in Basis underWorkflow Management -> Organizational Units.

- H R Master Recor dThis can be maintained in Human Resources (personnel planning).

- Vendor Master RecordThis can be maintained in Materials Management in Purchasing and in AccountsPayable Accounting.

- Customer Master RecordThis can be maintained in Sales and Distribution and in Accounts ReceivableAccounting.

- Contact Person at Customer PremisesAdditional segment in the customer master record that can be maintained from thenotification.

The implementation of these partner master records forms part of the implementationprojects for each component. Discuss this with the departments responsible, once you havedefined the partners required for notifications.

The notification can relate to one or more objects that appear as master data or movement datain Logistics. A prerequisite for this is that the relevant SAP application components must beactive.

- Master Data:

- Vendor/manufacturer, customer

- Mater ial/ plant

- Batch

E i d f i l l i l f i ifi i d i

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Equipment and functional locations only for maintenance notifications and servicenotifications

- Project and WBS element only in notification category 'Claim'

- Movement data

- Inspection lot- Purchasing document/material document

- Manufacturing order

- Sales order/delivery

Notification items can reference bill of material items (assemblies).

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 269

NoteYou can define a special default for the use of bills of material in the settings at client level).

You require different basic data and reference objects, together with different screens, dependingon the origin of the notification. You define various notification types to serve this purpose.

You can define notification types for the following origins:

- Maintenance Notification

- Maintenance request

- Malfunction repor t

- Activity repor t

- Service Notification- Problem notification

- Activity report (Service)

- Service request

- Quality Notification

- Customer complaint

- Complaint against vendor

- Internal problem notification

- SAP notification to SAP Support Line

- Claim

- Claim on customer or vendor- Claim by customer or vendor

- General Notification

- General notification

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.2.2.1 Notification Types

In this section, you define the notification types and the basic functions connected to thenotification type.

In the standard system, the notification types are structured according to factual criteria(malfunction, activity report).

The notification type is an important criterion in the selection of notifications. You can alsodefine a separate number range for each notification type.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 270

19.3.2.2.1.1 Define Notification Types

In this step, you define notification types.

Each notification type references a notification category and an origin. Notifications have thecategory predefined on the basis of the origin.

You can define notification types for the following origins:

- Maintenance Notification

- General maintenance notification

- Malfunction repor t

- Activity repor t- Service Notification

- Problem notification

- Activity report (Service)

- General notification (Service)

- Quality Notification

- Customer complaint

- Complaint against vendor

- Internal problem notification

- SAP notification to SAP Support Line

- Claim- Claim on customer or vendor

- Claim by customer or vendor

- General Notification

- General notification

The origin requires a suitable screen control in the notification transactions.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Comprehensive controls are linked to the notification type. Due to the wide range of functionsthat are covered by these controls, they are dealt with in separate sections of theImplementation Guide.

Standard Settings

You use the notification type to define the use for the notification.Certain notification types are preset in the standard system.Notification type $$ is reserved for the SAP online service (OSS).

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 271

Recommendation

If you want to define your own notification types, start with the preset notification typescontained in the standard system as templates.

Identify the criteria according to which you want to differentiate your notification types. Thefollowing are a guide:

- OriginThis differentiation allows appropriate screen controls and is therefore required.

- Organizational units, departments or process steps, in which the notification originated, orto which the notification relates.

- Control parameters that are assigned to the notification type.This additional differentiation allows different scenarios in notification processing and istherefore advisable.

Activities

Identify which notification types are to be used in your company and define their parameters:

- Origin

- Catalog profile(You can also define the catalog profile in the view "Catalogs and Catalog Profiles for theNotification Type")

You also define:

- Whether the notification number is to be displayed immediately.

19.3.2.2.1.2 Set Screen Templates for the Notification Type

This step enables you to assemble the screens for the notification types individually.

The notification data fields are grouped according to content.

These groups are also found in the individual screens.

For example there are screens for:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



For example, there are screens for:

- Deadline data

- Task data

- Malfunction data

These screens are visible owing to the tab page function in the notification transactions.

You can also control the screen sequence dependent on the activity category.

For the standard notification types, there are example settings which can be used for reference.

If you want to create a new notification type or do not require certain data in a standard

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 272

notification type, you can activate or deactivate the individual screens here.

Standard settings

If you have not yet maintained the entries in your client, you can copy the standard settingsusing transaction ' OIMN' from client ' 000'.

You can copy these standard settings as a reference for your own notification types.

When copying standard settings into your own notification types, make sure that you usenotification types with the same notification categories for copies and reference.

Recommendation

Check the standard system carefully.

19.3.2.2.1.3 Define Long Text Control for Notification Types

In this step, you can define for each notification type whether:

- A long text that has already been entered can be changed later

- The long text entered should be logged with the user ID, date and timeThe log line is issued in the corresponding long text.

19.3.2.2.1.4 Set Field Selection for Notifications

In this step you can set the field selection for PM notifications and service notifications.


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________









________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 273







screen, depending on a valueFor example, you define that the work center is a required entry for a certain order type.

Activities











b) Choose Influencing

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 274











19.3.2.2.1.5 Define Number Ranges

In this workstep, you define the accompanying number range interval for each notification type.

You can define a number range interval for each notification type, whereby you can choosebetween internal and external number assignment.

Notes

Note the following for your settings.

You can also enter a notification fron the maintenance order processing.

This means that a notification is created automatically in the background.

To guarantee the use of these functions, you must allow internal number assignment for thesetifi ti t b t t t tifi ti t ti ll f th d

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



notification types because you want to create a notificationautomatically from the order.

This automatism is, of course, only guaranteed if you also allow the number assignment by thesystem.

Recommendation

If you create all your notifications in the SAP System, SAP recommends always using aninternal number assignment.

Notes


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 275




19.3.2.2.1.6 Define Transaction Start Values

In this step, you can define for the notification transactions:

- Whether a particular notification type should be set automatically- Which notification processing screen is accessed automatically

- Whether the initial screen is processed in the foreground

Recommendation

Copy the standard setting. If you use your own notification types instead of the standardnotification types, copy the standard settings as required.

Activities

Determine whether the recommendation should be deviated from for certain transactions.

19.3.2.2.1.7 Assign Standard Texts for Short Messages to NotificationTypes

In this step, you can define default texts for the individual notification types.

You can assign a text to each notification type.

You should use standard texts. In this case, you always enterTEXT as Object . You can usestandard texts with any number of text IDs.

You create standard texts as follows:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



From the initial SAP screen, chooseTools -> Form Printing -> SAPscript -> Standard text .

19.3.2.2.1.8 Allowed Change of Notification Type

In this step, you define the changes to the notification type that are allowed.

This step only deals with the changes to the notification type that are made when you create orchange notifications using the simplified transactions (IQS21 or IQS22).

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 276

- When creating notifications, you can only change the notification type under the followingconditions:

- The change is explicitly allowed by the Customizing table.

- The notification still has the status 'Outstanding'.

- When changing notifications, you can only change the notification type under the followingconditions:

- The change is explicitly allowed by the Customizing table.

- The notification still has the status 'Outstanding'.

- The original notification type has the origin "General notification".

You can only allow the notification type to be changed, if this will not lead to anyinconsistencies.

Example

You have created a notification of type "General notification" and want to change this into anotification of type "Quality notification" to record defect data in the notification items.

Standard settings

The standard system contains several changes to the notification type that are not consideredcritical by SAP.

Recommendation

Use the customer exit ' QQMA0029' to check for inconsistencies caused by the field values,when you change the notification type. If inconsistencies occur, you can use the exit to preventthis type of change. The standard system contains examples of function modules for eachnotification type for this customer exit. You can find the fields that are considered critical bySAP in the coding for the relevant examples.

Activities

Determine which changes to the notification type are required in your company and do not leadto inconsistencies.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



to inconsistencies.Enter the corresponding pairs of notification types in the table.

Further notes

You can change the notification type, if you create a new notification by using an existingnotification as a copy model. This type of change is not affected by this Customizing setting.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 277

19.3.2.2.1.9 Assign Notification Types to Order Types

In this step, you can define which order type is generated from which notification type.

Note

You can work with different notification types and order types. In this step, you can assign asingle order type to a single notification type in each case.

Recommendation

Check the activities that you have performed in this step after processing the "Maintenance andService Orders" section in Customizing.

Important note

If you want orders to be generated automatically from notifications, internal number assignmentmust be defined for the order type concerned.

19.3.2.2.1.10 Define Order Types and Special Notification Parameters

In this step, you can set additional special notification parameters.

For service notifications, you can:

- Define a sales order type for creating a sales order from the service notification

- Activate automatic contract determinationAfter an object is assigned to the notification, the system uses automatic contractdetermination to search for valid service contracts for this object. If only one valid contractcan be determined, the contract number is copied automatically to the notification andsaved there. If the system determines several contracts, the user is offered the list of contracts for selection.Note that if the object in the notification is changed, contract determination is triggeredagain.

- Define another order type for notifications with reference to service contractsIn this field, you can specify another order type, as well as the standard order type, that

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this field, you can specify another order type, as well as the standard order type, thatshould be used for notifications of this type. This is always useful if you have to generatedifferent order types from a notification type, because some of the orders can be chargedto your customers by means of service contracts, but service orders cannot.In the 'Order type for notifications with service contracts' field, you must specify theservice order type that allows settlement to service contracts.The settlement profile for this order type must be defined so thatno revenue can beposted to this order type. This is because the revenues should be aggregated in theassigned sales order.When an order is generated from a notification, orders can be generated with two differentorder types. If the notification does not have a service contract number, the order type is

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 278

set as standard; if the notification is given the number of a service contract, the order typeis 'Order type for notifications with service contracts' .This setting is useful for notifications, to which a service contract is assigned.

Requirements

The notification types should already be fully defined.

19.3.2.2.2 Notification Content

In this section, you use catalogs and catalog profiles to define the range of values for thequalitative information contained in the notification. You then assign catalogs and catalogprofiles to the notification type.

19.3.2.2.2.1 Maintain Catalogs

You can define catalog types in this step and adapt the descriptions of the standard catalogs.

Recommendation

Use the standard catalogs for plant maintenance.

If you want to set up your own catalogs for plant maintenance, you have to mark your new

catalogs as relevant for maintenance in the step 'PM relevant catalogs' and replace the standardcatalogs with your own catalogs.

Note

One catchword can be defined for the standard catalogs for damage and problem code. Thiscatchword appears in the notification item as a key word for the respective catalog on thescreen.

Example

In the notification item, the terms 'damage' and 'problem code' appear in the SAP standardsystem on the screen mask If you want to see the key words ' damage description' and ' defect

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



system on the screen mask. If you want to see the key words damage description and defectkey' instead of these terms, you must select these two terms as catchwords for the respectivecatalog type.

Transport of catalogs and long texts for catalogs

A transport can be compiled manually and then transported. The following steps must beperformed:

1. Creation of a transport order using SE09. Use Goto -> Object list to switch to the objectlist and to change mode, then use Edit -> New entries.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 279

2. The following entries must be made for each catalog type. The warning of table class Acan be ignored. For each entry, use F2 to go to the key fields and enter the specified keyusing Edit -> New entries:

a) R3TR TABU QPGR (F2) -> key xxxy* (xxx= client, y= catalog type)

b) R3TR TABU QPGT (F2) -> key xxxy*

c) R3TR TABU QPCD (F2) -> key xxxy*

d) R3TR TABU QPCT (F2) -> key xxxy*

3. If long texts have been created for code groups or codes, and these should also betransported, the following tasks must be performed:

a) The following entry must be made in the transport order:

R3TR TEXT QKATALOG,xxxy*,*,*b) The program RSTXR3TR must run in EXPORT mode for this transport order.

4. The transport will then be performed. In the target system/client, program RSTXR3TR inIMPORT mode will be started.

5. In table TTXCP, the entries QKATALOG,QPGT and QKATALOG,QPCT must be madeand program RCTXTCPY executed.

Note:

If you want to make the transport within an SAP system (between two clients), use the clientcopy function via the Customizing menu. The transport order number serves as the profile forthe objects to be selected. With this function, the transport order must not be released orexported.

19.3.2.2.2.2 Display Catalog Directory with All Sub-Items

In this section, you can display and print a directory of the catalogs.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

Check all the catalogs relevant for maintenance and service for completeness and possible

redundancy.If you determine that your catalogs are not correctly maintained, you should process this activityagain.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 280

19.3.2.2.2.3 Define Catalog Profile

In this step, you define the catalog profiles for notifications. You define:

- Which catalogs and code groups from the individual catalogs are to be accessed by thesystem for notifications.You can make a selection of code groups from the catalog by entering a generic key forthese code groups.To do this, you can use the special characters '+ ' and '*' . If you enter' + A * ' in thecode group field, the system only selects code groups, whose key has the second letter'A ' .

- Which class of class type 015 is to be proposed for the classification of the notificationitems.You can use classes to freely define additional general problem attributes, if you cannotadequately describe the problem attributes contained in the data structure (defect type,defect location, defect cause) using the existing catalogs and texts.If, for example, you maintain the class 'Problems in production' , together with the classcharacteristic ' Initiating object' , you can then enter the cause of production problems ascharacteristic values.

- The type of system message that is to appear, if the catalog profile is not followed.

Requirements

- The catalogs that are to be used for the notifications have already been defined.

Recommendation

- Define that the system displays a warning (type W) if the catalog profile is not followed.

Activities

1. Define the code groups required for each catalog that is contained in the catalog profile.

a) Discuss the structure of the eight-digit, mnemonic keys for the code groups with allother users of the catalogs; take the option of generic selection into consideration. Youcan for example define that separate code groups are formed for each notification typeor for each plant and that the initial digits in the code group key are the same asthose in the notification type or plant.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



yp p

b) Maintain the code groups. Codes can also be maintained retroactively.

2. Determine whether you require a classification of the notification items. If necessary, create

the classes in Classification System and assign them to the catalog profile. You shoulddefine and maintain the class characteristics at the same time.Class type 015 is reserved for classifying the notification items.If required, when processing classed notification items, you can enter the classcharacteristic values on a subscreen.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 281

19.3.2.2.2.4 Change Catalogs and Catalog Profile for Notification Type

Activities

1. Define the information that is to be entered for the notification item and choose the mostappropriate catalog.

2. Define the catalog profile for the notification type, if this did not already take place whenthe notification type was created.

3. Activate the Classification of the notification items, if you want to use class characteristicsto store additional information for the notification item.

19.3.2.2.3 Partners

In this section, you define the partners involved in the notification.

Different partners can be involved, depending on the notification type. These partners can playdifferent roles.

19.3.2.2.3.1 Define Partner Determination Procedure and Partner Function

In this step, you define the partners for processing notifications.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Several partners are usually involved in processing a notification - internal and external partners.The types of partners and their functions can be different for each notification type. To definethe functions, proceed as follows:

- Certain partners have been predefined in the system; for example, the following partnersapply to notifications:



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 282

- Person (personnel number)

- System user (SAP user)


- You can centrally define partner functions for all logistics applications. You must assign apartner type to the partner function; for example, you can assign the partner type"Customer" (with customer master and customer number) to the partner function"Complainant." You can also define a higher-level function for a partner function; forexample, you can assign the higher-level function "Customer purchasing department" to thepartner function "Customer purchasing agent."

- Next, define the partner determination procedures. In each partner determination procedure,you define which partner functions are allowed. In doing so, you can specify whether a

partner function in a notification can be changed or whether it is a mandatory function.- Each notification type is assigned a group of partners; for example, author, processed by,

person responsible. For this reason, you must assign an appropriate partner determinationprocedure to each notification type. For each notification type, you must also assign thepartner functions that will appear in the notification header. All other partner functions canbe maintained in the notification itself, on the partner overview screen.

Standard settings

The internal partner functions (for example, author, coordinator, person responsible) exist forboth the partner types 'system user' and ' HR master record.' The partner type ' system user'was selected for internal partner functions. If you are also using the HR module and you wantto work with personnel numbers, you only have to exchange the following partner functions:

- In the view 'Assign Partner Functions to the Notification Type'

- Author A0 -> AU

- Coordinator KU -> KO

- In the view 'Define notification types'

- Person responsible (person processing the notification) VU -> VW

Recommendation

Use the notification types and their assigned partner determination procedures, as defined in thestandard system, unless you want to use your own partner determination procedures.If your business organization is currently using the SAP application components HR Org. or

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



y g y g pp p gSD, it may be advantageous to select the partner type "employee" for internal partners, in placeof the partner type "system user", as defined in the standard system. Make sure all otherapplications are in agreement!If you want to use your own partner determination procedures you can adapt the predefinedSAP notification types and partner determination procedures to your own requirements.

Activities

1. Define the partner functions and the partner determination procedures.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 283

a) Define the partner functions.If required, assign multilingual keys to the partner functions

b) Define the partner determination procedure and determine which functions arecontained in each procedure.

2. Assign a partner determination procedure to each notification type.

3. Specify the appropriate partner function in the notification header for each notification type.

Further notes

Multilingual CapabilityYou can use mnemonic keys for partner functions. The system supports this by assigningmultilingual keys to these functions. You can find this function when maintaining the partnerfunctions in the section Environment/ New Key Assignment for Functions. Such multilingualkeys are displayed if you log on in a language other than the original language. However, onlythe original key has an effect in the technical sense, for example, in SE16 or in the transportsystem.

Partner ObjectsSimilar partner determination procedures are also used in other applications (for example, forquality certificates)and in the Implementation Guide for the Sales and Distribution component

19.3.2.2.3.2 Field Selection for List Display of Partner Data

In this section you make the default settings for the field selection for the list display of partnerdata.

The settings apply to partner data for

- functional locations

- equipment

- notifications


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.2.2.3.2.1 Define Field Selection for List Display of Customer Data

In this section you can define the fields and their sequence for customer data list displays.



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 284

Notes





19.3.2.2.3.2.2 Define Field Selection for List Display of Vendor Data

In this section you can define the fields and their sequence for vendor data list displays.



Notes





SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.2.2.3.2.3 Define Field Selection for List Display of Personnel Data

In this section you can define the fields and their sequence for HR data list displays.


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 285


Notes





19.3.2.2.3.2.4 Define Field Selection for List Display of Contact People

In this section you can define the fields and their sequence for the list displays for contactperson data.



Notes




If d d fi hi fi ld l i h fi ld h i d ill b

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




19.3.2.2.3.2.5 Define Field Selection for List Display of Organizational Units

In this section you can define the fields and their sequence for the list display of organizationalunits.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 286



Notes





19.3.2.2.3.2.6 Define Field Selection for List Display of Positions

In this section you can define the fields and their sequence for position data list displays.



Notes



If you provide fields with a number these fields are displayed to the user in the relevant

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 287

19.3.2.2.3.2.7 Define Field Selection for List Display of User Data

In this section you can define the fields and their sequence for user data list displays.



Notes





19.3.2.2.3.2.8 Define Field Selection for List Display of Address Data

In this section you can define the fields and their sequence for the list display of address data.The fields that you choose at this point are used for the field selection. Here you can definethe layout of maintenance lists or the structure display by numbering the fields which shouldappear in the lists or by marking them as 'suppressed' .


Notes


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 288


19.3.2.3 Notification Processing

In this section, you define control parameters that are required for notification processing.

19.3.2.3.1 Response Time Monitoring

In this section, you define how a notification should be handled with regard to:- Urgency (controlled by priority)

- Timeframe and tasks involved (controlled using the response profile)

19.3.2.3.1.1 Define Priorities

In this step, you define the priorities for the notifications.

You can define different priority types and assign a priority type to each notification type. Foreach priority type, you define:

- Which priority (rank) a notification warrants

- Which start date and finish date (based on the creation date) the notifications should haveRecommendation

Modify the parameters for the priority types after you have collected enough values based onexperience.

Activities

Determine which priorities and target basic dates will be valid for the notification types used inyour company.

1. First define the different priority types.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



2. For each priority type, define its priority (rank) and basic dates.

3. Assign a suitable priority type to each notification type.

Further notes

The system finds the basic dates for the notification header with the help of the priority; thesystem automatically suggests tasks to be included in the notification header using the responseprofile and specifies the processing deadlines. These two scheduling functions work

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 289

independently of one another.

If you choose the unit "day" for the relative start and end time of the notification, the systemtakes the factory calender into account. If you choose other units, for example, "hour" or"week", non-working hours are not considered.

19.3.2.3.1.2 Define Response Monitoring

In this step, you define the response time monitoring functions for notifications. For thispurpose, you must first define response profiles and service profiles.

You must then assign these profiles to the quality notification types.

In the response profile, you define a sequence of standard tasks (based on the priority of thenotification) that can be proposed in the notification and which must be carried out within apredefined period of time.

When the system processes a notification, it always assigns the tasks that have been selected onthe basis of a response profile to the notification header.

The service profile defines the times during each work day when a notification is processed.You can also specify several time periods for each weekday and you can assign a separateresponse profile to each of these periods.

Requirements

- You have maintained the task catalog.

Activities

1. Define the response profiles your company needs to process the notifications. The field forthe hierarchy level applies to the service notifications only; it serves no purpose for othernotifications, since only one response profile can be assigned to each notification type.

2. Define valid service profiles for your company. If necessary, specify correspondingresponse profiles for these service profiles.

3. Identify the notification types for which response profiles or service profiles are to bepredefined and maintain these assignments.

Note that when you defined your service profiles, you may already have assigned aresponse profile to each service profile. This response profile overrides any response profilethat you assign to the notification type. The response profile for the notification type only

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



y g yp p p yp ytakes effect, if the notification is created outside of the service window.

Further notes

Service Windows

The processing times defined in the service profile are only valid for the tasks defined in theseprofiles that the system suggests for the notification header. The resulting processing deadlines

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 290

take precedence over the basic dates that come from the notification priority.

Service Profile in the Service Contract

For more information about the service profile in the service contract, refer to theNotifications (CS-CM-SN/PM-WOC-MN) section in the SAP library.

19.3.2.3.2 Additional Functions

In this section, you define additional functions that you can call up when processingnotifications.

SAP delivers some examples of these functions with the standard system; users can also addtheir own functions.

19.3.2.3.2.1 Define Action Box

In this step, you define the functions, with which you can generate tasks or activities (known assupplementary actions) for a notification. These functions should be defined using a key and alabel. They are assigned to a notification type, and are available at header level whenprocessing notifications. When the function is called up, the system copies the task or activitydefined into the notification.

For calling up the function, you can define a label, and an icon together with explanatory quickinformation.

For each function, you can specify an internally programmed function module that is processedwhen the function is called up. A dialog with the user can also be programmed here.

If you link a business operation with the function, then the function is only executed if thestatus of the notification belonging to the operation allows this.

If a task is involved, you have released or completed the alternatives for this status. Inaddition, you can define a workflow task that is activated when the notification is saved. Youcan also enter a function module which still changes the workflow container when thenotification is saved.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Standard settings

To simplify the programming of internal function modules for the users, the standard systemcontains non-executable references for tasks, activities and changes to the workflow container.You can withdraw the interface, which must form the basis of your own function modules, tothese references.

The standard system contains some example functions as ideas and models for your own

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 291

definition. You can find the relevant function modules using the following generic keys:

- QM06_FA* Funktion modules for activities

- QM06_FM* Funktion modules for tasks

- QM06_CO* Funktion modules for changes to the workflow container

The data for these examples (table settings and suitable catalog entries) is located in client 000of the standard system, and must be copied into the current clients, where applicable.

Recommendation

Note that, with each release, further useful examples can be included in the standard system.Take note of these examples and copy them into the current clients, as required.

Activities

1. Determine which recurring tasks and activities can be defined based on the notificationtype.

2. Define functions linked to the generation of these tasks and activities. Exit theprogramming.

3. Determine whether the tasks should be supplemented by a workflow, and define theworkflow tasks.

19.3.2.3.2.2 Define Follow-Up Actions for Tasks

In this step, you can define follow-up actions for tasks.

You can define a series of follow-up actions that the system will carry out sequentially.

For each follow-up action, you must define:

- the level at which the follow-up action will be effective(Only the task level is relevant.)

You can also define:

- how the update will be processed

- when the follow-up action will be triggered; that is, with which business transaction willthe follow-up action be carried out.(The system will check whether the user has authorization for this transaction.)

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Requirements

The task catalog must be set up to allow the assignment of follow-up actions.

The task catalog should be maintained to such an extent that you should only have tosupplement the task codes with the names of the follow-up actions, once you complete this step.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 292

Standard settings

To make it easier for users to program their own follow-up actions, the standard systemcontains a non-executable example of a function module for follow-up actions. You can copythe interface in this example and use it in your own function modules.

Recommendation

- Provide a detailed description of the follow-up actions for a task in the long text for thetask code. Make a distinction between follow-up actions that:

- must be carried out manually by a partner

- are carried out automatically by the system

- Do not change the function modules that have been provided as examples. Instead, makecopies of these function modules and save them under different names.

Activities

1. Determine which follow-up actions for tasks are needed in your company and which shouldbe automated.

2. For automatic follow-up actions, define:

a) the series of function modules and their update form

b) the business transactions for the follow-up actions (provided the function module is tobe linked to the status management function for the task)

3. Maintain the table of follow-up actions.

4. Create the corresponding function modules.

Further notes

- The system allows you to implement automatic follow-up actions in the form of functionmodules. If a follow-up action consists of a series of individual actions, these actions mustbe numbered in the sequence they are to be carried out and each action must be linked toa function module.

- If you want to assign a business transaction from the general status management function toa follow-up action, the transaction must be supported for the object type "Task for QualityNotification." The F4-help for the "Transaction" field shows you which transactions youcan use.Business transactions are pertinent to the status management of tasks Refer to the chapter

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Business transactions are pertinent to the status management of tasks. Refer to the chapterBasic settings, Central functions, Status management for additional information. Also refer

to the item Status profile for notification type.To be able to select an appropriate transaction for a follow-up action, you can display thedefinitions of the business transactions for follow-up actions for tasks. You cannot,however, change these definitions yourself. To select a transaction, proceed as follows:

- Display the list of business transactions. Select the transactions used for notificationtasks by entering 'QN9*' ; then select the desired transaction.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 293

- Select the 'Where-used list' function (not the 'Follow-up action' function). In theresulting display, you can see:- that this transaction supports the object type 'task'- which task status this transaction sets and deletes- which statuses influence this transaction

- The follow-up actions for tasks use the same techniques as the follow-up actions for theusage decision.

19.3.2.3.3 Notification Print Control

In this section, you define the print control for shop papers for notifications, orders and

maintenance plans:- Type and form of shop papers


19.3.2.3.3.1 Define Shop Papers, Forms and Output Programs

In this step, you can define your different shop papers and determine their print layout.

Note

Note the following when maintaining the print layout.

You can maintain the layout of shop papers separately formaintenance notifications


- preventive maintenance plans.

Initial settings are delivered for each of these application areas.

In the detail display, you see a report name and the description of an allocated form displayedfor each shop paper.

The individual reports are used for the printout. The layout and the range of the fields issuedare determined by the form allocated to the shop paper.

Recommendation

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Recommendation

Before making changes, you should check the SAP default settings.If you want to change the layout of the individual lists, you should not change the standardforms but use them for copying. Only edit the forms that you created.

When you create new shop papers, you should bear in mind when assigning a name that youcan work with generic shop paper descriptions for the following steps 'P rint proposals for PM

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 294

document types' and ' User-specific print controls' .

You should coordinate the naming conventions of your shop papers with these options.

19.3.2.3.3.2 Define Printer

Use





- Print diversion of the shop papers to the work center printerThe work center printer is only used for the shop papers (completion confirmation slip andwage slip). You choose the work center printer later in the application menuChange Work Center .

- Print Diversion via CustomizingThe activated print diversion always has the highest priority when determining a printer. Ittakes precedence over the user-specific selection and the work center printer.




Shop papers


2010 x

2020 x

2030 x

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



2040 x x x

2060 x x x

2062 x x x

2070 x x x

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 295

2072 x x x

Notification papers

Paper header items

1010 x x1020 x1030 x1500 x x


- Print diversion according to field contentsIf you have activated the print diversion, you can define a special printer and printparameter for a certain shop paper depending on certain field contents (table-controlledprint diversion).The active print diversion always has the highest priority for the printer determination. Italso takes precedence over user-specific selections.As well as table-controlled print diversion, there is alsoprogram-controlled printdiversion , in which you can determine the work center printer in the task level menuChange Work Center .Only one shop paper can be active for each table entry, as otherwise the unambiguousnessof the printer assignment cannot be guaranteed.For each table entry you can create as many records as you want, which differ in fieldcontent or in field name. Each record contains the following specifications:




Activities

Generic entries are possible when maintaining user-specific entries and for the possible papersfor each order type.

19.3.2.3.4 User Status for Notifications

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.2.3.4 User Status for Notifications

In this section, you can define status profiles and assign these to notification types.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 296

19.3.2.3.4.1 Define Status Profile

Use




- sys tem s ta tus and

- user status

System status










Result


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Which system statuses are the maximum possible for an object

- Which system statuses can be set for the different individual business transactions

Status profile

You can define your own statusprofiles@ in the IMG activityDefine Status Profiles . Every

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 297

status profile must be allocated to at least one object.Every status profile contains one or more statuses allowed.



- define your own statuses (user statuses) and document their function in a respective longtext

- determine the statusnumbers for user statuses which predefine the possible sequence forprocessing user statuses




Status number



If you do not assign a status number to a user status, the user status can always be set.However, there can only be one user status with a status number active at any one time.

If you assign a status number to a user status, you must also specify a lowest and a higheststatus number for the status. These limit the status number interval from which the followinguser status can be chosen.





- Install equipment


When maintaining the status profile, you can determine for every status within the profilewhether equipment of this status can be installed or dismantled and whether a deletion indicatorcan be set or not.

You can also determine in status maintenance whether, for example, the deletion indicator is setautomatically and whether the system should respond with a warning or an error message when

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



automatically and whether the system should respond with a warning or an error message when

a deletion indicator is set.Maintenance objects for which status profiles can be maintained:

- Equipment


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 298




- Service or der s

Notes



Actions


19.3.2.3.4.2 Create Authorization Keys for User Status Authorizations

In this step you define authorization keys which you can use to set up authorization checkswhen you manually set or delete a user status. When the system sets a user status as areaction to business transaction, it does not perform an authorization check.


Example




Activities

1. Check whether you want to define authorizations for your user statuses.

2. If necessary, create authorization keys as follows:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



a) Choose "New entries".




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 299


19.3.2.3.4.3 Maintain Selection Profiles

In this menu option you define selection profiles that you can use to specify status combinationsfor selecting objects (for example, orders or operations). A selection profile is especially usefulif you select a large number of objects repeatedly according to the same selection conditions(for example, orders for printing shop papers, for collective release, or for creating ordervaluations).

Selection procedure

The selection conditions are evaluated top-down. Here the following rule applies:- Several lines following one another that are linked by anOR are combined and evaluated

together. From the block at least one selection condition must be fulfilled.

- AND links blocks or individual conditions. All the blocks or individual conditions linkedwith AND must be fulfilled. An order is no longer part of the evaluation as soon as ablock or individual condition is not fulfilled. That means that with every freshly insertedAND a bracket is inserted around the preceding expressions (conjunctive normal form). Toselect the desired status combinations a reforming of the selection conditions is necessary.

- In general one can say thatOR links more strongly thanAND !

Example

You want to define a selection profile with which orders with the following status combinations

are selected:- REL (r eleased)

- CRTD UND MACM (created and material committed)

To do this formulate:REL OR (CRTD AND MACM)

But the system interprets:(REL OR CRTD) AND MACMOrders with the following status combinations are selected:

- REL AND MACM

- CRTD AND MACM

Thus the original formulation must be reformulated by "multiplying out" to:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Thus the original formulation must be reformulated by multiplying out to:

(REL OR CRTD) AND (REL OR MACM)Status 'active', 'inactive', or 'never active'

You can also define the state of a status according to which a selection is to be made:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 300

- If you set the stateactive the system searches for objects where the given status ispresently active.

- If you set the stateinactive the system searches for objects where the status entered ispresently inactive.

- If you set the statenever active the system searches for orders where the status enteredwas never active.

Example

The following is an example of a selection profile that should select all released orders thateither have a missing material or a missing PRT.

link status state

REL (released) activeAND MMAT (missing material availability) activeOR MPRT (missing PRT availability) active

The selection is carried out in two steps:

- First, all released operations are selected (that is, orders with the active status 'REL').

- Out of this group the system selects all the orders with missing material or PRTavailability (that is, orders with the active status 'MMAT' or ' MPRT' ).All the orders are selected with the following status combinations:

- RELEASED and MMAT

- RELEASED and MPRT

- RELEASED and MMAT and MPRT

Indicator 'not'

With this indicator you can reduce the effort required when maintaining selection conditions inparticular cases. Many status conditions can be represented more simply by setting the indicator'not'.

Example

Selection conditions without 'not' indicator:link not state

< Status> _ inactiveOR < Status> _ never active

Same selection condition with indicator ' not' :link not state

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



link not state

< Status> X inactiveRecommendation

For performance reasons, conditions that limit the selection strictly should be placed at the startof the selection profile.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 301

System status/user status

You can enter both system status and also user status in a selection profile. If you want toselect objects according to user status, you must enter the appropriate status profile.

If you have maintained a status profile in the status selection profile, you have to assign thisstatus profile to all objects. Selection is restricted via the status selection profile only if youhave assigned the status profile to the objects. If you enter a system status in addition toentering a status profile, the system will ignore it unless it has been assigned to the statusprofile.

The status profile is assigned to the objects via

- the project profile for the project definition and the WBS elements

- the network type for the network header and the activities

Language dependence of a selection profile

If a selection profile has been created in a language then it can be used in all languagesdefined in the system. If user statuses are defined in a selection profile then you should makesure that the user statuses are translated in the corresponding status profile. If no translationexists then you must enter the user status in the language in which it was created.

Action

Define your own selection profiles if necessary.

19.3.2.3.5 Object InformationIn this section, you can make settings for object information.

The object information contains master record fields for the equipment or functional location,and information about tasks already performed, which you can display in the applicationtransactions for notification and order processing.

19.3.2.3.5.1 Define Object Information Keys



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- functional location categories- equipment categories


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 302



The object information also contains history data from the PM Information System and datafrom the notifications and orders executed.

You can use the parameterization of the object information to define whether the notificationand order information should be displayed:







To activate the display depending on notification and order data, you can define threshold valueswhich are used to select historical data through the PM Information System. When one of thethreshold values is reached, the object information is displayed and is indicated with this symbol@03@ in the object information mask.

Further notes




- Automatic view: If you enter the number of a view in this field, the object information isautomatically displayed, if an attribute of the reference object class is assigned to the viewselected.

- Display view: In this field, you can specify a class, whose attributes should be specified inthe object information screen. These attributes are indicated by @30@.



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





The following lines relate to displaying the selected notifications:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 303




Example

You want to make sure that object information is always displayed if a contract is created foran object or if at least 5 notifications or at least 4 orders were carried out in the last 365days. The system should take the last 365 days as well as completed notifications into accountwhen selecting notifications.Completed and outstanding notifications should be displayed in the object information.











19 3 2 3 5 2 Assign Object Information Keys to Notification Types

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.2.3.5.2 Assign Object Information Keys to Notification Types

In this step you can assign an object information key to each notification type.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 304

19.3.2.3.6 Condition Indicator

In this section, you can define the possible system conditions and the effects on operation.

The system condition can be entered in the notification for three points in time:

- Condition before malfunction

- Condition after malfunction

- Condition after task

You can enter a system condition in maintenance orders, service orders and task lists.

You can still define indicators for the effects of a malfunction or task on current operatingability.

19.3.2.3.6.1 Define System Conditions

In this work step, you define the possible system statuses.

You can use the settings to define different system statuses for the notification processing.

In the notification processing, each time you can enter a status and availability of your system:

- Before a problem occurs

- After a problem occurs

- After a problem is solved

You can still provide this status with a percentage availability of the system in the notification.

The settings can be used as selection and evaluation criteria.

Example

You define the system statuses 'F ully operational' and 'Limited availability'.

In the notification processing, you can enter the percentage of system availability for the timeafter the damage occurred, for example, ' Limited availability' value ' 50 %'.

Note

The system statuses are also part of the communication structures of the Plant Maintenanceinformation system and can be evaluated in internally-defined analyses.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.2.3.6.2 Define Operational Effects

In this step, you define the company-internal effects that the maintenance tasks, service tasks ormalfunctions have on production.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 305



This means that this field is given a variable, not a concrete value.For example, if the selection is always performed using a certain call horizon (forexample, the current month). In this case, you would enter the variablecurrent month .The current month would therefore be proposed as a selection criterion.

Note











19.3.2.3.7.2 Define Field Selection for Multilevel List Displays ofNotifications

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this section, you make the presettings for multi-level list display of notifications.

In the subordinate steps, you can define the field selection for all objects, which are displayedusing the list display for an order.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 307



Notes





19.3.2.3.8 Set Workflow for Maintenance Notifications

In this section, you activate the workflow template that should be used for notificationprocessing.

19.3.2.3.9 Set Workflow for Service Notifications

In this section, you activate the workflow template that should be used for notificationprocessing.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.3 Maintenance and Service Orders

In this chapter you can configure maintenance orders.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 308

Maintenance orders are used for carrying out maintenance tasks.

The following information is contained in the maintenance order:

- Dates,

- Resources (material, working hours for the tasks to be carried out, data on operationsperformed by external companies)

- Settlement rules for the costs that the order incurs.

Maintenance orders can be distinguished with respect to planability.

- Regular maintenance ordersThe system creates orders at certain dates through maintenance plans and maintenancescheduling. The tasks that are to be performed are derived from the maintenance plans.

- Planned maintenance ordersPlanned maintenance orders can be created not only from maintenance plans but also frommaintenance notifications (for example, as the result of inspections, the findings of whichare included in maintenance notifications, which in turn are used as a work queue forfuture tasks by the responsible maintenance planner group).

- Unplanned maintenance ordersUnplanned maintenance orders generally result from unexpected damage, accidents, and soon, where there is an immediate requirement for the execution of a maintenance task.

19.3.3.1 Functions and Settings for Order Types

In this section you define the maintenance order types allowed and the technical dependenciesfor the individual order types.

Recommendation

When considering how many order types to define for maintaining processing, you should firstuse the business significance of the maintenance order type as a reference.

It is generally best to use separate order types for different business tasks (capital spendingorders, repair orders, inspection orders, replacements and so on) since many technical controlsdepend on the order type. As a result, settings dependent on the order type can be usedeffectively during analyses to make commercially useful selections via the individual order types.

However, you should not set up a separate order type for every conceivable operation. Themaintenance activity types are available for the fine tuning of maintenance tasks. For each ordertype you can define the maintenance activities allowed. This then provides another level onwhich you can differentiate between the possible maintenance tasks.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 309

19.3.3.1.1 Configure Order Types

Use

In this step, you set up your order types for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service.

In addition to the business reasons for configuring several order types, there are also technicalcontrols which depend on the order type and may require the creation of different order types.

The following technical controls depend on the order type:

- Number ranges

- Settlement proposal or account assignment rule

- Default values for controlkey- Permitted maintenanceactivity types and default values

- Permitted order types for each maintenance planning plant

- Increment when assigning the operation numbers

- Costing parameters

- Residence period of the order after completion (residence time)

- Default values for the confirmation process

- Presetting for the referenceobject screen

- Budget profile

The budget profile enables you to define budgets for individual orders. You should also activatethe funds availability check. This allows you to monitor order-related budgets without using theproject system.

The settings for budget profiles and activating funds monitoring are made in the Customizingfor the cost accounting system.

- Immediate order release

If you flag this field, the system tries to release orders generated from maintenancenotifications, service notifications, or maintenance plans immediately.

For orders which have been generated manually, the order must be released by the user.

If the system cannot release an order automatically, for example, because permits are missing,the order automatically obtains the statusRelease refused .The following checks are performed when orders are released automatically:

Availability check of components

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Availability check of components- Permits

- Settlement r ule

- User status (whether user status allows the release)

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 310

- Customer exit

Example

You want to assign certain activities to external companies. For these activities, the accountassignment is usually the same and you use the same maintenance activity type for these tasks.

In this case, it is advisable to create a separate order type for these activities, since you cansave resources by using the layout for the standard values.

You can also simply select these orders using the order type.

Special note for service orders

Service orders for which billing is resource-related without reference to a sales document

(contract, sales order) cannot have a settlement structure that allows an account assignment toother objects as a G/L account or as a profitability segment. Otherwise, revenue postings cannotbe performed on the service order.

When maintaining the cost accounting parameters, you can only flag the "Revenue postings"indicator for order types which are to be used for service processing.

Presetting for the reference object screen

You can continue to choose a screen for maintaining order header data.

The screens offered contain different data fields for the reference object of the maintenanceorder. The screen provided here can still be changed by the user when creating an order.

If you do not enter a value for a screen here, the system uses a standard screen, which enablesthe entry of:

- Functional location- Equipment

- Assembly

You can therefore define for each order type which screen should be used for the referenceobject. This is always advisable if, for example, you only work with pieces of equipment,functional locations, or with another special reference object.

However, this setting is only a default value, which each user can change using their ownuser-specific settings.

The reference object can also be changed during a transaction. However, the new referenceobject screen must contain the reference object fields already entered. Otherwise, you receive anerror message.

By deleting the reference object fields, you can replace any reference object screen with anotherduring order processing

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



during order processing.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 311

19.3.3.1.2 Credit Limit Checks, Sales Document Types for Service Orders

In this step, you define which sales document type is used in resource-related billing.

You can assign a sales document type to each order type.

You can also define if and how a credit limit check should be performed.

Requirements

The order types and the sales document types must already be defined.

Recommendation

You should work with the standard settings.

If you have created your own order types, you can flag them here as order types for serviceprocessing.

Resource-related billing is only possible if you have assigned a sales document type to theservice order type.

19.3.3.1.3 Indicate Order Types for Refurbishment Processing

In this Customizing activity, you can allow the individual order types refurbishment processing.

This business process usually involves a special form of Plant Maintenance which is treateddifferently from maintenance, repair and inspection orders in terms of planning, time and costs.

Further notes

Note that the combination of

refurbishment order and

capital investment order cancels each other out.

If you label an order type as a refurbishment order, assignment to a capital investment programis no longer possible.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



is no longer possible.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 312

19.3.3.1.4 Order Types and Investment Management

In this section, you can make the settings for capital investment management and identify ordertypes from Plant Maintenance as capital investment orders.

19.3.3.1.4.1 Indicate Order Types for Investment Measures

Use

In this step, you can permit the individual order types for investment processing.

A business process is usually a special form of maintenance, which, for plannig, temporal, andcost reasons, must be handled differently from maintenance-, repair-, or inspection orders.

Example

Investment orders are

generally settled on an asset under construction. These assets under construction are generatedautomatically when the order is released. You can generated these assets using a function keyon the investment data screen for the order.

Further notes

Note that only order types, which represent neither revenue-bearing service orders orrefurbishment orders can be permitted for investment processing.

19.3.3.1.4.2 Define Investment Profiles

In this step, you define investment profiles. The investment profile controls the followingactivities (among others) when you create a capital investment measure:

- creation of an asset under construction belonging to the capital investment measure

- creation of the master data for the depreciation simulation/forecast

You assign an investment profile to a capital investment measure by means of the profile datain the order or WBS element.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



t e o de o WBS e e e t.

Standard settings

SAP supplies investment profile 000001 as an example.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 313

Requirements

You must have created asset classes for capital investment measures.SAP supplies asset class 4001 for capital investment measures.

Activities

1. Define investment profiles according to your requirements. In particular, make the followingspecifications:

- Set the indicator for the parallel management of an asset under construction.If you do not set the indicator, it is not possible to have parallel management of theinvestment measure in Asset Accounting. However, it is still possible to enterdepreciation simulation data in the measure and include it in the depreciation forecastin Asset Accounting.

- Stipulate the asset class which is to be used when the asset under construction iscreated.

- Determine the asset class which is to be used when the depreciation simulation data iscreated.

2. You might want to manage more than one asset under construction per investment measure.In that case, you have to set the indicator "AuC per origin assignment." The system thencreates a separate asset under construction per origin assignment in the origin structure thatis being used. It settles the assets under construction to the cost elements in the originassignment.

3. Specify whether the investment measures that use this investment profile should be managedin summary form or line item form. In this context, "summary" means that you can onlyenter blanket distribution rules, which apply to all debits posted to the measure or to

certain cost elements (using an origin structure).In comparison to line item settlement, summary settlement offers better performance.However, when you use summary settlement, the system cannot display the orgins of theline items from the completed assets back to the debits originally posted on the investmentmeasure.

4. Assign your investment profiles to the WBS elements in question.

- ProjectsEnter a default value for the investment profile in the project profile of the workbreakdown structure or the standard work breakdown structure.

- OrdersEnter a default value for the investment profile in the control data of the modelorder. Then enter the model order in the order type.In the case of maintenance or service orders, assign the investment profile to an ordertype directly.

5 Stipulate the form in which the apportionment rules are to be entered for the depreciation

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



5. Stipulate the form in which the apportionment rules are to be entered for the depreciationsimulation (apportionment by percentage, amount, equivalence number, and so on)

6. Use the "Reconcile with actual settlements" indicator to control the screen setup for thedepreciation simulation in orders/projects, thereby also stipulating whether actual settlements

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 314

already made should be displayed.Further notes

For more information, see the SAP Library underInvestment Management -> Measures (Orders/Projects) -> Features of Investment M easures .

19.3.3.1.4.3 Define Assignment of AuC Classes per Source Assignment

The following step is only necessary if you want to settle the debits posted onone capitalinvestment measure, according to cost elements, toseveral different assets under construction.There is an indicator in the investment profile that controls the creation of assets underconstruction at the time the capital investment measure is being created. The indicator specifiesthat the system does not create only one asset under construction, but one asset underconstruction for each origin assignment in the origin structure. This way, it is possible to settledifferent cost elements to different assets under construction.

In this step, you assign a separate asset class for each origin assignment to investment profilesfor the creation of the respective asset under construction.

Note

The origin structure can be stored in the settlement profile (see Define origin structures).

Requirements

You must have defined Investment profiles for which the indicator "AuC per orig. assmt" isset.

Standard settings

The standard setting is for the system to create one asset under construction for each investmentmeasure, and to settle debits posted on the investment measure to this asset under construction.

Activities

1. Assign an asset class for each origin assignment for the creation of an AuC (functionNew entries or Detail ) to your investment profiles with indicator "AuC per orig. assmt".

2. Specify whether this asset class can be changed in the master record of yythe capitalinvestment measures (Fixed asset class indicator).

Further notes

For more information, see the SAP Library underInvestment Management -> Measures

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



(Orders/Projects) -> Features of Investment M easures .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 315

19.3.3.1.5 Configure Number Ranges

Use

In this step, you define the number ranges for the individual order types.

From the point of view of program control and selections, it is not necessary to define differentnumber ranges for the individual order types.

If your company does not need to define several number ranges, you can work with onenumber range for the maintenance or service orders.

Notes

If you want to create notifications automatically from maintenance orders, internal numberassignment must be defined for the order type concerned.





19.3.3.1.6 Assign Order Types to Maintenance Plants

Use

In this Customizing activity, you determine the order types allowed for the individual planningplants.

Note

If you want to allow all order types for all planning plants, you must enter all the order types

for each plant.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 316

19.3.3.1.7 Assign Inspection Types to Maintenance/Service Order Types

In this work step, you assign the QM inspection types to the PM/CS order types. Thesesettings result in an inspection lot being generated automatically for the corresponding orderwhen a PM/CS order is released.

This inspection lot can then be processed further in QM, within the framework of resultsrecording and of a usage decision.

Requirements

The inspection types must be maintained in Customizing of QM. What further conditions mustbe fufilled, can be seen in the SAP library underPlanning of the calibration inspection .

Example

You create a maintenance order, that should result in the inspection of several pieces of inspection or measurement equipment. These pieces of test or measurement equipment areusually created as pieces of equipment.

In a maintenance task list, you have previously assigned inspection characteristics to one ormore operations. This can apply to qualitative or also quantitative inspection characteristics.

During order release an inspection lot is created. This inspection lot refers to the inspectioncharacteristics and the test equipment of the maintenance order.You can enter results of the individual pieces of test equipment and their characteristics in theQM System.

Finally, there is a usage decision for the individual pieces of test equipment. This usagedecision can necessitate follow-up actions in the PM System.

Possible follow-up actions include:

- Change of equipment status (Prerequisite: equipment is a PRT),

- Measurement document recording in Plant Maintenance (Prerequisite: master inspectioncharacteristics in the QM System and measuring points in the PM System refer to thesame, general class characteristic)

- Change of inspection frequency or to the inspection interval if maintenance plans are used.(Change of cycle modification factor in the maintenance plan).

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 317

19.3.3.1.8 Define Default Value for Planning Indicator for Each Order Type

In this section, you can define a default value for each order type for the order planningindicator.

The order planning indicator is used for selection and statistical analyses in the PlantMaintenance and Customer Service Information System.

Three order planning indicators are predefined by SAP:

- Planned order. You should use this indicator for order types, for which tasks can beanticipated.

- Unplanned order. You should use this indicator for order types, for which the task cannotbe anticipated, but also need not be performed immediately.

- Immediate order. You should use this indicator for order types, for which the necessity of the task cannot be anticipated, but where the task must be performed immediately.

19.3.3.1.9 Create Default Value Profiles for External Procurement

Use

In this step, you define the profiles for external procurement of services and materials.

In the external processing profile, you can store default values to generate purchase requisitionsfrom maintenance- or service orders.

In each profile, you can store a default value for the following values:

- Cost element account- Purchasing organization

- Purchasing group

- Mater ial gr oup

During external processing, a distinction is made between the external procurement of materialsand the allocation of complete order operations to vendors.

Since both of these procurement processes generally require different data for purchasing, forexample, different purchasing groups or different cost element accounts, you should also definedifferent profiles for them.

You should therefore define different profiles for:

- External processing or external assignment of complete order operations

- Procurement of materials (material profile)In a further step you can assign two profiles to each user

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In a further step, you can assign two profiles to each user.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 318

19.3.3.1.10 Define Access Sequence for Determining Address Data

In this work step, you can define the access sequence for determining address data.

The address data is used to provide the delivery address for the one-time address of thepurchase requisition.

This function is advisable if you create a purchase requisition for a special address from yourorder and want to copy this automatically from a previously stored document and master record.

If you have not defined any values in this setting, the system works with the normal deliveryaddress of the vendor and the values which are entered for the manual processing of purchasingdocuments.

For the automatic address selection, you can use priorities for the address data of the followingdata records:

- Order

- Notification


- Equipment

- Or der ing par ty

- Goods recipient

19.3.3.1.11 Create Default Value Profiles for General Order Data

In this Customizing Activity, you define default values for further order data. When making

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



these settings, you should check carefully to see whether you have to maintain all parameters.

For order processing for maintenance- or service orders, you should

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 319

- define a key word ID to select the user-defined fields from the task list and- allocate a calculation key to calculate the capacity of the operation.

You will only need to make further settings if you want to use the relationships for operationsand their graphic display.

Here you can:

- define the view for the graphic display of the relationships

- define a key for the required graphics profile

- define a key for the explosion level for the graphic maintenance of standard networks

- allocate a key for the scheduling of orders which are allocated to WBS elements.

19.3.3.1.12 Default Values for Task List Data and Profile Assignments

Use

In this IMG activity you define which default values should be copied to the order data fororder processing.

In previous IMG activities, you maintained the profile for procuring material, externalprocessing profile and general order profile which you now assign here:

- You can define the profile assignment individually for each plant and each order type.

- If the profile should be independent of the order type, only makeone assignment for theplant.

- If you want the assignment to be cross-company for all plants, only defineone entrywithout plant and without order type.

- You can perform the masking of the entries by entering the value* * * * in the entry field.

Further, you can specify a default quantity unit for external processing.

Notes

A partial masking of the entries is not possible. This means that one entry, that containsnotonly the value * * * *, is interpreted as the real value for the order type or the plant.

Presettings for task lists

If you want to integrate task lists into orders within the framework of order processing, youcan make some presettings here which will simplify the execution of maintenance tasks:

- Indicator, whether operations can be selected singly from task lists

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Indicator for changing and selecting work centers for transferring operations from task lists

- Adjustment of the numbering of operations to order numbering

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 320

- Indicator that a task list can only be completely copied into an order once- Indicator, sorted integration of operations into one order.

Necessary actions

If you have already maintained these settings in Release 3.0 as user- dependent, you must copythe user-dependent entries into a new table. For thsi you must execute Report RITPM2USausführen. You can start the report here.

Recommendation

You should implement the above report in any case, as there may be user- dependentpresettings still stored in the table even though they are no longer used in programming.

19.3.3.1.13 Settlement Rule: Define Time and Creation of Distribution Rule

Use

In this IMG activity, you can define for an order type the point in time during orderprocessing when the settlement rule must be maintained.

For each order type you can also define a proposal for the distribution rule according to whichthe settlement rule should be determined if an order of this order type has a higher-level order.

Example

To settle an order, a settlement rule must be defined. This settlement rule can either begenerated by the system based on the distribution rule proposal or you can manually maintainit.

To settle a suborder, you can define, for example, that the main order is always the settlementreceiver of the suborder.

If you manually enter a settlement receiver in a suborder, it is not changed by the distributionrule proposal

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



rule proposal.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 321

19.3.3.1.14 Define Proposed Reference Time for Technical Completion

Use

In this Customizing activity, you define a reference time for the technical completion of theorder.

Standard settings

If you do not make any settings, the date of the technical completion is always used as thereference time.

Further notes

Make sure that maintenance notifications have their own reference time point.

If the reference times are different, this can lead to a situation where the notification dates inthe maintenance history or in the information system are listed under an object or period otherthan the order dates.

This does not mean that information is lost, just that the order dates and the notification datescan be displayed differently from different perspectives; however, in some cases this could be adesired effect.

19.3.3.1.15 Define Transfer of Project or Investment Program

This Customizing activity lets you define whether project numbers, which are maintained in themaster data of maintenance objects, or investment program numbers, should be automaticallytransferred into the maintenance order or service order.

Requirements

The setting is only necessary if you use projects or investment programs.

Activities

If you use the availability control for the project system and assign the maintenance master dataobjects to projects, you should indicate the relevant order types for the transfer of project data.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



If you use investment programs, you can use an assignment key to define the criteria accordingto which investment programs for the order assignment should be proposed.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 322

The assignment of orders to investment programs can be used for the budgeting of:- Investment measures

- General maintenance tasks

- General service tasks

This means that you can use investment programs as a simple tool for budgetmonitoring. However, you must remenber that it is only apassive budget control .A passive budget control means that the R/3 System does not issue a warning whenthe budget is exceeded. Therefore, the user must ensure adherence to the budgetrestrictions themselves using the budget monitoring functions.

Note the relevant settings in the Implementation Guide.

Example

Notes

Note that each order can be assigned to one WBS element, even if the order type is marked asrelevant to the investment program. However, the simultaneous assignment of investmentprogram and WBS element is not allowed.

These settings are therefore only intended as default values for automatic searching forinvestment programs.

Also note that automatic searching for investment programs using the fields or field contentsfrom the order is only performed when the order is created, not for subsequent changes to theorder.

19.3.3.1.16 Define Relevant Fields for Assignment of IM Program

In this Customizing activity, you can define for each assignment key the fields which can beused for automatically determining a investment program.

This concerns fields in the maintenance order or fields from the maintenance master data of thereference object, for example, of the functional location or the equipment which is assigned tothe order.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 323

Further notes

An order can always only be assigned to exactly one position in an investment program. If theautomatic search does not find a unique solution, for example, because the data in the programpositions does not allow one unique solution, then no investment program is automaticallyassigned. During order processing, the user is informed with an appropriate message.

19.3.3.1.17 Assign IM Assignment Key to Order Types

In this work step, you can define an assignment key for each order type, using which aparticular inverstment program can be found automatically.

Requirements

This setting is only necessary if you want to assign orders to investment programs.

19.3.3.1.18 Define Default Order Types for Maintenance Items

Use

In this step you can specify default values for the creation of maintenance items for the PlantMaintenance or Customer Service order types.

Example

Several maintenance planning groups are active in a planning plant.

Every maintenance planning group uses its own order types within regular maintenance.

Allocate the order type to each maintenance planning group which is most frequently used for

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Allocate the order type to each maintenance planning group which is most frequently used formaintenance items.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 324



19.3.3.1.20 Control Key

In this section, you can define the control keys and the default values of the control keys forthe individual order types.

Note

Before changing or deleting existing control keys, you should check whether the control keysare used in the module Production Planning (PP) or whether they have aleady been maintainedwithin the configurations for the maintenance task lists or maintenance work centers.

19.3.3.1.20.1 Maintain Control Keys

Use

In this step, you maintain the allowed control keys for the individual operations of themaintenance- and service orders. You can use the control key of the operation to determine

- which business functions you want to carry out

- how you want to handle the operation

Note

A subsequent change to the parameterization of the control keys is always critical when thesecontrol keys have already been used in orders or task lists.

Activities

Check the available control keys and define new control keys, if necessary.

Example

Note on external processing

The control key of the transaction is set, for example, as follows:

- External processing = + , that is, only external processing operation- Confir mation = Blank or 2 , that is, confirmation possible or intended

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this case, external processing is carried out for the operation, and a purchase requisition and

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 326

a purchase order are generated from this. The costs of this task are posted through the goodsreceipt or invoice receipt for the purchase order.You can carry out a confirmation, but it has no effect on the costing (that is, determining thecosts in the order), because the costs are determined only by the price of external processing.

In this case, the confirmation is for documentation purposes only. We recommend that you donot enter the actual work. You can do this in Customizing for the field selection by hidingfield AFRUD_ISMN depending on the control key.

If you want to prevent confirmation for documentation purposes, you should change the controlkey so that confirmation is not allowed.

If you want to confirm internal and external processing for a measure, you can only do thisusing two separate operations with different control keys.

19.3.3.1.20.2 Maintain Default Values for Control Keys for Order Types

Use

In this step, you can determine which control key is proposed in the operations of maintenanceorders for the combination maintenance plant and order type.

19.3.3.1.21 Maintenance Activity Type

In this step you can define the possible maintenance activity types.

After you have defined the possible maintenance order types, you can determine at a further,finer level the maintenance activity types allowed in your company. You can then specify whichmaintenance activity types are allowed with which order types.

Through the maintenance activity type you can carry out an exact differentiation of themaintenance-specific activities and define for plant maintenance a separate maintenance-specificview of the costs in terms of the maintenance activity type.

The maintenance activity type has the following functions:

- Outline function for the actual costs in the object history. This means that the maintenance

costs are summarized by means of the maintenance activity types.- Indicating whether it is a warranty case or insurance case.

Furthermore the maintenance activity type is an important selection criterion for lists for

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Furthermore, the maintenance activity type is an important selection criterion for lists formaintenance tasks.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 327

19.3.3.1.21.1 Define Maintenance Activity Types

In this step, you determine the allowed maintenance activity types.

Recommendation

In collaboration with your maintenance controlling, define the level of detail of yourmaintenance tasks from the point of view of task processing and from the point of view of costfollow-up for the maintenance history.

The maintenance activity types are stored in the header of each maintenance order.

The maintenance activity types are used in the PM Information System as a grouping element

for maintenance orders.For example, cost evaluations in the PM Information System can be performed usingmaintenance activity types.

The maintenance activity types should not be confused with activities in the CO system.

Activities

Check the maintenance activities of the standard system and define new ones, if necessary.

19.3.3.1.21.2 Assign Valid Maintenance Activity Types to MaintenanceOrder Types

Use

In this step, you can determine which maintenance activity types allowed with which ordertypes.

Activities

Allocate the corresponding maintenance activities to the PM and CS order types.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 328

Example

You have created an order type for modification tasks. In this step you

can now define that only the maintenance activity typeMODIFICATION is allow formodification tasks; all other activity types should not be allowed for this special order type.

19.3.3.1.21.3 Default Values for Maintenance Activity Type for Each OrderType

In this step, you can assign a maintenance activity to an order type. This activity is proposedduring order processing.

19.3.3.1.22 Costing Data for Maintenance and Service Orders

In this step, you create different control parameters for order costing. These control parametersare linked to a costing variant.

For orders, you define control parameters for the valuation of quantity structure and thecalculation of overheads.

These parameters are determined by the following generic terms:

- Costing var iantThe costing variant groups all costing control parameters together. It is specified duringorder costing and consequently represents the link between the application and Customizing.

- Control- Costing types

The costing type determines, among other things, for which reference object (forexample, material, order, project) costing is performed and whether the referenceobject can be costed via the functionality of product costing, the functionality of unitcosting, or the functionality of both.

- Valuation

- Valuation variantsThe valuation variant determines which of the moving average prices that are listed inthe costing or order are used for materials, internal labor and external labor. It alsodetermines how the overhead rates are calculated.

- Relevancy indicatorThe indicator for relevancy to costing determines whether a BOM item, a material

component or an operation is taken into account for costing. For inventory costing,you can also store factors for each relevancy indicator.

- Assignment to cost component structureI hi d i h h l f d i b d b

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this step, you determine how the results of product costing are to be stored by

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 329

allocating a cost component structure to the costing variant.

- Number rangesIn this step, you determine which numbers for the costing documents are assignedinternally by the system.

Example

Costing type 01 is used to create the standard cost estimate for a material. This costing can becarried out either via PP master data such as bills of material and task lists (product costing) orusing unit costing.

You would now like to carry out a valuation in which the materials are valuated with thestandard price, and internal labor is valuated with the planned standard rate for thecorresponding period from cost center accounting. The key date for the valuation should be thebeginning of the next posting period.

Further notes

When testing the settings, please note that the surcharges you define appear in the planned costsdetermination in the order.

The surcharges which are posted on the order using the actual costs, for example, overheads onmaterial or time completion confirmations, are determined by an internal transaction and theorders concerned are automatically applied overhead.

For this reason, you also do not see any overheads in the costs overview of the order directlyafter the actual costs postings.

The Customizing is copied to the order when the order is created.

19.3.3.1.22.1 Maintain Costing Sheet

This menu option shows you how to define a costing sheet.

The costing sheet links all the parts of overhead calculation. It comprises the following lineswhich are processed during the calculation:

- Base linesBase lines contain the calculation base for the overhead calculation, meaning the costelements and origins to which overhead is to be applied.

- Overhead linesOverhead lines are defined when you assign an overhead to them. An overhead line refersto one or more base lines or totals lines. The amount contained in these lines is theoverhead amount, calculated using the percentage arrived at via the overhead records.

- Totals linesNo calculation bases or overheads are assigned to the totals lines. They are used only tocalculate interim or final totals.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 330

Activities

1. Check whether the costing sheets delivered are sufficient for your requirements

2. Change the costing sheets delivered to meet your requirements, or define sheets of yourown.

3. To create a costing sheet, chooseGoto-> Costing sheets in the initial overhead screen.You can then proceed in one of two ways:

a) To copy an existing sheet, proceed as follows:- Overwrite the desired entry in the list.- Press "Enter".- Press "Save" to include the copied sheet into the overview.

b) To create a new sheet, proceed as follows:- Scroll to the end of the list.- Enter a new identification code and name.- Press "Enter".- Press "Save" to include the new sheet in the list.

4. To define the sheet, proceed as follows:

a) Position the cursor on the desired entry.

b) Press the "Detail screen" key.

c) Define a basis

d) Create a calculation base

e) Define an overhead line.

f) Define an overhead.

g) Define a credit.h) Define a totals line.

Defining a costing sheet

To create a costing sheet, carry out the following steps:

Define basis line

Enter a line number and a calculation base.You can either enter an existing calculation base, or create a new one directly from this screen.

Create calculation base

1. In the screen "Maintain Overheads: Costing Sheet Detail", enter a line number.

2. Enter a four-character key in the "Basis" field and an explanatory text in the "Name"field.

3. Position the cursor on the "Basis" field.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



4. Press "Detail".

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 331

5. Press "Enter" to create the calculation base.You can enter either individual cost elements or cost element intervals.If you have divided your cost elements into origins, you can also enter individual originsor origin intervals.The origina is a subdivision of the cost element and allows you to, for example, separatematerials for analysis purposes, even if they are assigned to the same cost element.

6. Save your input.

You can also define or change individual calculation bases independently of the costing sheet(see "Define calculation base").

Define overhead line

To define an overhead line, proceed as follows:

1. Enter a line number.

2. Enter an overhead key.

3. Enter a credit key.

4. Enter "from" and "to" lines.

You can either enter existing overheads and credits, or define new ones.

You use the "from" and "to" fields to determine which lines have overhead applied to them.For details of how to influence line totaling, see the F1 help.

Define overhead

1. In the "Maintain Overheads: Costing Sheet Detail" screen, enter a line number.

2. Enter a four-character key in the "Overhead" field and an explanatory text in the "Name"

field.3. Position the cursor on the "Overhead" field.

4. Press "Detail".

5 . Press "Enter".

6. Assign a Dependency to your overhead.The key and name are entered.

7 . Press "Enter".

8. Enter the individual overhead records.Each record comprises a validity period, a percentage, and a number of condition fields,which are taken from the relevant Condition tables.

9. Save your overhead.

You can also define or change individual overheads independently of the costing sheet (see"Define overhead").

Define credit

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Define credit

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 332

1. In the screen "Maintain Overheads: Costing Sheet Detail", enter a line number.

2. Enter a three-character key for your credit in the relevant field.

3. Position the cursor on the field.

4. Press "Detail".

5 . Press "Enter".

6 . Enter a name.The key is entered.

7. Press "Enter" to create the new credit.You can then enter credit records, contain periods of validity, overhead cost elements,origins, and credit objects.The overhead cost element must have cost element type "41".The credit object may beeither a cost center or an order. You may not specify both

simultaneously.8. Save your input.

You can define or change credits independently of the costing sheet (see "Define credits").

Define totals line

A totals line is a line which does not have a calculation base or an overhead assigned to it.The totaling is controlled by the "from" and "to" line fields. See the F1 help for details of how to affect totaling.

Additional information

Choose Sheet -> Liste to display a detailed breakdown of your costing sheet.The function breaks down each line and shows all the entries you have made for the relevantcosting sheet.Choose Edit -> Check to check that your sheet is complete and free of errors.

Dependencies

A dependency (= access sequence) links your costing sheet to the relevant condition tables,enabling you to look for valid overhead rates.

A dependency consists of one or more Condition tables and governs, by means of conditiontable assignment, the sequence in which overhead records are read.

Example of a dependency

You want to make your overhead percentage dependent on the overhead key in the order andon the order type.To this end, you can use the Standard condition table "14" for the overhead key and "36" forthe order type.

If you put table 14 first and table 36 second, when you calculate overheads, the system firstlooks for a percentagbe dependent on the overhead key and then for a percentage dependent on

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



looks for a percentagbe dependent on the overhead key, and then for a percentage dependent on

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 333

the order type.

You can use the exclusive indicator to control whether you wan the system to continue thesearch after the first successful accessing of and overhead record.If you do not set this indicator, the system looks for all the valid percentages and adds themtogether.

Standard settings

The SAP standard system contains examples of dependency assignments.

Activities

1. To use the dependencies delivered, proceed as follows:

a) Do not change the table assignments.

b) Change the dependency names to meet your requirements.2. To define new dependencies, proceed as follows:

a) Choose Extras -> Dependency .The system displays an overview of all the existing dependencies.

b) Enter an identification code and a name for your dependency.

c) Press "Enter".The system includes the new dependency in the list.

d) Access the detail screen by choosingGoto -> Detail screen .

e) Assign condition tables.When doing this, make sure that you enter the tables governing general criteria first, thenthose governing specific criteria".

f) Return to the overview screen.

g) Activate your dependency.You can create a dependency, without activating it. However, if you use anunactivated dependency in an overhead, the system will not be able to find any validrecords for this overhead.

Condition tables

A condition table defines the structure of an overhead record. The fields contained in a tabledefine the conditions governing how overhead percentages are calculated.

You define a condition table by choosing the fields you want in the order you want for a listof permitted fields.

An overhead line can hold a maximum of three fields. If you choose more than three fieldsfor your condition table, the system inserts the last three chosen into the overhead line. Theothers appear, in the specified sequence, in the screen header.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 334

Example of a selection

You want to use the fields "Company code", "Business area", and "Plant" as conditions forcalculating your overheads.To do this, you must create a new condition table and select the three fields from the list of permitted fields.

Standard settings

The SAP standard system contains examples of dependency assignments to Condition tables.They are numbered up to 500 and cannot be changed.

Recommendation

For performance reasons, you should maintain the following field sequence:

a) Controlling areaThis only applies if you have more than one controlling area.

b) Overhead typeThis only applies if your actual and planned percentage rates might be different.

c) Company-specific condition fieldsChoose the sequence of these fields in such a way that the fields most often filledappear first.

Activities

To create new condition tables, proceed as follows:

1. Choose Extras -> Condition table .

2. Enter a number between 501 and 999.3. Choose Condition -> Create .

4. Enter a name for your condition table.

5. Choose the fields you want in the order you want them.

6. Generate your condition table.

19.3.3.1.22.2 Maintain Costing Variants

Costing variants contain control parameters for costing.

The costing variant forms the link between the application and Customizing, since all costestimates are created and saved with reference to a costing variant.

The costing variant determines how costing is carried out. Among other things, it controls how

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 335

the quantity structure and the value strucutre are created.

A costing variant includes the following:

- Costing type

- Valuation variant

- Quantity structure control

- Number range assignment

- Organizational level

- Various parameters for unit costing and product costing

Note

Although it is technically possible to have two costing variants with the same costing type and

valuation variant, this should be avoided to prevent data from being overwritten.The reason for this is that the key structure for the costing results in the database uses thecosting type and the valuation variant, and not the costing variant.

Standard settings

The standard system contains a number of predefined costing variants.

SAP recommendation

You should assign a different valuation variant to each costing variant with which you intend tosave cost estimates.

This one-to-one assignment enables you to change the valuation strategies later as required.

Actions

1. Enter an alphanumerical key and and name for the costing variant.

2. In the detail screen, assign a costing type and a valuation variant to the costing variant.If you want to use your own parameters, carry out the steps Define costing types andDefine valuation variants.

3. If the costing variant will be used for base object costing, specify whether cost elementsmust be assigned to the costing items. For all other reference objects in unit costing, thecosts must be totaled according to cost elements.

4. If the costing variant will be used for product costing, specify

- whether the costing results should be saved

- whether the system should use a unit cost estimate for a specific single-level BOM

- whether cost components can be entered manually- how error messages are issued

- how the system is to search for valid alternatives to create a quantity structure

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 336

19.3.3.1.22.3 Define Valuation Variants

Here you create a valuation variant that contains the parameters for valuating a cost estimate.

You also define

- for work orders and CO production orders:which costing sheet is proposed in the order master data

- for pr ojects:which costing sheet is proposed in the project profile

You define valuation strategies for the following objects:

- Material componentsHere you define the order in which the system looks for prices in the accounting view andthe costing details screen of the material master record to valuate materials.

- Internal activitiesHere you define the order in which the system looks for prices in activity type planning incost center accounting to valuate internal activities.You also define which plan version is used in cost center accounting.

- External processing in the operationHere you define the order in which the system looks for prices in the purchasing inforecord or in an operation in the work order or in the routing to valuate external activities.

- SubcontractingHere you define the order in which the system looks for prices in the purchasing inforecord. In purchasing, quota arrangements are used to create a mixed price for materialsthat are supplied by external vendors with materials provided by the customer. You canspecify whether the quota of the suppliers that are entered in the source list for thematerial to be processed should be determined with the planned quota arrangement or theactual quota arrangement.

- Costing sheetThe costing sheet contains the parameters that control the calculation of overhead. Tocheck an existing costing sheet or to create a new costing sheet, process Define overhead.

To group overhead according to material groups, process Define overhead groups andassign the overhead groups to the overhead key in the costing sheet.

Strategy sequences

You define the individual valuation methods of the valuation variant as strategy sequences. Forthe valuation of material components, for example, you define a strategy sequence that reads the

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 337



5. Create a valuation strategy for subcontracting by entering up to three values as the searchsequence.

6. Select a quota arrangement for subcontracting.

7. Assign a suitable costing sheet to the valuation variant.

8. Assign the valuation variant to a costing variant.

19.3.3.1.22.4 Assign Costing Parameters and Results Analysis Keys

In this step, you can set the costing parameters for maintenance and service orders. You canalso assign a resultsanalysis key to each order type.

Requirements

Before you set the costing variants for orders, you must create the costing variants.

Activities

Determine the costing parameters.

19.3.3.1.23 Define Change Docs, Collective Purc. Req. Indicator, OperationNo. Interval

Use

In this activity, you can define:

- Whether changes to the order header are recorded using documents and are displayed inthe form of an action log

- The increment at which numbers for the individual operations should be assigned

- Whether just one purchase requisition (collective purchase requisition) should be generatedfor external material and operations for each order

- Whether a workflow should be generated for changes to dates and quantities forcomponents not held in stock, operations processed externally, and external elements, if apurchase requisition is already available

- Whether certain order types are maintained using a PDC system- Whether reservations or purchase requisitions relevant to materials planning should be

generated when an order is created or only when the order is released

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 339

- Whether the net price should be copied unchanged from the purchase requisition into thepurchase order

Example

- You define an increment of05 . This means that the operation numbers are assigned in thesequence 05, 10 , and so on. If you do not make any settings for the increment, theoperation numbers are assigned in increments of 10.

- If you do not flag theCollctveRequstn (collective purchase requisition) field, an internalpurchase requisition with an item is generated for each external operation and externalmaterial.

- You do not select the fieldReservation/Purchase Requisition . As a result, purchaserequisitions are only generated when the order is released, and reservations only becomerelevant to materials planning once the order has been released.

Notes

The changes to the order header serve to document which system user has set which orderstatus. Therefore, if you want to know who released or completed an order, you must enter anX here for the relevant order type.

Reservation/Purchase Requisition indicator

If this field is selected, reservations/purchase requisitions for external operations that are relevantto materials planning are generated when the order is created, and not when the order isreleased.

This setting is copied to the order header as a default value and can be changed by the orderprocessor in the order.

You should always deactivate this indicator if you create orders with a long lead time andrescheduling is expected within this time.

You can thereby avoid unwanted and frequent changes to materials planning before the order isreleased.

19.3.3.1.24 Set Workflow for Orders

The following standard tasks are provided for the workflow:

- Standard task TS20000652 - Purchase order change in service order

- Standard task TS20000650 - Purchase order change in maintenance order

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 340

A workflow is automatically triggered if:

- Dates, quantities, delivery addresses or customer numbers for external components changein the order

- The requirements quantity or requirements date for an external material or service has beenchanged

- An external material item or external service operation has been deleted and a purchaseorder already exists

- An external service operation has become an internally processed operation

- A service or maintenance order has been technically completed and therefore an externalmaterial or external service is no longer required

- One or more purchase orders have already been created

The purchaser responsible receives a work item, in which all the relevant changes are listed,

and they can process the purchase order concerned directly from the message.

Requirements

1. Maintain agent assignment: Link the standard task to its possible agents.

a) Depending on the application component in which you are working, choosePurchase order change for maintenance order or Purchase order change for service order .

b) Choose the pushbuttonCreate agent assignment .2. Link the purchaser to organizational management.

3. Activate event linkage.

a) Choose Plant maintenance -> Maintenance processing -> Maintenance orders

-> Activate event linkage .b) Depending on the application component in which you are working, choosePurchase

order change for maintenance order or Purchase order change for service order .

c) Activate or deactivate with a double click.

4. Maintain order-based parameters.

a) Choose Plant M aintenance and Customer Service -> Maintenance and Service Processing -> Maintenance and Service Orders -> Functions and Settings for Order Types -> Define Change Docs, Collective Purch. Req. Indicators,Operation No. Interval .

b) Set the ' Workflow for purchase order change' indicator.

Further notes

For more information, see BC Workflow Scenarios PM and CS in the SAP Library underBC - PM and CS Workflow Scenarios .

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 341

19.3.3.1.25 Goods Movements for Order

In this section you perform the settings for goods movements relating to PM orders and serviceorders.

19.3.3.1.25.1 Define Documentation for Goods Movements for the Order

In this Customizing activity you can define which types of goods movement are documented foreach individual PM order.

This function can be called from order processing in list form.

You can determine whether the list contains

- goods receipts in respect of purchase orders for the order

- planned goods issues for the order

- unplanned goods issues for the order and

- goods receipts for the refurbishment order in the case of a refurbishment order.

Standard settings

In the standard setup, all types of goods movement for the order are documented.

Recommendation

To obtain full information on all goods movements for the order, you should deactivate anindicator only when you are posting no purchase orders, unplanned or planned materialwithdrawals whatsoever for this order type.

Activities

Check the standard settings.

Further notes

Material withdrawal documents are always managed in the system; the function described heredeals with an order-related display function.

If you change the settings, you can update the list for new orders using the program'RIAUFM00'.

19.3.3.1.25.2 Set List Editing for Goods Movements for Orders

In this step you define the selection mask for the list display transaction of goods movements

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 342

for PM orders and service orders.

Here you can configure- the possible selection fields

- the actual values with which the selection fields are to be preset

Procedure

If you proceed, you will see the standard selection screen with all the fields defined by SAP.

You can preselect values for these fields.

Press ' Continue' to come to another mask in which you can assign particular attributes for theselection fields.


- Protected - The field is displayed on the selection mask but is not ready for input. For

example, you have assigned a value to a document which is not to be changed by theuser.

- Suppressed - The field is suppressed on the selection mask and can therefore not be usedas a selection criterion.

- Variable - A variable is preselected for the field rather than an actual value.For example, the selection should always be executed over a certain planning interval, forexample, the current month. You would enter the variable ' Current month' in this case.This way, the current month would be proposed automatically as a selection criterion.

Note and Recommendation

Every user can create his own selection screen this way. The selection screen you have definedhere is proposed by the system only if no individual selection screen was defined for the userunder his user ID.

If you want to define an individual selection screen for each user and the user-specific selectionscreen should be automatically proposed every time the report is called, the report variant namemust start with 'U_USERNAME' .

Maintaining selection variants

If you call up this function, this will take you to a start screen containing all the selectionfields. Here you can define the standard selection screen. This selection screen will then beproposed whenever no individual selection screen was defined for the user under the name' U_USERNAME'. The name of the selection variant is always 'SAP_TCODE_XXXX'. XXXXstands for the corresponding application transaction.

Maintaining user-specific selection screens

This function is not set using Customizing.The individual user maintains the user-specific variants by calling and executing individual

transactions.The user can call the ' Settings' function from the list and create his or her own selectionscreen there.The systems automatically generates the variant 'U_USERNAME' , which is always called up for

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 343

the user in subsequent transaction calls after saving.

19.3.3.1.25.3 Reorganization of List for Goods Movements for Orders

Use

In this Customizing activity, you can start the restructuring of the list of goods movements formaintenance- and service orders.

To do this, call up transactionSE38 and start the reportRIAUFM00 .

You can restrict the restructuring of goods movements to certain goods movement documentnumbers and to certain material document years.

Activities

You must only carry out this action when you have changed the settings for goods movementsin Customizing, and the documentation for goods movements for existing orders should bebrought into line with the new Customizing settings.

Further notes

The report should run in batch in the case of a large number of orders and goods movements.

19.3.3.1.26 Availability Check for Material, PRTs, and CapacitiesIn this section you make the settings that are important for the material availability check andthe production resources and tools availability check for components in the maintenance- orservice order.

You need a checking group and a checking rule to execute this availability check.

You must assign the checking group to the individual materials by means of material masterrecord maintenance. You define the checking rule for each application. You define the scope of check with the checking group and checking rule.

19.3.3.1.26.1 Define Checking Rules

Use

In this step, you can define checking rules for the following applications:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 344

- Sales and distribution

- MRP

- Production order processing

- Maintenance order processing

- Service process ing

- Inventory management

You can thus carry out various application-related checks for a material.

Actions

For the company, define whether there is a need to check on a differentiated basis for eachapplication.

19.3.3.1.26.2 Define Scope of Check

In this menu option, you define the check scope. Checking group and checking rule togetherspecify the scope of the check.

You can specify the following:

- which elements relevant to MRP (inward goods movements/outward goods movements) aretaken into account (for example, purchase requisition, purchase order, planned order)

- which stock categories are taken into account

- whether replenishment lead time is checked

Actions

Specify

- which inward goods movements and which outward goods movements are to be included inthe availability check

- which stocks are to be included in the availability check

- whether the check should take into account the replenishment lead time

- whether the availability should always be checked at plant level.

19.3.3.1.26.3 Define Inspection Control

Use

In this activity, you define the check control. The checking rule together with the checking

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 345

group specify the scope of the check.

You can make the checking rule as well as the actual check itself dependent on the followingparameters:

- plant

- order type

- operationThe operation can have the following characteristics:

- order created

- release(d) order

Control parameters for the operation 'create'In addition to this, you can specify whether a planned order can be converted to aproduction order or process order using collective conversion in the case of:

- missing parts- missing PRTs or

- insufficient capacity

'Release' control parameters for operation

In addition, you can control whether an order can be released in the case of

- miss ing mater ia ls

- missing PRTs

- insufficient capacity

Actions

Define the following:

- whether an availability check is to be carried out when you create or release an order

- whether an availability check is to be carried out when you save an order that has beencreated or released

- which checking rule is to be used

- what effect a material shortfall is to have on the creation or release of an order

Maintenance orders (PM)/Service orders (CS)

The automatic check at time 1 (create), is not executed for maintenance orders, or serviceorders.

You can only carry out the check manually before you have released your maintenance ordersor service orders.

The automatic check at time 2 (release) is executed if it is switched on. (See "no check"switch).

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 346

Notes on capacity availability check

If you want capacity availability to be checked automatically when the statuscreated orreleased is set, you cannot set the indicator no check .

If you do not maintain an internal overall profile in the fieldCapAvailOverProf , the overallprofile SAPSFCG013 will be used for the capacity requirements check. The period split ispredefined as week in the period profile.

You can use the indicator release to determine how and if the order is released in the case of capacity shortfall:

- release determined by user

- release

- no release

19.3.3.1.27 Assign Standard Texts for Short Messages to Order Types

Use

In this Customizing activity, you can define default texts for the individual order types. Youcan assign a text to every order type.

You should use standard texts. In this case, you always enterTEXT as Object . You can usestandard texts with any number of text IDs.

You create standard texts as follows:From the initial SAP screen, chooseTools -> Form Printing -> SAPscript -> Standard text .

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 347

19.3.3.1.28 Basic Order View

19.3.3.1.28.1 Define View Profiles

Use

In this IMG activity, you define view profiles for the basic order view. You can assignmultiple tab pages to each view profile.

When defining the tab pages, you must note the following:

- The key of the tab page serves as the sort key for the sequence in which the tab pagesare displayed.

- You can assign a maximum of eight screen areas to a tab page. The sequence in which

the screen areas are assigned also determines the sequence in which they are displayed onthe tab page.

- There are screen areas that take up a whole tag page (fullscreen). You must always enterthese screen areas in the field for the screen area 1.

For all the pushbuttons for the navigation, that are offered on the initial screen of the order,you must define which tab page is displayed when you select the pushbutton.

If you do not define an active tab page for a pushbutton, the system uses the first tab page.

Activities

Define the view profile and assign it to the order types.

19.3.3.1.28.2 Assign View Profiles to Order Types

Use

In this IMG activity, you assign previously-defined view profiles to the order type, the planningplant and the activity category.

In doing so, note the following:

- If you leave the activity category empty, then the assigned view profile applies to all the

activity categories.- If you also define an activity category (for example, add), then the assigned view profile

only applies to this activity category.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 348

Requirements

You have defined view profiles.


In this section, you maintain the general data for the maintenance- and service orders.

19.3.3.2.1 Define Default Values for Component Item Categories

In this work step, you can determine the proposal values for the item categories of the ordercomponents.

The proposal values can be determined dependent on the material type and the maintenanceplant.

Example

If it states in your system that raw materials are basically materials kept in stock, you canassign the item category for components kept in stock to the material type for raw materials.

In the standard system, this would be the entry ' ROH' with the item category ' L' (stock item).

Requirements

The maintenance plants, material types and item categories for components must be set up.

Recommendation

In any case, you should include an entry without the material type (value SPACE for thematerial type).

This entry is then always used if you want to obtain a component without a material number inthe order. You should assign the item category for non-stock components to this entry. In thestandard system, this would be the value 'N' .

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 349

Further notes

In the case of item categories which refer to non-stock components, for example, item category' N' , purchase requisitions are generated from the order.

The values defined here are then used, if you assign components to the order without a BOMreference.

If you assign components to the order using a BOM, the item categories are transferred fromthe BOM item.

19.3.3.2.2 Define Movement Types for Material Reservations

When an order is created, reservations are created for the components kept in stock. These

reservations obtain a movement type for withdrawal. You control the material withdrawal usingthe movement type.

Standard settings

In the standard system, movement types are preset which you must not change.

For the components, Plant Maintenance and Customer Service, the entry with the key 'IWO1' isrelevant. In addition, you only need the two entries for the goods issue (GI) of materials formaintenance orders and the accompanying reverse operation (GI cancellation).

Recommendation

Do not under any circumstances delete other entries, since these are required by otherapplications, for example, the PP system.

19.3.3.2.3 Define Account Assignment Cat. and Document Type forPurchase Requisitions

In this Customizing activity you define the purchasing account assignment category andpurchasing document type for purchase requisitions for maintenance and service orders.

For the document type, you can choose whether you always want to generate purchaserequisitions for standard purchase orders, contracts or other document types of the purchasingsystem.

Purchase requisitions for PM/SM orders must always be assigned to PM/SM orders. This means

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 350

that you must change the standard setting for the account assignment category only if youdefined a new account assignment category for order-account assignment in Customizing for thepurchasing system.

Standard settings

In the standard delivery, account assignment categories and a document type for the purchaserequisitions are provided.

Activities

If you defined non-standard account assignment categories and document types, you mustmaintain the corresponding entries.

Remember that this setting applies to all PM/SM order types.

19.3.3.2.4 Define Accounting Indicators

In this work step, you can define the possible accounting indicator.

You later assign the accounting indicator to the order in the order header. It is copied into allthe actual postings for this order (costs and revenues) to differentiate the origin.

Requirements

Assigning an accounting indicator to an order is only advisable if the order is settled at aprofitability segment. For this, the component profitability analysis and market segment analysis(CO-PA) must be active.

The accounting indicator influences the finding of value fields for the profitability segment inthe profitability analysis.

Standard settings

The entries made by SAP are only provided as examples.

Activities

Define your own accounting indicator.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 351

19.3.3.2.5 Define Priorities

&USE

You define priority types in this Customizing activity. You can define your own priorities forevery priority type.

Requirements

First, check the priority type which you defined underMaintenance- and Service Notifications -> Notification Processing -> Reaction Monitoring -> Define Priorities .

If you want to use the same priority type for maintenance - and service orders, no settings arenecessary in this Customizing activity.

19.3.3.2.6 Create System Conditions or Operating Conditions

Use

In this Customizing activity, you define the possible asset conditions.

Effects on the capacity load in production

In the reference objects functional location and equipment, you have the option of defining aproduction work center.

If your maintenance tasks should influence the capacities of the production work center, youmust select the field 'Document by PM' in this setting. As a result, a capacity load for the production work center is created by the maintenance order.

The capacity loads for maintenance work centers are not affected, but are subject to the normalcapacity load logic.

Note

You can enter a system condition in the maintenance order for every operation. Using thissystem condition, you can determine whether the operation must be carried out in production orwhen the system is shut down, for example.

This asset status does not affect capacities in production.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 352

19.3.3.2.7 Activate Default Value for Current Date as Basic Date

In this step, you can define for which plants the current date should be proposed as a basicdate for the order.

19.3.3.2.8 Define Default Values for Units for Operation

In this step, you can specify the default values for units of the duration and the work output of an operation.

Note

Bear in mind that you can only use units of the dimension 'ZEIT' as units of measurement forthe default values.

Example

The processing time of individual operations should be specified in hours, the total time of thetask should be specified in days.

To achieve this, specify ' STD' as a time unit for work; the time unit for the duration is'TAG'.

Recommendation

You should select the time units so that the display of the times is as clear as possible for theuser (for example, a result of 37,800 seconds is better displayed as 10.5 hours).

19.3.3.2.9 User Status for Orders

In this section, you can define status profiles and assign them to the different order types.

You can use the status profile to define your own status management for:

- Pieces of equipment


- Maintenance- and Service Notifications

- Maintenance- and Service Orders

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 353

- Order operations

19.3.3.2.9.1 Define Status Profile

Use




- sys tem s ta tus and

- user statusSystem status










Result


- Which system statuses are the maximum possible for an object

- Which system statuses can be set for the different individual business transactions

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________SAP AG 354

Status profile

You can define your own statusprofiles@ in the IMG activityDefine Status Profiles . Everystatus profile must be allocated to at least one object.

Every status profile contains one or more statuses allowed.



- define your own statuses (user statuses) and document their function in a respective longtext

- determine the statusnumbers for user statuses which predefine the possible sequence forprocessing user statuses




Status number



If you do not assign a status number to a user status, the user status can always be set.However, there can only be one user status with a status number active at any one time.

If you assign a status number to a user status, you must also specify a lowest and a higheststatus number for the status. These limit the status number interval from which the followinguser status can be chosen.





- Install equipment


When maintaining the status profile, you can determine for every status within the profilewhether equipment of this status can be installed or dismantled and whether a deletion indicatorcan be set or not.

You can also determine in status maintenance whether, for example, the deletion indicator is setautomatically and whether the system should respond with a warning or an error message whena deletion indicator is set.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



SAP AG 355

Maintenance objects for which status profiles can be maintained:

- Equipment





- Service or der s

Notes



Actions


19.3.3.2.9.2 Create Authorization Keys for User Status Authorizations

In this step you define authorization keys which you can use to set up authorization checkswhen you manually set or delete a user status. When the system sets a user status as areaction to business transaction, it does not perform an authorization check.


Example




Activities

1. Check whether you want to define authorizations for your user statuses.2. If necessary, create authorization keys as follows:

a) Choose "New entries".

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 356

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



SAP AG 356





19.3.3.3 Partner

In this section, you define the partners involved in the order.

Different partners can be involved, depending on the order type. These partners can playdifferent roles.

19.3.3.3.1 Define Partner Determination Procedure and Partner Function

Use

In this step, you define the partners for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service.

- The following partner types are defined in the system:


- Contact per son


- User

- Personnel number


- Position

- You can define partner roles centrally for all the applications in Logistics and assign aparticular partner type to these.For example, you can assign the partner type "Customer" (with customer master andcustomer number) to the partner function "Sold-to-party".

- You can define partnerdetermination procedures and assign any number of partner functionsto each one. You can define whether a particular role in the notification or order shouldbe changeable, and whether it is obligatory.

- A group of partners (processor, person responsible) belongs to each notification type andorder type. You therefore assign an appropriate partner determination procedure to eachnotification type and order type.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 357

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



SAP AG 357

You also assign the partner functions to each notification type and order type. Here you define

which which role should be assigned to a particular function (for example, employeeresponsible).

- For pieces of equipment, you define the partner determination procedure in Customizingfor Plant Maintenance and Customer Service under Assign partner determination procedureto equipment category. You can synchronise the functionsVendor, current customer,customer, final customer, operator with the partner functions.

Recommendation

Use the partner determination procedures contained in the standard system and their assignmentsto notification types and order types. If you want to use your own partner determinationprocedures, you can use the notification types, order types, and partner determination procedurespredefined by SAP as a reference.

Activities

1. Define the partner functions and partner determination procedures.


19.3.3.4 Scheduling

In this section, you make the settings for the scheduling parameters of the maintenance- andservice orders.

Notes

Since scheduling data is also used by other user departments, you should make a comparisonwith the module 'P roduction Planning' (PP ) changing the scheduling parameters.

19.3.3.4.1 Maintain Scheduling Types

Use

In this step, you can maintain the allowed

scheduling types.

Requirements

Before you delete existing scheduling types because they are not needed for maintenance orservice processing, you should check whether they are used by other user departments.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 358

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



SAP AG 358

19.3.3.4.2 Set Scheduling Parameters

Use

In this Customizing activity you can set the following scheduling parameters for everymaintenance- and service order and for every maintenance plant:

- Automatic scheduling

- Display scheduling log automatically after scheduling

- Maximum number of days for start in the past

- Automatic adjustment of the start/finish dates

- Shift order indicator

- Scheduling to incorporate breaks (breaks at the work center are taken into account whenscheduling is created)

Activities

Maintain the scheduling parameters.

19.3.3.4.3 External Scheduling

In this section, you make the settings for external scheduling.

19.3.3.4.3.1 Define for Each Order Type

In this section, you define the order types, for which you want to activate external scheduling.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 359

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

Select the order types, for which you want external scheduling, using anX.

19.3.3.4.3.2 Configure Communication

In this activity, you make the settings for external scheduling of the order.

The following remote function modules, which define the interface parameters, are available asa template for the interface description:

- PM_ORDER_EXTERN_SCHED_APPOINT

- PM_ORDER_EXTERN_BOOK_DEFAULT

- PM_ORDER_EXTERN_SCHED_DIALOG

- PM_ORDER_EXTERN_SCHED_DEFAULT

- READ_WORKLOAD

You can change the descriptions of the function modules.

When you call up a function, the system displays the standard name of an RFC destination inthe Destination field. The recipient can be an SAP System or an external system. You definethe program name in transactionSM59 .

Standard settings

The following predefined values exist that specify the time, at which the system should call upa particular function module.

- A: For scheduling proposals

- B: When savingHere, the system transfers the data asynchronously to the external scheduling system usinga transaction Remote Function Call (TRFC). The TRFC ensures that the dates are onlyexecuted once.

- D: For scheduling in dialog with external schedulingFor example, when creating or changing orders online, the scheduling can be performedfor external scheduling with dialog.

- S: For scheduling without dialog with external schedulingFor example, when a maintenance plan is called up, the system generates the order. It isnot possible to select from different dates, only one date can be agreed.

- R: When reading the technician assignment in the graphical monitor

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 360

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Further notes

You do not have to enter a function module for each predefined value. The use of functionmodules is dependent on your scenarios.

SAP does not offer any function modules other than those supplied in the standard system.

19.3.3.4.3.3 Set External Scheduling Parameters

In this activity, you set the scheduling parameters for external scheduling.

Example

If you use the function module PM_ORDER_EXTERN_SCHED_DIALOG as dialog forscheduling, the following scheduling parameters are preset:

- Scheduling parameter1Date type (for example, morning, afternoon)

- Scheduling parameter2Customer calendar (for example, Monday to Friday)

- Scheduling parameter3Scheduling rule (for example, gold card)

Requirements

You must reconcile the scheduling parameters with the external scheduling system.

Activities

Configure the scheduling parameters.

Further notes

If you do not want to use the function module PM_ORDER_EXTERN_SCHED_DIALOG, youcan define the meaning of the three scheduling parameters yourself in your own functionmodule.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 361

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.3.6.2 Formulas

In this section, you can define formulas and parameters which are used in capacity planning,scheduling and costing to calculate:

- capacity requirements

- lead times

- costs

19.3.3.6.2.1 Set Formula Parameters

In PRT management, you need formula parameters to define:

- formulas which are used for calculating the required total quantity and the total usage valueof a production resource/tool

- formula constants in PRT master records of the type "Others"

Note

In addition, you need formula parameters in work center maintenance for the

- description of standard values

- definition of formulasThese formulas are used for calculating the capacity requirements, the lead times and thecosts in capacity planning, scheduling and costing.

Actions

Define the formula parameters to be used in your company.

19.3.3.6.2.2 Configure Formula Definition

In PRT management, formulas are used for calculating the required quantity and the requiredusage value of a production resource/tool.

Note

Formulas are also used for calculating the capacity requirements, the lead times and the costs incapacity planning, scheduling and costing.

ActionsDefine the formulas to be available for use in your company.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 363

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.3.7 Print ControlIn this section, you define the print control for shop papers for notifications, orders andmaintenance plans:

- Type and form of shop papers


19.3.3.7.1 Define Shop Papers, Forms and Output Programs

You can define various shop papers and their print layout in this Customizing activity.

Consider the following when maintaining the print layout:

- You can maintain shop paper layouts separately for notifications and orders.

- Preliminary settings are supplied for each of these areas.

- In the detailed display you can see the name of a report for each shop paper and thedescription of a form that has been allocated.The individual reports serve the print output; the form defines the layout of the shop paperand the fields that are printed.

Requirements

Check the SAP default settings before you make any changes.

Standard settings

If you want to change the layout of the lists, do not change the standard forms. You shouldcopy them instead.

Activities

You should only edit the forms that you have created yourself.

If you create new shop papers, when you name them you should consider that you can workwith generic shop paper descriptions in the following Customizing activities (for example,user-specific print controls).

You should coordinate the way you name your shop papers accordingly.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 364

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.3.7.2 Define Printer

Use





- Print diversion of the shop papers to the work center printerThe work center printer is only used for the shop papers (completion confirmation slip and

wage slip). You choose the work center printer later in the application menuChange Work Center .- Print Diversion via Customizing

The activated print diversion always has the highest priority when determining a printer. Ittakes precedence over the user-specific selection and the work center printer.




Shop papers


2010 x

2020 x

2030 x

2040 x x x

2060 x x x

2062 x x x

2070 x x x

2072 x x x

Notification papers

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 365

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Paper header items

1010 x x1020 x1030 x1500 x x


- Print diversion according to field contentsIf you have activated the print diversion, you can define a special printer and printparameter for a certain shop paper depending on certain field contents (table-controlledprint diversion).The active print diversion always has the highest priority for the printer determination. Italso takes precedence over user-specific selections.As well as table-controlled print diversion, there is alsoprogram-controlled printdiversion , in which you can determine the work center printer in the task level menu

Change Work Center .Only one shop paper can be active for each table entry, as otherwise the unambiguousnessof the printer assignment cannot be guaranteed.For each table entry you can create as many records as you want, which differ in fieldcontent or in field name. Each record contains the following specifications:




Activities

Generic entries are possible when maintaining user-specific entries and for the possible papersfor each order type.

19.3.3.8 Message Control

Use

In this Customizing activity, you can define for certain message numbers whether and howmessages are displayed:

No message

As warning messages

As error messages

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 366

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



As result messages

As information messagesIn dialog boxes

Activities

You can only make this setting for certain message numbers delivered by SAP. You cannotmake this setting for any of your own messages.

19.3.3.9 Assign Default Values for Settlement Areas to Order Types

In this step you can define a default value for the accounting area for every order type andevery plant.

Example

This function allows you to form groups of orders for collective order settlement.

For example, you can assign all service objects to an accounting area.

Requirements

The accounting areas must be created in Customizing for the cost accounting system.

Recommendation

If there is a small number of orders, the definition of accounting areas is not necessary.

Remember that you cannot settle more than 100,000 orders, for reasons of runtime.

If the total number of all active maintenance, service and CO orders is greater than100,000, refer to note 45290 in the OSS system.

19.3.3.10 Object Information

In this section, you make the settings for the object information.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 367

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.3.10.1 Define Object Information Keys








The object information also contains history data from the PM Information System and data

from the notifications and orders executed.You can use the parameterization of the object information to define whether the notificationand order information should be displayed:







To activate the display depending on notification and order data, you can define threshold values

which are used to select historical data through the PM Information System. When one of thethreshold values is reached, the object information is displayed and is indicated with this symbol@03@ in the object information mask.

Further notes




- Automatic view: If you enter the number of a view in this field, the object information isautomatically displayed, if an attribute of the reference object class is assigned to the view

selected.- Display view: In this field, you can specify a class, whose attributes should be specified in

the object information screen. These attributes are indicated by @30@.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 368

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







The following lines relate to displaying the selected notifications:




Requirements

Standard settings

Activities

Example






- Mar k the field SelComplNotifs .- Mark OutstdgNotifs and CompletedNotifs to display the last notifications in the object

information.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 369

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________








19.3.3.10.2 Assign Object Information Keys to Order Types

In this step you can assign an object information key to each order type.

19.3.3.11 Define Field Selection for Order Header Data (PM)

In this step you define the field selection for the following maintenance order data:

- Location and account assignment data

- Order header and reference object

Remember that you can process location and account assignment data using an internal fieldselection transaction.

When making the field selection for the account assignment data, remember that this is used forseveral objects of the PM/SM system. For this reason, you should always take account of theinfluencing values.

The following objects contain account assignment data:

- Equipment- Functional location

- Reference functional location

- Maintenance order

Recommendation

When maintaining the field selection, remember that this refers to the field selection for aSUBSCREEN.

A SUBSCREEN is a screen that can be used at various locations and is included in otherscreen templates. The account assignment data screen is used in the objects listed above.

When you select the influencing fields, you see in the list fields for various objects of the PM

system. In this way you can, for example, define that a field selection with regard to locationand account assignment data for selected order types differs from that for certain types of functional location.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 370

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Note

You should not change the field selection depending on the called program for SAP standardprograms.






- The field is ready for input (default setting)- The field requires an input (required field)






screen, depending on a valueFor example, you define that the work center is a required entry for a certain order type.

Activities








________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 371

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




















________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 372

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.3.12 Define Field Selection for Order Header Data (CS)

In this step, you define the field selection for the service-specific data in the order header.

Further notes

You should not change the field selection dependent on the program for standard SAPprograms.







- The field requires an input (required field)- The field is only displayed





________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 373

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities





















All influencing fields appear on the screen.d) Place the cursor on a influencing field, for which you wish to assign a value, and

press New Values .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 374

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



A dialog box appears on the screen.




19.3.3.13 Define Field Selection for Order Operation (PM and CS)

You can use this Customizing activity to define the field selection for operations (detail screenand operation overview) in maintenance- and service orders.

Recommendation

Do not define required entry fields for the operation overview. This is not supported fortechnical reasons.

19.3.3.14 Define Field Selection for Components (PM and CS)

Recommendation

Activities

You can use this activity to define the field selection for components (detail screen andcomponent overview) in maintenance and service orders.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 375

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Notes

Data that affects external components is copied to the purchase requisition.

Do not define any required entry fields for the component overview. This cannot be supportedfor technical reasons.

19.3.3.15 Interface for Procurement Using Catalogs (OCI)

19.3.3.15.1 Define Catalogs

In this IMG activity you define all catalogs and specify the call structure, that is, the data thatis required for addressing the catalog. As this is catalog-specific, you must contact the catalogprovider to request the data.

For more information, see the documentation on the field type.

Activities

1. Enter the catalog ID and a description.

2. Define the call structure.


Further notes

Look at the sample settings for the aspect catalog and for the SAP product catalog.

SAP also offers a product catalog inclusing Catalog Content Management (CCM). For moreinformation, see the Service Marketplace under service.sap.com/ ibc-srm -> Catalog ContentManagement.

19.3.3.15.2 Assign Catalog to Order Type

Use

In this IMG activity you assign a catalog to the order type or to the notification type and tothe planning plant.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 376

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Depending on the order type or network type, the system proposes the corresponding catalog forprocurement during order-/network processing.

You can also define the following parameters:

- Organization

- User names

- Password

In addition to these parameters, you must record the catalog parameter by which they areaddressed in the catalog.

Requirements

You have created the catlog under Define catalog.

19.3.3.15.3 Convert HTML fields to SAP fields

Use

In this IMG activity you define how the HTML fields are converted from the catlog into SAPfields.

There are three types of HTML fields:

- Fields that are converted 1:1 to SAP fields

- SAP fixed values that are independent of the catalog value

- Help fields (for example, material)

The following table shows the HTML fields and their meaning as they are defined for the OCIinterface:

HTML field Meaning

NEW_ITEM-MATNR Material numberNEW_ITEM-VENDORMAT Material number for the vendorNEW_ITEM-VENDOR Number of the vendorNEW_ITEM-DESCRIPTION Description of the item to be orderedNEW_ITEM-MATGROUPMaterial groupNEW_ITEM-CONTRACT_ITEM New contract item

NEW_ITEM_CURRENCY Currency. Required when a price comes back, otherwiseoptional. Must have the standard ISO code for currencies.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 377

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



NEW_ITEM_PRICEUNIT Number of units that must be ordered for a certain priceNEW_ITEM_PRICE Price according to catalog

NEW_ITEM_QUANTITY Required amountNEW_ITEM_UNIT Unit of measure (in standard ISO code)NEW_ITEM-MANUFACTCODE ManufacturerNEW_ITEM-MANUFACTMAT Product number of manufacturerNEW_ITEM-LEADTIME Delivery time in daysNEW_ITEM-SERVICE Required if services should also be copied from the catalog.NEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD1 Customer-specific fieldNEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD2 Customer-specific fieldNEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD3 Customer-specific fieldNEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD4 Customer-specific fieldNEW_ITEM-CUST_FIELD5 Customer-specific field

The following tables show which fields of the RIHFCOM_XL structure are copied into thecorresponding target fields of the reservation (RESBD) or service row (ESLL) or operation(COMSRV). The mapping of HTML fields to SAP recipient structure fields is a default.

In the case of materialsSAP target f ield SAP receiver structure field HTML field

RESBD-MATNR RIHFCOM_XL-MATNR NEW_ITEM-MATNRRESBD-IDNLF RIHFCOM_XL-IDNLF NEW_ITEM-VENDORMATRESBD-POSTP RIHFCOM_XL-POSTPRESBD-POTX1 RIHFCOM_XL-KTEXT NEW_ITEM-DESCRIPTIONRESBD-WERKS RIHFCOM_XL-WERKSRESBD-BDMNG RIHFCOM_XL-MENGE NEW_ITEM-QUANTITYRESBD-MENGE RIHFCOM_XL-MENGE NEW_ITEM-QUANTITY

RESBD-ERFME RIHFCOM_XL-MEINH NEW_ITEM-UNITRESBD-EINHEIT RIHFCOM_XL-MEINH NEW_ITEM-UNITRESBD-LIFNR RIHFCOM_XL-FLIEF NEW_ITEM-VENDORRESBD-INFNR RIHFCOM_XL-INFNRRESBD-KONNR RIHFCOM_XL-CONTRACT NEW_ITEM-CONTRACTRESBD-KTPNR RIHFCOM_XL-CONTRACT_ITEMNEW_ITEM-CONTRACT_ITEMRESBD-MFRPN RIHFCOM_XL-MFRPN NEW_ITEM-MANUFACTMATRESBD-MFRNR RIHFCOM_XL-MFRNR NEW_ITEM-MANUFACTCODERESBD-LIFZT RIHFCOM_XL-LEADTIME NEW_ITEM-LEADTIMERESBD-MATKL RIHFCOM_XL-MATKL NEW_ITEM-MATGROUPRESBD-EKGRP RIHFCOM_XL-EKGRPRESBD-EKORG RIHFCOM_XL-EKORGRESBD-GPREIS RIHFCOM_XL-PREIS NEW_ITEM-PRICERESBD-PEINH RIHFCOM_XL-PEINH NEW_ITEM-PRICEUNIT

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 378

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



RESBD-SAKNR RIHFCOM_XL-SAKTORESBD-CATALOGID RIHFCOM_XL-CATALOGID

RESBD-CATALOG_PROD_ID RIHFCOM_XL-CATALOG_PROD_ID

In the case of services

SAP target f ie ld SAP receiver s tructure f ield

ESLL-SRVPOS RIHFCOM_XL-MATNR NEW_ITEM-MATNRESLL-KSTAR RIHFCOM_XL-SAKTOESLL-MENGE RIHFCOM_XL-MENGE NEW_ITEM-QUANTITYESLL-TBTWR RIHFCOM_XL-PREIS NEW_ITEM-PRICEESLL-PEINH RIHFCOM_XL-PEINH NEW_ITEM-PRICEUNITESLL-BRTWR RIHFCOM_XL-PREIS NEW_ITEM-PRICE

RIHFCOM_XL-WAERS NEW_ITEM-CURRENCYESLL-KTEXT1 RIHFCOM_XL-KTEXT NEW_ITEM-DESCRIPTIONESLL-MEINS RIHFCOM_XL-MEINH NEW_ITEM-UNITESLL-MATKL RIHFCOM_XL-MATKL NEW_ITEM-MATGROUPESLL-IWEIN RIHFCOM_XL-MEINH NEW_ITEM-UNITCOMSRV-KONNR RIHF COM_XL-CONTRACT NEW_ITEM-CONTRACTCOMSRV-KTPNR RIHFCOM_XL-CONTRACT_ITEM NEW_ITEM-CONTRACT_ITEM

RIHFCOM_XL-SERVICE NEW_ITEM-SERVICE

All the fields that can be set on the SAP page are defined in the RIHFCOM_XL structure(transaction SE11).

Note

If you use conversion modules (for example, for copying long texts), then here you must alsoenter the fields that are used in the conversion modules. For more information, see the IMGactivity Define conversion modules.

19.3.3.15.4 Convert HTML Field Values

Use

In this IMG activity you define with which SAP standard values the values from the catalog

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 379

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



can be overwritten.

Entries here are case-sensitive. If you want to use the catalog field valuesea and EA, you

must make a separate entry for each of them.

Example

For the HTML field NEW_ITEM_CURRENCY the value$ in HTML is overwritten withUSDin mySAP ERP.

19.3.3.15.5 Define Conversion Modules

Use

In this IMG activity you can define the conversion modules that are used to convert the datafrom the catalog into valid SAP values.

Standard settings

The following conversion modules are provided with the interface in the standard system.

Name Meaning

IOCI_CONVERT_INFO_REC_W Conversion of the catalog material number to an SAPmaterial number in accordance with the purchasing info record.

IOCI_CONVERT_MPM_W Conversion of the catalog material number into an SAP materialnumber in accordance with the manufacturer number.IOCI_CONVERT_OLD_MAT_NO_W Convert to existing material number using the "oldmaterial number" field.IOCI_DESCRIPTION_W Transfer of the catalog material number and the description to theSAP field of the short textIOCI_SET_POST_W Search of the item category in accordance with the Customizingsettings for the material typeIOCI_LONGTEXT_W Copying of the catalog long text to the material long text or theservice long textIOCI_EXAMPLE_W Template for the customer-specific conversion module

Activities

You can program other conversion modules yourself and adjust them to your requirements. Allthe conversion modules must have the same interface as the function module

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 380

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



IOCI_EXAMPLE_W.

To use the conversion modules supplied properly, in the IMG activity Convert HTML Fields to

SAP Fields in the columnSAP-Fld you must specify the following fields. You must fill themwith your desired catalog fields. The table below shows which field is used in which conversionmodule.

Conversion module SAP-Feld 1 SAP-Feld 2

IOCI_CONVERT_INFO_REC_W VENDOR VENDORMATIOCI_CONVERT_MPM_W VENDOR VENDORMATIOCI_CONVERT_OLD_MAT_NO_W MATERIAL -IOCI_DESCRIPTION_W MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONIOCI_EXAMPLE_W - -IOCI_LONGTEXT_W LONGTEXT -IOC I_SET_ITEM_CAT_W - -

19.3.3.16 List Editing

In this section, you can make the initial settings for lists and selection screens for single-leveland multi-level order lists.

19.3.3.16.1 Define List Variants


Procedure






When you choose selection fields, you reach an additional window, in which you must mark'Variant for all selection screens' .By choosing Continue , you reach another screen in which you can specify attributes for theselections fields.The attributes have the following meaning:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 381

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







Note









Note that the setting you make here for the field selection becomes a presetting, which is then

always used if the individual user has not defined their own field selection.For more information about working with lists, see "PM - Cross-Application Functions" in the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 382

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



SAP library.

19.3.3.16.2 Field Selection for Multilevel List Displays of Orders

In this step you maintain the default settings for the multi-level list display of orders.

Here you can configure

- the possible selection fields

- the actual values with which the selection fields are to be preset

Procedure

If you proceed, you will see the standard selection screen with all the fields defined by SAP.

You can preselect values for these fields.

Press ' Continue' to come to another mask in which you can assign particular attributes for theselection fields.


- Protected - The field is displayed on the selection mask but is not ready for input. Forexample, you have assigned a value to a document which is not to be changed by theuser.

- Suppressed - The field is suppressed on the selection mask and can therefore not be usedas a selection criterion.

- Variable - A variable is preselected for the field rather than an actual value.For example, the selection should always be executed over a certain planning interval, forexample, the current month. You would enter the variable ' Current month' in this case.This way, the current month would be proposed automatically as a selection criterion.

Note and RecommendationEvery user can create his own selection screen this way. The selection screen you have definedhere is proposed by the system only if no individual selection screen was defined for the userunder his user ID.

If you want to define an individual selection screen for each user and the user-specific selectionscreen should be automatically proposed every time the report is called, the report variant namemust start with 'U_USERNAME' .

Maintaining selection variants

If you call up this function, this will take you to a start screen containing all the selectionfields. Here you can define the standard selection screen. This selection screen will then beproposed whenever no individual selection screen was defined for the user under the name' U_USERNAME'. The name of the selection variant is always 'SAP_TCODE_XXXX'. XXXXstands for the corresponding application transaction.

Maintaining user-specific selection screens

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 383

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This function is not set using Customizing.The individual user maintains the user-specific variants by calling and executing individual

transactions.The user can call the ' Settings' function from the list and create his or her own selectionscreen there.The systems automatically generates the variant 'U_USERNAME' , which is always called up forthe user in subsequent transaction calls after saving.


In this step, you maintain the field selection for the multi-level order lists.


Maintenance order data

19.3.3.16.2.2 Define Field Selection for Sub-Order Data Fields

In this step, you maintain the field selection for multi-level order lists.


Sub-order fields


In this step you maintain the field selection for the multi-level order list.Field selection object



In this step you maintain the field selection for the multi-level order list.


Equipment data

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 384

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




In this step you make the field selection for the multi-level order list.


Notification data




Partner data

19.3.3.16.2.7 Define Field Selection for Operation Data Fields



Operation data

19.3.3.16.2.8 Define Field Selection for Component Data Fields



Component data

19.3.3.16.2.9 Define Field Selection for Confirmation Data Fields



Confirmation data

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 385

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.3.16.2.10 Define Field Selection for Production Resource/Tool DataFields



PRT data

19.3.3.16.2.11 Define Field Selection for Permit Data Fields

In this step you can define the field selection for the multi-level order list.


Permit data

19.3.3.16.2.12 Define Field Selection for Issued Permit Fields

In this step you can define the field selection for the multi-level order list.


Data for permits already issued

19.3.3.16.2.13 Define Field Selection for Goods Movement Fields

In this step you perform the field selection for the multi-level order list.


Goods movements data

19.3.3.16.2.14 Define Field Selection for Relationship Fields


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 386

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




Relationships data

19.3.3.16.2.15 Define Field Selection for Revenue and Costing Data Fields



Revenue and cost posting data

19.3.4 Completion Confirmations

In this section, you maintain the settings for the completion confirmations to maintenanceorders.

You only have to edit this menu option if you insert required completion confirmationoperations in the maintenance orders.

19.3.4.1 Define Control Parameters for Completion Confirmations

Use

In this work step, you maintain the control parameters for completion confirmations formaintenance- and service orders. You can set control parameters for each order type. Using thecompletion parameters you define:

- Which data is proposed for entry

- The severity with which inspections should be performed

- How the completion confirmation processes are controlled

To do this, you can proceed as follows:

- Default valuesYou can propose that completion confirmation data which is still open be entered. For theactivities, the SAP System then proposes the difference between the the specifications andthe values already confirmed. Otherwise, the default values are proposed each time ascompletion confirmation data.

- Display confirmed data/display specificationsFor information, you can display both the data already confirmed and the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 387

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



specifications.

- Default value final completion confirmationHere you can define whether a partial completion confirmation, a final completionconfirmation or a final completion confirmation with charging of open reservationsshould be proposed.

- Calculate activitiesHere you can define whether the actual work should be calculated automatically(taking into account the remaining work and the final completion confirmationindicator).

- ExampleYou have confirmed the following values for an operation:

Confrmtn Plnd work Act. work Rem. work Final confrmtn

1) 10 6 4 2) 10 X

If the indicator Calculate activities is set, 4 hours (the remaining work) is saved, if the indicator final completion confirmation is set.If the indicator is not set, the operation is finally confirmed for single entry of thefinal confirmation indicator, but no actual work is saved.

- InspectionsYou can use the inspections to define:

- What influence a QM results recording has on the completion confirmation

- Whether deadlines (for example, posting date, end of the implementation period etc.)may also be entered with a date, which lies further in the future than the time of entry.

- ControlThe features of the control keyProcess control are defined in another place inCustomizing. It controls the execution of the completion confirmation processes.

- Goods movementsYou can use the indicatorAll components to specify that all components which areassigned to the operation (this means not only retrograde components) are displayed in theoverview of the goods movements. However, if youdo not branch to the materialoverview for the completion confirmation, thenonly retrograde components continue tobe withdrawn .

- SelectionUnder selection, you define that for the implementation of completion confirmation

processes- confirmable and confirmed operations are also chosen.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 388

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- LogsYou can use the indicatorActual costs to define that the log is also displayed if thereare no error messages (only warning messages or information messages) available.You can also define that in the case of incorrect actual costs, a log is output and theconfirmation is then completely terminated.You can use the indicatorGoods movements to specify that an error log is displayed forincorrect items of the goods movements (for retrograde/unplanned withdrawals).Consequently, you can improve the items again before saving using the material overview.

- HR UpdateYou can use the indicatorNo HR update to activate the decoupling between HR and PM.

Activities

Define the parameter settings for the completion confirmations in your plant for the possibleorder types.

19.3.4.2 Define Causes for Variances

Use

In this work step you can define reasons or causes for deviations.

The definition of deviations can be plant-specific.

Example

You plan a duration of 5 hours for a particular operation. Because the necessary material wasnot available or a certain tool was defective, you could not complete the task within the timeoriginally planned.

In this situation, you could define reasons for deviation such as:

- 'Insufficient material' or

- 'Defective tool' .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 389

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.4.3 Define Execution Time for Confirmation Processes

Use

In this IMG activity you define parameters that specify when confirmation processes run. Youmust specify the order category for the key (10 PP production order, 20 network, 30maintenance order, 40 process order).

You can specify the execution time for the followingconfirmation processes :

- automatic goods receipt

- backflushing

- determination of actual costs

The following execution times are available:

- at once online

- a t once as an update- later in the background

Standard settings

In the standard settings there are no control profiles. That means that all confirmation processesrun online.

Use this function when you want to improve performance in the area of confirmations.

Activities

1. Create a key to control the confirmation process.

2. Assign this key to the desired order type by entering it in theProcess control field underDefine control parameters for confirmations .

3. Make sure that theParallelization type is defined under Parallelized confirmation processes for the processes that you want to parallelize.

4. Plan the background job for confirmation processes underPlan background job for confirmation processes (program CORUPROC). You can create variants for theindividual confirmation processes.

Further notes

For more information about the validity of IMG activities relating to the transactions forconfirmation entry, refer to Validity of IMG Activities for Confirmation .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 390

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.4.4 Parallelized Confirmation Processes

In this step you define how confirmation processes are parallelized. You must carry out thisstep to activate parallelization.

You identify the individual confirmation processes using:

- a confirmation process (goods movements, actual cost determination)

You make the following specifications on parallelization :

- Maximum number of work processes

- Name of a logon/server group

- Maximum number of items in material document (only for confirmation procedure goodsmovements)

Standard settings

Activities

1. Ascertain for which confirmation processes you must define the parallelization type.

2. Identify the confirmation processes.

3. Define the type of parallelization.

4.

Further notes

For information about the validity of IMG activities relating to the transactions for confirmationentry, refer to Validity of IMG Activities for Confirmation.

19.3.4.5 Schedule background jobs confirmation processes

Use this step to define parameters to control the processing of background jobs for materialwithdrawals, calculating actual costs and transfering data to Time Management duringconfirmations.

The materials will be withdrawn from stock once the background job has run, not when yousave the confirmation. You can use the background job to improve system performance.

Note

Please note, that when you withdraw materials using a background job, your stock level willnot be accurate until the background job has finished.

Define Background Job

You determine the following parameters for the background job:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 391

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- name of the background job

- priority of the background job (job class)

- computer on which the background job is executed- how many steps the background job is to contain (each step starts a further program.)

- whether the background job processesABAP/4 programs or external programs

- when and how often the background job should runThe SAP System provides the following selection options:

- ImmediatelyThe system starts the job right after it is released.

- DateYou can specify a date and a time at which you would like the job to be executed. If desired, you can also initiate an automatic repetition of the background job.

- After jobYou can specify the name of the job whose processing is to precede your job. Youcan also specify whether this "appendage" is to be status-dependent.The indicator status-dependent means that the second job is executed only, if thefirst one was completed successfully. This is useful if the second job depends on thefirst one.Example:1. Create analysis2. Print analysis

- After eventYou can specify an event at which you would like the job to be executed.Events are initialized by ABAP/4 programs and external programs and by the SAPSystem itself. An event is a signal that a certain status has been reached in the SAPSystem or in another program.With the start option after event , a "periodic" job is started again with eachoccurrence of a designated event.

Requirements

To print your list in the background, you have to have maintained all the print controlparameters in the stepDetermine print control .

Standard settings

A standard report is proposed in the standard system.

Activities

1. Enter the following parameters:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 392

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- job name

- class

- target host (if necessary)2. Press Start time in order to specify the start option you want for your job.

3. If you want to have your job processed periodically rather than just once, selectSchedule periodically .

4. In the window, select the repetition period that you would like for your job, for example,hourly or daily.

5. Press Steps to identify the program which is to be processed in the background.Press the ABAP key to schedule an ABAP/4 program. Enter the following specificationsfor the ABAP/4 program:

- name

- variant

- author ized userPress the External key to schedule an external program.

6. Enter the following specifications for the external program:

- name

- possible parameters

- target host for executing the external program

7. Save your background job.

19.3.4.6 Set Screen Templates for Completion Confirmation

Use

This step enables you to make your own combination of screen areas in the overall completionconfirmation.

You can define your own profile for each user.Each user can enter the required profile in their user settings for the overall completionconfirmation. To do this, the user selects the overall completion confirmation, choosesExtras -> Settings on the initial screen, and enters the required profile in the dialog box thatappears.

The data fields for the completion confirmation are grouped according to content. You can findthese groups again on the individual screens. This enables you to find a screen template for theheader data, which you can select as required.

You can assign the other confirmation objects to individual screen areas.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 393

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You can choose from five screen areas. A screen area consists of two parts. You can structurethe assignment of the following individual confirmation objects as required:

- Times for order operation- Services

- Goods movemement

- Causes of damage

- Measurement and counter readings

- Tasks

- Activities

You can also activate pushbuttons for the setting. This function enables you to reach lessfrequently used confirmation functions using pushbuttons.

Deactivated pushbuttons mean that this function is not allowed for this profile.

Standard settings

Check the standard system closely. It is recommended that only those confirmation objectswhich are used regularly by the user are included in the screen areas. Others objects can beactivated with a pushbutton when required.

Further notes

If you only want to fill one part of a screen area with a presetting, then this can only be onthe left-hand side of the screen. An incorrect configuration of the screen area is automaticallycorrected.

19.3.4.7 Set Field Selection for Completion Confirmation

In this step you can define the field selection for the confirmation.




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 394

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




- For the modifiable fields, use indicators to specify how the individual fields in the screen

are represented. You have the following options:- The field is ready for input (default setting)






- Influencing Fields

For the influencing fields, you specify how the modifiable screen is represented in thescreen, depending on a valueFor example, you define that the work center is a required entry for a certain order type.

Activities













________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 395

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________















19.3.4.8 Set List Editing for Confirmations Using Operation List


Procedure







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 396

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




The attributes have the following meaning:- Protected




Note









________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 397

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________





19.3.4.9 Set List Editing for Completion Confirmations


Procedure












Note

Each user can also create their own selection screen. The selection screen defined by you is

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 398

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



only then proposed by the system, if no individual selection screen has been defined for theuser under their user name.










19.3.5 Configuration Control

19.3.5.1 Make General Settings for Installation/Dismantling

Use

In this IMG activity you make settings for component installation and removal.

- For master batch updates during equipment removals, you can determine the message typeof the corresponding system message that appears on the screen before the update is savedin the equipment master.

- If you use the Business Add-In for reservation updates (BADI_CCM_FULLY_EQUI), youcan determine the message type of the corresponding system message that appears on thescreen before the update is saved.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 399

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- You can maintain default values for movement types and special stock types.

19.3.5.2 Determine Properties of Notifications for Installing and DismantlingParts

Use

In this IMG activity, you set the notification type of notifications that are displayed whencomponents are installed and removed.

You restrict the selection of the problem- and damage codes for notifications concerningremovals.

19.3.5.3 Define Attributes for System Messages

In this IMG activity, you can assign the desired message type for system messages. You canassign the types 'S', 'W', or 'E'.- If the message is of type 'W' (warning) or 'S' (success), the user can proceed.

- If the message is of type 'E' (error) the desired user action is not possible.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 400

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.5.4 Make General Settings for Interface to iPPE Workbench

In this step you maintain several settings for the allowed configuration and the configurationchecks within the 'Configuration Control' application.

- For the explosion of the Master Parts List (MPL), you can activate additional checks:

- If you want to perform a check on cancel part-relationships, set the correspondingflag.

- If you want to perform a check on set relationships, set the corresponding flag.

- Maintain a default class and class type for the check on cancel part-relationships.

- Maintain a characteristic for the check on cancel part-relationships.

- Maintain a default usage type in the iPPE for the relevant material.

19.3.6 Mobile Asset Management

19.3.6.1 Determine Order Processing

Use

In this IMG activity, you make settings for the order processing as well as the confirmatin onmobile end devices. These settings are compiled from the following profiles:

- Order profile

- Confirmation profile

- Accounting indicator profile

- Order type prof ile

- Control key prof ile

- Work center prof ile

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 401

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.6.2 Determine Notification Processing

Use

In this IMG activity you make settings for notification processing on mobile end devices.

You determine what selection variants for notification lists are used to select the notifications onthe mobile end device.

You can choose that only those notifications are selected that are defined in theNotification Types for Creation profile.

You also define the notification types that can be created on the mobile end device, as well as

the catalog profiles.

19.3.6.3 Assign Orders and Stocks to a Technician

Use

In this IMG activity, you define how orders, notifications, and stock are assigned to thetechnician.

19.3.6.4 Define scenario

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the possible Mobile Asset Management scenarios. An scenario

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 402

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



is composed of one part for business processes and one part for device settings.

Requirements

You have created order profiles, notification profiles, and assignment profiles in teh IMGactivity Define Order Processing.

Activities

1. Define your scenarios. Enter a value for the order profile, notification profile, andassignment profile.

2. Assign the scenarios in the Set User-Related Data IMG activity to a user.

19.3.6.5 Configure User-Dependent Data

Use

In this IMG activity, you can define individual settings for each user.

When the fields have been filled, the system loads the data for the user' s mobile end device inaccordance with the data defined here.

Example

If you enter 1000 as the work center, the system always loads the data for the user from thework center 1000.

19.3.6.6 Perform General Settings

Use

In this IMG activity, you define which data is transferred to the middleware through the SmartSynchronization.

One one screen you can restrict the master data selection through selection variants forfunctional locations, equipment, and measuring points. Through this you can significantly reducethe performance and the memory usage when loading the data to the middleware. Note,

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 403

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



however, that all the required data is actually selected, as otherwise this will not be availableon the mobile end device.

You can also deactivate the selection of contract data, installed equipment, measuring points,

and warranties. You can also restrict the range of or completely switch off the history of thelast notifications and orders created.

On a second screen you can replace each standard method of the Synchronization BusinessObject (SyncBO) through your own internal Business Add-Ins (BAdIs). For further informationon the standard methods, see the documentation onMobile Asset Management .

Standard settings

In the standard, all the master data fields are selected and all the standard methods are active.

19.3.6.7 Define Trigger of Push Messages

Use

You can use this IMG activity to make the following settings:

- You define which order types trigger the push message. In doing this, you mustsimultaneously select the priorities.

- You define which notification types trigger the push message. In doing this, you mustsimultaneously select the priorities.

- You must specify the RFC connection to the system on which the alert management runs.

19.3.6.8 Define Profile for Template Equipment

Use

In this IMG activity you determine the settings for creating equipment on mobile devices.

You determine profiles for template equipment and specify the equipment number that is to beused as a template. You can assign the profile to a MAM scenario.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 404

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You can also specify an equipment type that is used to create new equipment in the back endif the equipment type is not provided by the front end.

Activities

Specify the profiles and assign them to a MAM-Szenario.

19.3.6.9 Define Settings for Multilanguage Support

Use

In this IMG activity you specify the languages that you want to use on mobile devices. Choosethe language that is used by most users as the default language.

Note

Make sure that the settings that you specify here correspond to the middleware Customizingsetting.

19.3.6.10 Business Add-Ins

19.3.6.10.1 BAdI: Notification

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit notification data.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 405

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.6.10.2 BAdI: Order and Operation Data

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data for orders and operations.

19.3.6.10.3 BAdI: Time Confirmation

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data related to time confirmation.

19.3.6.10.4 BAdI: Material Confirmation

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data for the material confirmation.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 406

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.6.10.5 BAdI: Code Catalogs

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data for code catalogs.

19.3.6.10.6 BAdI: Catalog Profiles

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data in catalog profiles.

19.3.6.10.7 BAdI: Code Groups

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit code groups.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 407

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.6.10.8 BAdI: Functional Location

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data for functional locations.

19.3.6.10.9 BAdI: Equipment

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit equipment data.

19.3.6.10.10 BAdI: Measurement Document

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data for measurement documents.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 408

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.6.10.11 BAdI: Measuring Point

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data for measuring points.

19.3.6.10.12 BAdI: Partner Data

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit partner data.

19.3.6.10.13 BAdI: Signature Recording

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management . You can use thisBAdI to edit the data for signature recording.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 409

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.6.10.14 BAdI: User Data

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit user data.

19.3.6.10.15 BAdI: Scenario-Specific Customizing

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit data for scenario-specific Customizing.

19.3.6.10.16 BAdI: Determination of Push Data

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to determine recipients before you send push messages.

The methods refer to order or notification data. You can influence the system response asfollows:

- You can determine if push messages are to be sent.

- You can determine if the dialog box for selection is to appear.

- You can determine whether or not it is possible to perform multiple selection in the dialogbox.

- You can determine individual recipients.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 410

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.3.6.10.17 BAdI: Back-End Controlled Replication

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. It iscalled just before the middleware is called in the case of backend-controlled replication.

19.3.6.10.18 BAdI: User Data Enhancement

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. ThisBAdI is always called if data about a user is required in the backend. This means thatCustomizing settings for the user can be adapted using a program.

19.3.6.10.19 BAdI: Classification Data

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to edit classification data.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 411

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

After calling up the IMG activity, a dialog box appears, in which you can enter a name for theimplementation.If you have already made other implementations for this BAdI, another dialog box appears, inwhich the existing implementations are displayed. In this case, chooseCreate , and proceed asfollows:

1. In the dialog box, enter a name for the BAdI implementation in theImplementation field,and choose Create .The screen for creating BAdI implementations is now displayed.

2. Enter a short text for the implementation in theShort text for implementation field.

3. From the tab index, chooseInterface .The Name of implemented class field is already filled on the tab page, as a class namewas automatically assigned to the implementation when you named it.

4. Save your entries, and assign the implementation to a development class.

5. Place the cursor on the method, and double-click to enter method processing.6. Enter the code for the implementation between the statementsmethod <Interface

name> ~ <Name of method> and endmethod .

7. Save and implement your code. Return to theEdit Implementation screen.

8. Save the entries on theEdit Implementation screen.Note: You can also create an implementation, and then activate it at a later time. In sucha case, end the processing stage at this point.

9. Choose Activate The code you stored in the method will be run when the application program is executed.

19.3.6.10.20 BAdI: Address Data for Equipment

Use

This Business Add-in (BAdI) is used in theMobile Asset Management component. You canuse this BAdI to create address data when creating equipment.

Activities

After calling up the IMG activity, a dialog box appears, in which you can enter a name for the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 412

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



implementation.

If you have already made other implementations for this BAdI, another dialog box appears, inwhich the existing implementations are displayed. In this case, chooseCreate , and proceed asfollows:





5. Place the cursor on the method, and double-click to enter method processing.

6. Enter the code for the implementation between the statementsmethod <Interfacename> ~ <Name of method> and endmethod .

7. Save and implement your code. Return to theEdit Implementation screen.8. Save the entries on theEdit Implementation screen.

Note: You can also create an implementation, and then activate it at a later time. In sucha case, end the processing stage at this point.


19.4 Information Systems for Plant Maintenance and CustomerService

In this section, you make the PM-specific settings for the Logistics Information System.

19.4.1 Define Currency for Maintenance Statistics

In this step, you can define in which currency plant maintenance statistical data is managed.

The following points are to be considered when defining the currency for the maintenancestatistics.

- The currency chosen applies to the entire client.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 413

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- All of the fields in Plant Maintenance that are currency-dependent and are used forstatistical data are translated automatically into the currency for statistics.The date with which the exchange rate is calculated is field-related and determined by thesystem, and cannot be changed. The equipment acquisition date is taken as a basis fortranslating the acquisition value and the posting date of the individual order documents istaken as a basis for translating the value fields of a maintenance order.

Recommendation

You should define a currency for statistics. If you do not work with a currency for statistics,all value fields of the Plant Maintenance System are stored in the currency of the originaldocument or master record. This results in different currencies also being stored in the statisticsfile.

For this reason, analyses of currency fields in the statistics file no longer make sense, since acurrency translation is not carried out with the analyses and, as a result, value fields withdifferent currencies are added together.

Note on changing the currency for statistics

Changing the currency for statistics is also generally possible even if records have already beennstored in the statistics file.

However, this means that the currency fields in the information structures of the statistics filemust be set up again.

You can set up the statistics file again with report ' RIPMS001'. This, however, is onlynecessary if statistical data already exists and the currency for statistics has been changed.

19.4.2 Assign Value Categories to Maintenance Cost Key Figures

In this section, you can allocate value categories to PM cost key figures predefined by SAP.

The value category generally groups several cost element accounts together.For the PM key figure system, you can again aggregate several value categories under one PMcost key figure.

You can allocate one or more value categories to each PM cost key figure using the settings.

Which value categories are grouped together under which key figure depends on your chart of accounts.

Recommendation

You should make sure that the correct allocations are made when starting your productionsystem, since subsequent changes to the allocation influence the updating of the key figures,which may possibly require you to spend time setting up the key figure system again.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 414

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Note

In maintenance order Customizing, you will find a separate step in which you can define thedefault value categories for historical orders.

To ensure the cost key figure comparability between historical orders and orders entered in theSAP System, you should use the same value categories both for orders entered in the SAPSystem and for historical orders.

19.4.3 Customer-Specific Key Figures

In this section, you can make the settings for internal key figures.

Note that there is comprehensive online documentation for this.

19.4.3.1 Define Customer-Specific Key FiguresThis setting provides you with the option of defining internal key figures for costs within thePlant Maintenance Information System or Customer Service Information System, and updatinginformation about quantities and costs according to your own criteria.

In the standard system, the costs are represented using the following key figures:

- Planned total costs

- Actual total costs

- Internal wage costs

- Internal material costs

- External wage costs

- External material costs- Ser vice costs

- Miscellaneous costs

You can define which costs are reperesented in which key figure using the value categories orthe assignment of cost elements to value categories.

Internal key figures for costs

You can use this setting to update key figures for costs you have defined in informationstructures you have defined.

Example

In the area of service, it could be that you want to split the costs of a material usageaccording to various criteria because a part of the material costs:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 415

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Should be bil led

- Comes under goodwill and is not billed

You would have the same value category in both cases since the same cost element was usedfor material costs, but you might determine different key figures for the cost statistics using theaccounting indicator when updating.

You might use this setting to represent the extent of material costs for goodwill services in akey figure using the information system.

Analogous key figures are also possible, of course, for other costs.

Requirements

You should know the standard evaluations and key figures.

You should have set the value categories.

19.4.3.2 Value Categories and/or Accounting Indicators for Internal KeyFigures

In this section, you can assign value categories and/or accounting indicators to your own keyfigures.

You can also use '*' entries for the value category and accounting indicator.

This means that your own key figure is updated by collective value categories and/or accounting

indicators.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 416

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.4.4 Configure Measurement Document Update

Use

In this IMG activity you can make settings for updating measurement documents with vehicleconsumption data into the Plant Maintenance Information System.

When saving a measurementdocument, up to four key figures are updated to a technical object:One each from the dimension time, distance, fuel mass and - volume.

Measurement documents, which were created by transferring the counter readings, are notconsidered during the update.

Further performance key figures, such as fuel volume for distance traveled or for operatinghour, can be calculated from the key figures.

ExampleIn Germany the consumption per distance traveled is specified using liter/100km while inthe USA the unit miles/gallon is used for the corresponding key figure.

In the case of the example you can use a function module to calculate this key figure. Thefunction module performs different calculations depending on the system ofunits. Alternatively,you can define an individual function module for this indicator in every system of units.

For the measurement document update you can make the following settings in the IMG activity:

- Which field in the communication structure MCIPMB should be used as the unit field forthe respective key figure.

- Whether the key figure should be updated or calculated dynamically for the analysis period.For updated key figures the sort field PSORT is used to create a link to the measuringpoint of the respective reference object. It determines which target unit should have a keyfigure in the respective system of units.For dynamically calculated indicators you can decide between data enhancement or listenhancement.

19.5 Maintenance Roles

19.5.1 Confirmation

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 417

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.5.1.1 Define Confirmation Layouts

Use

In this process step, you define how the confirmation is displayed in the portal.

- Define Layout :Here you create a description and an ID for the layout.

- Assign Components :Here you define for the chosen layout which Web Dynpro components are displayed inwhich order on the confirmation screen in the portal.

Standard settings

The Web Dynpro Component column contains the Web Dynpro components that haveimplemented the interface RMAN_PRSPCONFIF_COMP for selection. These components comefrom the following roles:- Maintenance Technician

- Quali ty Inspector

- Production Supervisor

If you do not make any entries, the system uses the following settings:

Sequence Component Description

1 RMAN_PRSPCONFHEADER_COMP ConfirmationHeader Data2 RMAN_PRSPCONFACTIV_COMP Activities3 RMAN_PRSPCONFBUTTON_COMP Application Toolbar

Overall Completion Confirmation in Maintenance Technician Role:Sequence Component Description

1 RMAN_PRSPCONFHEADER_COMP ConfirmationHeader Data2 RMAN_PRSPCONFACTIV_COMP Activities3 RMAN_PRSPCONFGM_COMP Goods Movement4 RPLM_QIMT_NOTIF_COMP Generic Messages5 RMAN_PRSPCONFBUTTON_COMP Application Toolbar

Confirmation in Quality Inspector Role :


1 RMAN_PRSPCONFHEADER_COMP ConfirmationHeader Data2 RMAN_PRSPCONFQUANT_COMPConfirmation Quantity

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 418

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



3 RMAN_PRSPCONFACTIV_COMP Activities4 RPLM_QIMT_DEFECT_COMP Defects Recording5 RPLM_QIREC_RESULT_COMP Results Recording

6 RMAN_PRSPCONFBUTTON_COMP Application ToolbarConfirmation for Production Supervisor :


1 RMAN_PRSPCONFHEADER_COMP ConfirmationHeader Data2 RMAN_PRSPCONFQUANT_COMPConfirmation Quantity3 RMAN_PRSPCONFACTIV_COMP Activities4 RMAN_PRSPCONFGM_COMP Goods Movements5 RMAN_PRSPCONFBUTTON_COMP Application Toolbar

If you are using documentary batches, you must switch on the Web Dynpro componentRMAN_PRSPCONFGM_COMP for the production supervisor.

The following combinations of role and Web Dynpro components are not allowed:- Time Confirmation for Maintenance Technician:

- RPLM_QIMT_NOTIF_COMP

- RMAN_PRSPCONFQUANT_COMP

- RMAN_PRSPCONFGM_COMP

- RPLM_QI_REC_ESUSLTS_COMP

- RPLM_QIMT_DEFECT_COMP

- Overall Completion Confirmation for Maintenance Technician:

- RMAN_PRSPCONFQUANT_COMP

- RPLM_QI_REC_RESULTS_COMP

- RPLM_QIMT_DEFECT_COMP- Confirmation for Quality Inspector:

- RMAN_PRSPCONFGM_COMP


- Confirmation for Production Supervisor:

- RPLM_QI_REC_RESULT_COMP


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 419

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.5.1.2 Assign Layouts to Plant/Order Type

Use

In this process step, you assign a combination of plant, order type, and role to the confirmationlayout defined in the IMG activity Define Confirmation Layouts.

19.5.2 Reporting

19.5.2.1 Compile Report List

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the applications (links to reports, transactions, URLs) for theLaunchpad iView .

For additional information, see the SAP Library underSAP ERP Central Component ->Business Packages/Functional Packages -> Business Package for Common Parts ->Launchpad .

Requirements

Standard settings

Activities

1. Select the top node if this has not already been selected. When you do this, otherpushbuttons are displayed.

2. You can assign all applications directly to the top node. Alternatively, you can group thelaunchpad by creating new folders. The folders are used in the portal as headers for thelinks to the applications.Choose New Folder . Enter a text for the new folder, and chooseEnter . The folder isadded below the top node.

3. To create applications, select the top node or the folder to which you want to assign the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 420

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System



applications, and chooseNew Application .

4. Enter the required data.

5. Select the application category. Depending on your selection additional input fields aredisplayed, which you can use to specify or select the parameters of the application.

6. If you want to enter a description that is displayed in the portal under the link but is tobe longer than 255 characters, chooseEditor for Description to the right of the fieldDescript..

7. Enter the System Alias (except for URL).

The inactive applications folder is used for collecting the applications that are available in theportal, but that you do not want to display. These applications are displayed in the portal in atable that the user can view when he or she changes the launchpad settings.

Example

19.5.2.2 Transfer Default Values for LaunchPad

Use

You can use this report to prefill the LaunchPad for the role of the maintenance technician.

For more information, see the report documentation.

19.5.3 Business Add-Ins

19.5.3.1 Change URL Parameter

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the following roles:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 421

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System



- Quali ty inspector

- Maintenance technician

You use this BAdI to influence the URL parameters for calling BW queries and BW templates.

Requirements

The BW parameters in the BW report must exist.

19.5.3.2 Generate URLS for DMS Documents

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the following components:

- Plant Maintenance (PM)

- Customer Service (CS)

- Quality Management (QM)

You can use this BAdI to generate URLS on the Content Server to display DMS documents(CA-DMS) outside of the internal system landscape (such as Firewall).

See also:

Methods GET_URL - URL for Determine Checkout in the Web

Activities

After you call the IMG activity, the system displays a dialog box where you enter a name forthe implementation.

If implementations of this Business Add-In have already been created, the system displays themin a dialog box. You then choose one of them by choosingCreate , and continue as follows:

1. In the dialog box, enter a name for the implementation of the Add-In and chooseCreate .The system displays the initial screen for creating Business Add-In implementations.

2. On this screen, enter a short description for your implementation in the ImplementationShort Text field.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 422

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System



3. If you choose the Interface tab, you will notice that the system has populated the Name of the Implementing Class field automatically, by assigning a class name based on the nameof your implementation.

4. Save your entries and assign the Add-In to a package.5. To edit a method, double-click its name.

6. Enter your implementation code between themethod <Interface Name>~<Name ofMethod>. and endmethod. statements.

7. Save and activate your code. Navigate back to theChange Implementation screen.Note: You can also create an implementation for an Add-In and not activate it until later.If you want to do this, do not perform the following step:

8. Choose Activate .When the application program is executed, the code you created is run through.

19.6 System Enhancements and Data Transfer

19.6.1 Develop Enhancements

The following standard enhancements are available for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service:

Area: Equipment

- IEQM0001 Additional checks when installing equipment at functional locations

- IEQM0002 Additional checks when defining equipment hierarchies

- IEQM0003 Additional checks before updating equipment

- IEQM0004 Object permitted for contract partner (Order -> Maintenance contract)

- IEQM0005 Object permitted for SD contract (Maintenance contract -> Maintenancecontract)

- IEQM0006 Object permitted for SD contract (maintenance of maintenance contract)

- IEQM0007 Check/change to manufacturer field for equipment status

- IHCL0001 Create equipment with material template: Classes/Characteristics

- ILOM0002 Structural check and correction of location numbers

Area: Functional locations and reference functional locations

- ILOM0001 Additional checks before updating functional location

- ILOM0002 Structure check and correction of location numbers

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 423

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP System



Area: Technical Objects

- ITOB0001 Include subscreen for master data of technical objects

- ITOB0002 Field changes to copy template

Area: Fleet Management

- ITOB0003 Include subscreen for fleet data

- ITOB0004 Fleet object identification data - checks

Area: Installation

- IB020001 Filter components

- IBPP0001 Filter components when generating from PP data

Area: Measuring points/measurement documents

- IMRC0001 User-specific processing for update- IMRC0002 Menu exit - measuring point

- IMRC0003 Menu exit - measurement document

- IMRC0004 Exit for standard checks for new measurement document

- IMRC0005 Exit in AUTHORITY_CHECK_IMPT for measuring point

Area: Serial numbers

- IQSM0001 Automatic serial number assignment

- IQSM0002 Check when copying object list

- IQSM0003 Customer exit for additional data

- IQSM0004 Customer exit after leaving serialization screen- IQSM0005 Customer exit in update

- IQSM0007 Customer exit for goods movements

- IQSM0008 Character string check

Area: Maintenance planning

- IPRM0002 Determinination of planned date information for maintenance plan

- IPRM0003 User fields: Maintenance plan

- IPRM0004 Maintenance plan/item: Customer check for "Save"

- IPRM0005 Determine offset for performance-based strategy plans

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 424

y ________________________ ____________________________ __________



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- IWO10006 Maintenance order: Exclusion of function codes through customer enhancements

- IWO10007 Maintenance order: Customer enhancement for permits in order

- IWO10008 Maintenance order: Determination of tax jurisdiction code

- IWO10009 Maintenance order: Customer check for "Saving"

- IWO10010 Maintenance order: Determination of WBS element

- IWO10011 Maintenance order: Component selection

- IWO10012 Maintenance order: Priority treatment on central header

- IWO10015 Maintenance order: F4 Help for user fields on operation

- IWO10016 Maintenance order: Check of operation user fields

- IWO10017 Determination of external order number by customer logic

- IWO10018 Maintenance order: User fields on order header

- IWO10020 Maintenance order: Automatic inclusion of task list

- IWO10021 Automatic task list transfer for order creation for notification

- IWO10022 Determine calendar from customer exit

- IWO10023 Service order: Changes to header data for advance shipment

- IWO10024 Service order: Changes to items for advance shipment

- IWO10025 Maintenance/service order: Determination of responsible cost center

- IWO10026 User check when setting status "Do not perform"

- IWO10027 Generate user-specific settlement rule

- IWO10029 Inclusion of bill of material in maintenance/service order

- IWO10030 Pre-filling the fields for the result object

- IWO10031 Hiding the employee number in the maintenance-/service order

- IWO10033 Customer-specific authorization check maintenance-/service order (triggered byBAdI IWO1_ORDER_BADI)

- IWO10034 Operation status based on the status of the capacity requirement

- COI20001 Change of persons determined

- COI20002 Alternative procurement of the employee availability data

- CYPP0001 Change of the sequential criteria and the sequential planning

- IWO20001 Maintenance order: Task list transfer in order

- ICSV0004 Check maintenance object and display object information

- CNEX0013 Maintenance order: Proposal for item category for component assignment

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 426

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- CNEX0026 Maintenance order: General check for material

- CNEX0027 Maintenance order: Determination of plant or storage location for component

- COZF0001 Maintenance order: Change purchase requisition for external operation- COZF0002 Maintenance order: Change purchase requisition for external component

Area: Maintenance order confirmations

- CONF0001: Deactivation of functions

- CONFPM01: Determine customer-specific default values

- CONFPM02: Customer-specific entry checks 1

- CONFPM03: Customer-specific check by operation selection

- CONFPM04: Customer-specific entry checks 2

- CONFPM05: Customer-specific additions when saving

- CMFU0001: Determine customer-specific screen layout- CMFU0002: Set parameters for time confirmation and goods movements

Area: CATS

- CATS0001: Structure of worklist

- CATS0002: Enhancement of data entered

- CATS0003: Verification of data entered

- CATS0004: Deactivate functions in the interface

- CATS0005: Customer field enhancements

- CATS0006: Verification of overall time sheet

- CATS0007: Subscreen on initial screen- CATS0008: Determination of workflow recipients for permit

- CATS0009: Individual customer text fields on entry screen

Area: Warranties

- BG000001 Warranty check

- BG000002 Warranty check - dialog box

- BG000003 Change of warranty check result - subscreen

Area: Partners

- ICSV0001 Display of geographical location data

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 427

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- ICSV0003 Partner selection

- ICSV0007 Partner transfer of serial numbers for goods issue and returns

- ICSV0008 Verification of additional partner types

- IEQM0004 Object permitted for contract partner (Order -> Maintenance contract)

- IEQM0005 Object permitted for SD contract (Maintenance contract -> Maintenancecontract)

- IEQM0006 Object permitted for SD contract (maintenance of maintenance contract)

- IICRP0201 Search help CS_ORG_02: Authorization check

- IICRP0202 Search help CS_ORG_02: Self-programmed selection

- IICRP0203 Search help CS_ORG_02: Propose task

Area: Quotation creation and resource-related billing

- SIMG_OLPR_USERFAKTUR Enhancements for quotation creation and billing

- ICSV0005 Determination of reason for rejection for resource-related billing

- KSDIEX01 Influence of creation of quantity structure for resource-related billing beforeRelease 4.5A

Area: Information Systems

- MCI10001 PMIS/QMIS update

Area: General

- IWMI0001 Customer exit for CS/PM-IDocs

- IMSMCOMM Customer exit for MSM communication

Activities

1. Either create a new project or use an existing project and then enter the enhancement.

2. Activate the project.Your enhancement only takes effect when activated.

Further notes

Enhancements - in contrast to modifications - can be released, since they are not made in the

original SAP system, but in a name range that is reserved for the customer.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 428

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You can find the general procedure for creating enhancements in the enhancement transactionunder Goto -> Online manual .

Each customer exit itself is documented. You can find this documentation using "Displaydocumentation" in the activityDevelop enhancements .

19.6.2 Business Add-Ins

In this section, you can set up business add-ins for orders.

19.6.2.1 BADI: Equipment Master Data

Use

You can use this

Business Add-In (BAdI) after saving a piece of equipment to implement further processing of your choice to the corresponding master data. An example of this is data transfer to externalsystems.

Documentation for methods: IN_UPDATE

Standard settings

The BAdI is not active in the standard system.

The BAdI cannot be used multiple times.

Activities

19.6.2.2 Configuration Control

19.6.2.2.1 BAdI: Adjust the Configuration Check Result by Technical Object

Use

You can use this Business Add-In (BAdi) to change the check result for configuration control.In this transaction, a configuration control is performed between elements of the actualconfiguration and (if available) elements of the allowed configuration. These elements are:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 429

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Equipment


- Structure gap

- iPPE st ructure node

The configuration check does not examine the validity of the individual elements. However itdoes examine whether the elements that belong together (that is, those that are part of a ' checkgroup' ) also fit together.

You could use this BAdI as an additional check of the individual objects that belong to a checkgroup. A check status may be derived individually for each type of element. As a result thecheck status of the configuration check in the Configuration Manager changes (a higher statusoverrules a lower status).

Example

The system or user status of an equipment might change the status .

19.6.2.2.2 BAdI: Restrict Structure Explosion of Actual Configuration

Use

You use this Business Add-In (BAdI) to restrict the loading of a technical object's actualconfiguration in the configuration control workbench. This means that you can define your ownlogic to filter technical objects like equipments, or functional locations.

If an implementation of this BAdI is active, two buttons appear in the loading area of the userinterface instead of one:

- If you choose Load , the system loads the filtered configuration.

- If you choose Load (extended), the system loads the complete actual configuration. TheBAdI methods SGAP_CHECK, EQUI_CHECK, and FLOC_CHECK are not called.

If you use all functions integrated in the configuration control workbench and you havemaintained the object's master par ts list (MPL) (based on iPPE nodes) for a configurationcheck, you should use this BAdI in conjunction with the BAdI BADI_CCM_EXPL_ALWD.BAdI BADI_CCM_EXPL_ALWD allows you to restrict the explosion of the allowedconfiguration.

SAP provides the following methods:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 430

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- EQUI_CHECKChecks the current equipment using parameters IV_EQUNR (equipment key),IV_AS_MAINTND_CONFIG (handle for the actual configuration) and IV_ITOB (details of technical object). By setting exception NOT_FOUND you can disable the loading of the

current equipment.

- FLOC_CHECKChecks the current functional location using parameters IV_TPLNR (functional locationkey), IV_AS_MAINTND_CONFIG (handle to the actual configuration) and IV_ITOB(details of technical object). By setting the exception NOT_FOUND you can disable theloading of the current equipment.

- SGAP_CHECKChecks the current structure gap using parameters IS_GAP_DATA (details of the structuregap) and IV_AS_MAINTND_CONFIG (handle for the actual configuration). By setting theexception NOT_FOUND you can disable the loading of the current equipment.

- CONFIG_CHECK_FILTER_ELEMENTSThis method is obsolete. Instead of this method, a method of BAdIBADI_CCM_EXPL_ALWD with the same name is called after the actual and the allowedconfiguration have already been loaded. It enables you to delete/add/change objects bychanging table CT_ACTUAL_ELEMENTS for the actual configuration and tableCT_ALLOWED_ELEMENTS for the allowed configuration. This method is independent of user action (load completely or load partially).

SAP provides the following parameter:

- GV_BYPASS_BADIThis paramter is used to bypass any of the methods . The parameter is static and can beset from outside of BAdI methods using theCLASS cl_ex_badi_ccm_explosion DEFINITIONLOAD statement and by setting 'X' tocl_ex_badi_ccm_explosion= > if_ex_badi_ccm_explosion~ gv_lbypass_badi. If animplementation of this BAdI is active (see also above), the parameter is set to ' X' if theuser chooses the Load (extended) button.

Standard settings

No standard implementation.Empty BAdI is provided.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 431



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This paramter is used to bypass any of the methods. The parameter is static and can beset from outside of BAdI methods using the CLASS cl_ex_badi_ccm_expl_alwdDEFINITION LOAD statement and by setting ' X' tocl_ex_badi_ccm_expl_alwd= > if_ex_badi_ccm_expl_alwd~ gv_lbypass_badi. If animplementation of this BAdI is active (see also above), the parameter is set to ' X' if theuser chooses the Load (Extended) button.

Requirements

If the method CONFIG_CHECK_FILTER_ELEMENTS is empty, use this BAdI in conjunctionwith BAdI BADI_CCM_EXPLOSION, which enables you to restrict the loading of the object' sactual configuration.

Activities

If you want to use the SAP implementation of this BAdI, you have to activate it first.

19.6.2.2.4 BAdI: Convert Function Identifier (FID)

Use

You use this Business Add-In (BAdI) within the configuration control component. One possibleaspect is the interaction between the actual configuration (based on the functional location,equipment, structure gaps) and the allowed configuration (based on product variation structurenodes). A shared field, the function identifier (FID), enables this interaction.

You can maintain a default FID in the equipment master in the field named ' functionidentifier' . You can overr ule the default by using this BAdI. In the product structure thefunction identifier is identical to the iPPE node name. You can also change this default here.

Four methods are provided:

- GET_FID_TO_MAINTENANCE_OBJECTGet the FID from an equipment

- GET_MAINTENANCE_OBJECT_TO_FIDSearch all equipments for a particular FID

- GET_FID_TO_NODE

Get the FID from an iPPE node

- GET_NODE_TO_FID

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 433

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Search all iPPE nodes for a given FID

19.6.2.2.5 BAdI: Perform Quantity Check

Use

You use this Business Add-In (BAdI) to execute a quantity check within the overall

configuration check in transaction CCM2 (configuration control workbench). You can implementyour own logic for the check.

If an implementation of this BAdI is active, the quantity check is executed. SAP provides adefault implementation.

If you do not want to execute the quantity check, you can create your own implementation withempty body method CONFIG_CHECK_QUANTITY and activate it.

If the quantity check for any reason is not executed, a customizeable message can be displayedin the application log.


- CONFIG_CHECK_QUANTITYBased on the input IT_ACTUAL_GROUP (objects of the actual configuration grouped byfunction identifier (FID)), IT_ALLOWED_GROUP (MPL nodes grouped by FID) ,IV_FUNCID (FID group), and IV_PART_VALIDITY_ERROR (reports if there is anyvalidity error for this FID group), the ET_QTY_MESSAGES (table of quantity-checkrelated messages) is created.

- GET_OBJECT_IDPrivate BAdI method to get the identification (name) of the parent object of the object tobe checked. It is used to create a corresponding message in the application log.

Standard settings

SAP provides a default implementation.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 434

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

- To deactivate the quantity check, the following code has to be implemented in the methodCONFIG_CHECK_QUANTITY:

- method if_ex_badi_ccm_qty_check~ config_check_quantity.endmethod.

- method if_ex_badi_ccm_qty_check~ config_check_quantity. raise qty_check_not_performed.endmethod.

In the second case the message is passed to the application log.

- To display a customizeable message in the application log in case the quantity check is notactive (empty implementation), SAP recommends to insert the following code in the methodCONFIG_CHECK_QUANTITY:raise qty_check_not_performed.

19.6.2.2.6 BAdI: Define Customer-Specific Checks within OverallConfiguration Check

Use

You use this Business Add-In (BAdI) to implement a customer-specific check within the overallconfiguration check in the configuration control workbench.

You can define your own logic for the check. If an implementation of this BAdI is active, thecheck implemented is executed as part of the overall configuration check.


- CONFIG_CHECK_CUSTRThis check is executed together with a validity check of the currently investigated part.Entries:

- IV_FUNCID (FID group),

- IV_MATNR (material number of the equipment to be checked),

- IS_ITOB (data of the equipment to be checked),

- IR_EQUI (reference of the equipment to be checked),

- IS_HOLEDATA (data of the structure gap to be checked),

- IR_HOLE (reference of the structure to be checked),

- IT_VALID_PARTS (table with all valid parts corresponding to the MPL node against

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 435

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



which the equipment or structure gap is checked), and

- IR_MPL_NODE (reference of the MPL_NODE),Based on these entries, the method returns either ET_QTY_MESSAGES (table withmessages for customer-specific check), or, if only one message was output, the method fills

the attributes of the message (message type EV_MSGTY, message number EV_MSGNO,message id EV_MSGID and message variables EV_MSG1, EV_MSG2, EV_MSG3,EV_MSG4).

- PRE_VALIDITY_CHECK_CUSTRThis check is executed before the validity check of the relevant part .Entries:

- IT_ACTUAL_GROUP (objects of the actual configuration grouped by functionidentifier (FID)),

- IT_ALLOWED_GROUP (MPL nodes grouped by FID) ,

- IV_FUNCID (FID group),Based on these entries the ET_CUSTR_MESSAGES (table of messages forcustomer-specific check) is created. By setting the exporting parameterEV_PART_VALIDITY_ERROR to 'X' you can suppress the execution of standard check on

validity of the currently investigated part.- POST_VALIDITY_CHECK_CUSTR

This check is executed after the validity check of the relevant part.Entries:

- IT_ACTUAL_GROUP (objects of the actual configuration grouped by functionidentifier (FID)),

- IT_ALLOWED_GROUP (MPL nodes grouped by FID) ,

- IV_FUNCID (FID group),Based on these entries the ET_CUSTR_MESSAGES (table of messages forcustomer-specific check) is created.

Standard settings

Empty BAdI is provided.

Activities

- Implement your own customer-specific logic and activate the implementation.

- If you do not want to execute this specific check, create your own implementation withempty body method CONFIG_CHECK_CUSTR and activate it.

Example

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 436

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.2.7 BAdI: Adjust Message Type According to Configuration CheckTypes

Use

You use this BAdI to change the message type of system messages displayed in the applicationlog for configuration checks. This is necessary because particular messages can have differentmeanings for the different checks types (for a partial check, a message could mean an error,whereas the same message could merely be a warning for an extended check). In this case, theCustomizing settings are not sufficient. Customizing does not distinguish between the differentcheck types, but it determines the importance of the message for the customer (for somecustomers a structure gap signifies an error, but not for others).

SAP provides the following method:

- CHANGE_MESSAGE_TYPEBased on the input CS_MESSAGE the type of any customizeable message CS_MESSAGE(changing parameter) can be changed within this method.

Requirements

For partial configuration checks you use this BAdI together with BAdIBADI_CCM_EXPL_ALWD. BAdI BADI_CCM_EXPL_ALWD contains the parameterGV_BYPASS_BADI which carries the information whether a partial (parameter is blank) orcomplete configuration check (parameter is set to 'X' ) has been executed.

Standard settings

No standard setup. Empty BAdI is provided.

Example

If you want to change the message type for messages that are raised during the partialconfiguration check, use the following code in front of your own code:

method IF_EX_BADI_CCM_EXPL_ALWD~ CONFIG_CHECK_FILTER_ELEMENTS .

class cl_ex_badi_ccm_expl_alwd definition load. check cl_ex_badi_ccm_expl_alwd= > if_ex_badi_ccm_expl_alwd~ gv_bypass_badi is initial.

endmethod.

Consequently, the method is only executed when the user has reqested the partial configurationcheck.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 437

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.2.8 BAdI: Create Logs for Multiple Configuration Checks

Use

You use this Business Add-In (BAdI) to display a multiple check result in the application log(configuration check protocol) within the configuration control workbench.

If this BAdI is active:

- The application log shows a check result, where all parts are checked, for every iPPEproduct class involved in the MPL explosion and the check results are structured byproduct class. If a part belongs to more than one iPPE product class, it is checked againstthe iPPE product class selected by the user in the "Configuration Check" area. If a partbelongs only to one iPPE product class, then this part is always checked against thatproduct class.

- An additional overall check result is displayed where the relevant technical object(equipment or structure gap) to be checked is compared against all MPL nodes that havethe same function identifier (FID) but a different iPPE product class.

SAP provides the inactive implementation BADI_CCM_MULTI_LOG. If you want to use thisimplementation, you must activate it first.

SAP provides the following method:

- CHECK_WITH_MULTIPLE_RESULTExecutes as many configuration checks as product classes are involved in the MPLexplosion.

SAP provides the following parameter:

- GV_BYPASS_BADIThe paramter is static and can be set from outside of BAdI methods using the classCL_EX_BAdI_CCM_MULTI_LOG DEFINITION LOAD statement and by setting ' X' inCL_EX_BADI_CCM_MULTI_LOG= > IF_EX_BADI_CCM_MULTI_LOG~ GV_LBYPASS_BADI. If an implementation of this BAdI is active (see also above), the parameter is set to' X' and is evaluated outside the BAdI method.

Activities

If you want to use the multiple check log, you must activate the inactive SAP implementationBADI_CCM_MULTI_LOG.

Example

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 438

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.2.9 BAdI: Check Part Condition at Installation

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used for the implementation of the stock checks. As importingparameter you receive the material, serial number to be installed, and the MM document item.This includes the target stock data for the MM posting, such as plant, storage location, orbatch. The aim of this exit is to check whether the selected inventory unit has type' serviceable' (in the default implementation).

Example

The selected inventory movement issues the part from storage location UNSV. In ' RotablesManagement' Customizing you have defined that storage location UNSV should only be used forunserviceable parts. Therefore, this installation should not be allowed.

Requirements

Maintain a valid rotable inventory model in CMC profile 'SAP_01' . Furthermore, maintain thestorage locations or valuation types in the inventory group Customizing of ' RotablesManagement' (only if you work with inventory model storage locations or valuation types).

Standard settings

The default implementation uses the settings from Rotables Management Customizing to detectwhich inventory model you use (either storage location, batches, or split valuation) and, if possible, which units belong to which type. It then checks whether the movement data (item)that is used for the receipt posting uses a valid inventory unit (equals serviceable). If the partcondition of the MM document item is not 'serviceable' , a corresponding customizeable messageis stored in the application log. If the rotables management Customizing settings are notcomplete or are not valid, the check is skipped.

19.6.2.2.10 BAdI:Perform Stock Check for Part Condition When Dismantling

This BAdI is used to implement the inventory-based checks regarding the part conditions. Asimport parameter you receive the material, serial number to be removed, and the MM documentitem. This includes the target stock data for the MM posting, such as plant, storage location,or batch. The aim of this exit is to validate the selected inventory unit in comparison to theselected part condition.

Example

The user selects part condition "unserviceable" on the removal screen. Furthermore, the selected

inventory movement receives the part into storage location SRVC. In ' Rotables Management'

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 439

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Customizing you have defined that storage location SRVC should only be used for serviceableparts. Therefore, this removal should not be allowed.

Requirements

You must maintain a valid rotable inventory model in CMC profile ' SAP_01'. Furthermore,You must maintain the storage locations or valuation types in the inventory group Customizingof ' Rotables Management' (only if you work with inventory model storage locations or valuationtypes).

Standard settings

The default implementation uses the settings from ' Rotables Management' Customizing to detectwhich inventory model you use (either storage location, batches, or split valuation) and, if possible, which units belong to which type. It then checks whether the movement data (item)that is used for the receipt posting uses a valid inventory unit based on the desired target partcondtion (import parameter). If the MM document item does not fit to the target part condition,a corresponding customizeable message is stored in the application log. If the ' RotablesManagement' Customizing settings are not complete / valid, the check is skipped.

Recommendation

If you are using rotables management in your system you should not change the defaultimplementation.

19.6.2.3 Installation/Dismantling of Equipment

19.6.2.3.1 BAdI: Actions for Screen-Related Checks for IE4N

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) supports the user-designed flow logic before and after the mainscreen is output for transaction IE4N. For this you can use the following two methods:

- Customer PAI Logic

- Customer PBO Logic

Comment on the difference between the installation and removal mode:

You can control the mode by preassigning the fieldACTV in the structure CS_IWP4_COM.Choose Install for installations andRemove for removals.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 440

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

After calling up the IMG activity, a dialog box appears, in which you can enter a name for theimplementation.











19.6.2.3.2 BAdI: Customer-Specific Checks During Installation/Removal

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) uses user-defined logic to perform additional checks, withintransaction IE4N for the respective operation, that are not performed on the interface. Thismethod is called up using the method default coding of framework BAdIIERI_INST_REMO_CHECK.

Documentation for BAdI methods.

- Perform customer-specific checks for installation

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 441

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Perform customer-specific checks for removal

Notes

Implement checks to the interface using the BAdI IERI_DIALOG_CHECK.

Activities












________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 442

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.3.3 BAdI: Perform Checks During Installation/Dismantling

Use

This internal Business Add-In (BAdI) and its two methods work as a "framework BAdI" forthe IBUs' BAdI framework. This framework must also be represented in the core, therefore adefault coding is used here to call up both of the customer' s methods BAdIIERI_I_R_CUSTR_CHECK.

Thus, this BAdI simply acts as a call-up shell in the core for the customer BadIIERI_I_R_CUSTR_CHECK, while IBUs can attach additional BAdIs using their ownimplementations.

Documentation for BAdI methods:

- Performs All Checks at Removal

- Performs All Checks at Installation

Activities




2. Enter a short text for the implementation in theShort text for implementation field.3. From the tab index, chooseInterface .

The Name of implemented class field is already filled on the tab page, as a class namewas automatically assigned to the implementation when you named it.






________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 443

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




19.6.2.3.4 BAdI: Actions Before/After Saving (Database Update)

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) was designed for multiple uses within transaction IE4N. Thismeans that you can create several active implementations, which can all be processed. However,the processing sequence is not defined, therefore you cannot implement any interdependent steps.


- Actions before installation (database update)

- Actions before removal (database update)- Actions after installation (database update)

- Actions after removal (database update)

Activities








6. Enter the code for the implementation between the statementsmethod <Interface

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 444

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



name> ~ <Name of method> and endmethod .


8. Save the entries on theEdit Implementation screen.Note: You can also create an implementation, and then activate it at a later time. In such

a case, end the processing stage at this point.9. Choose Activate

The code you stored in the method will be run when the application program is executed.

19.6.2.3.5 BAdI: Exit for Mandatory Fields

Use

The functions Remove equipment from storage and install and Remove equipment and put it into storage ignore the mandatory fields that are defined for movement types inMaterials Management.

Both methods of this Business Add-In (BAdI) enable you to perform your own checks on themandatory fields. Calling up a dialog box is not always useful, and should be thoroughlychecked in individual cases.


- Check on mandatory fields in installation mode

- Check on mandatory fields in removal mode

Activities





3. From the tab index, chooseInterface .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 445

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The Name of implemented class field is already filled on the tab page, as a class namewas automatically assigned to the implementation when you named it.







19.6.2.3.6 BAdI: User-Specific Subscreen for Installation (802)

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) supports the tab pageCustomer data in the transaction IE4N inthe installation mode (subscreen 802). However, this tab page is only visible if there is anactive implementation for the existing BAdI.

To display the data desired, define your own subscreen, which you call up using theimplementation of the existing BAdIs. The first two methods are for data transports to and fromthe BAdI interface and are used exclusively in the SAP standard. Use the method with theprefix CUS_ for implementing your subscreen.

You can use both of these methods to perform the following functions:

- Display standard fields, which exist in the data structures of the interface but which werepreviously not shown

- Display and change customer-specific fields for these data structures (for example, appendstructures)

Your internal fields that are defined in the append structure must be defined in the followingstructures in order to be transported:

- IERI_APPEND_CUS_ITOB

- IERI_APPEND_CUS_RESB

- IERI_APPEND_CUS_MSEG

Include your append fields and use this include both in the append and in the respectivestructure above. "For field changes" you must set the corresponding structure indicator to ' X'

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 446

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



to guarantee the transport.

Comments on changes to structure RESB: As there is no posting of the RESB structurewithin transaction IE4N, you must subsequently post it using the BAdIIERI_INST_REMOV_SAVE.

Documentation for BAdI methods:- Transport data to the screen

- Transport data from the screen

- Datatransport from the screen for customer subscreen

- Data transport to the screen for customer subscreen

Activities












________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 447

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.3.7 BAdI: User-Specific Subscreen for Removal (801)

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) supports the tab pageCustomer data in the transaction IE4N inthe removal mode (subscreen 801). However, this tab page is only visible if there is an activeimplementation for the existing BAdI.

To display the data desired, define your own subscreen, which you call up using theimplementation of the existing BAdIs. The first two methods are for data transports to and fromthe BAdI interface and are used exclusively in the SAP standard. Use the method with theprefix CUS_ for implementing your subscreen.

You can use both of these methods to perform the following functions:

- Display standard fields, which exist in the data structures of the interface but which werepreviously not shown

- Display and change customer-specific fields for these data structures (for example, appendstructures)

Your internal fields that are defined in the append structure must be defined in the followingstructures in order to be transported:

- IERI_APPEND_CUS_ITOB

- IERI_APPEND_CUS_RESB

- IERI_APPEND_CUS_MSEG

Include your append fields and use this include both in the append and in the respectivestructure above. "For field changes" you must set the corresponding structure indicator to ' X'to guarantee the transport.

Comments on changes to structure RESB: As there is no posting of the RESB structurewithin transaction IE4N, you must subsequently post it using the BAdI

IERI_INST_REMOV_SAVE.Documentation for BAdI methods:

- Transport data to the screen

- Transport data from the screen

- Data transport from the screen for customer subscreen

- Data transport to the screen for customer subscreen

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 448

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities












19.6.2.3.8 BAdI: Activate MM Posting W/O Update of PM Structure onInstall./Dismantlng

This BAdI contains two methods to control the behaviour of the IE4N function:

- SWITCH_ERROR_HANDLE:This method must be used to activate the process 'material movement without PM update'for component installations and removals. If the user tries to install or remove a material(with or without serial number) for which no equipment exists, the system issues an errormessage and demands entry of an equipment number. Immediately prior to this check thisBAdI is called and allows you to change the behavior of the system.If you want to trigger the material movement process (receipt or issue of materialinto/from stock and notification creation, no PM integration) for certain materials, you canimplement this BAdI method and change the movement flag to 'X' .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 449

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- CHECK_MAT_UPD_REAB (new in DIMP 471):This method can be used to enable a direct change of material numbers in plannedreservations for component installations. This process is especially relevant if you use theA&D MPN functionality to define classes of interchangeable materials (according to theFFF class logic). Having implemented this process, it cannot be avoided that the originalplanned material number (documented in the reservation) sometimes deviates from the onethat is later procured and issued from stock ( installed ).Since it is technically impossible in transaction IE4N to post an installation with referenceto a reservation that has a different material number, the system would normally preventthe user from posting such an installation. An error message would appear on the screen.By means of a new IMG activity for IE4N (General Settings for Component Installationand Removal) , it is now possible to control the severity of this message. For example, itis possible to set it to "Warning" which would just issue a warning message on the screento inform the user about the situation but then would directly update the material numberwith the new one from the component to be installed.It is important to understand that once this function is activated (by setting the messageseverity to anything other than ' Error' ), the system always updates the reservation in thedatabase with the new material number without further user intervention. This happens assoon as a reservation is specified together with an equipment or material number thatdeviates from the original one in installation mode. Hence, independent of the installationprocess and even if the user decides later not to post the installation, the reservation isupdated with the new material number.

Requirements

If you want to use the material update function for reservations you need to allow this processin the IMG activity General Settings for Component Installation and Removal.

Standard settings

No default code for SWITCH_ERROR_HANDLE.

Default code for CHECK_MAT_UPD_REAB :

- Checks if the Customizing settings allow a reservation update in transaction IE4N.- Checks if the part to be installed is in the same FFF class as the original reserved part.

- Directly updates the material number in the reservation (immediate database update).

IMPORTANT : Using the default implementation, the system asks the user via popup if thematerial number of the reservation should be changed in the database or not. This is to ensurethat reservations are not changed by accident just if the user happens to make a typing mistake.

If the aim is that the user should have no control over the reservation update and everythingshould happen in the background then you could simply write an implementation (copy defaultcode) that does not send this popup to the screen.

Activities

If you do not want to use the default implementation, you must deactivate it. Alternatively, you

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 450

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



can write your own customer-specific implementation and activate it instead of the SAPimplementation.

19.6.2.3.9 BAdI: Get Data for Installation/Dismantling from Reference Order

Use

This BAdI is used for controlling the importing processing for the reference order in the"Installation/Removal with Simultaneous Goods Movement" function. TheReference Order fieldallows the user to enter a maintenance/service order that can provide additional information onthe context for the respective operation (equipment installation/removal). You can use this order,for example, to import data from a maintenance/service order and copy it to screen fields, if this information is available. For this, further activities in the PBO or PAI BAdI are required.You could also, for example, use the order as an instrument for customer-specific validations,for example, if equipment may only be installed in connection with particular order categories.This also requires other activities, such as implementing the BAdI for customer-specific checksfor the installation/removal.The BADI_CCM_ORDER_DATA BAdI contains only one method: GET_ORDER_DATA.

This should be used to fill the entire order structure CS_CAUFVD for a specified order number(CS_CAUFVD_AUFNR).

Requirements

You must specify a reference order. The order number is in the CS_CAUFVD_AUFNR field.

Standard settings

The standard system includes a default implementation that already imports an order from thedatabase. As a rule, you do not need to change this implementation. Only if you want tosupport deviating checks or data structures, that are not provided for in the standard system,should you write your own implementation to make the imports.

Activities

The BAdI is an optional component of the "Installation/Removal with Simultaneous GoodsMovement" function. If you do not use reference orders, it is irrelevant.

19.6.2.3.10 BAdI: Update "Structure Gap" Table afterInstallation/Dismantling

You use this BAdI to create, delete, and update structure gaps automatically after removing or

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 451

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



installing an equipment. You use this BAdI for the configuration control component.

The BAdI contains the following methods:

- CREATE_HOLEIf an equipment is removed from a superior technical object, a structure gap is created

below the superior object and its function identifier (FID) is derived from the removedequipment.

- DELETE_HOLEIf an equipment is installed at a specific location, the corresponding structure gap, whichhas served as a placeholder for a missing part, is deleted. The structure gap refers to asuperior equipment or functional location.

- UPDATE_FID_EQUIThis method is responsible for updating function identifiers (FIDs) of installed equipmentwith FIDs from structure gaps that are deleted simultaneously.

- UPDATE_HOLE_FOR_INSTALLIf an equipment is removed and installed in another superior technical object, this methodis responsible for updating the structure gap that has been created at the previousinstallation location of the relevant equipment. The reference to the removed equipment isupdated with a new, blank value.

- SET_HEADER_MESSAGEThis method sets the first header message in the application log.

19.6.2.3.11 BAdI: Perform Local Configuration Checks During Installation

This BAdI calls the local configuration check for equipment installations. Based on a givenallowed configuration the check verifies whether installation of the relevant equipment is allowedat a certain location.

Requirements

To use the default implementation, you must maintain a valid iPPE structure and a FID(function identifier) assignment between the equipment and a corresponding iPPE node.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 452

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Standard settings

The default coding uses the adapter to the iPPE workbench (Master Parts List) for the check.

19.6.2.3.12 BAdI: Create Proposal for Installation Location

This BAdI contains several methods to allow the generation of proposal values at installation.For the installation of equipments with IE4N it is possible to generate proposal values for bothinstallation location and allowed material number.

DETERMINE_INSTALLATION_LOCInput : IV_EQUNR (Equipment to be installed)

IV_TOP_TPLNR , IV_TOP_EQUNR (Physicial top object of actualconfiguration where equipment should be installed),

IV_AS_MAINTND_CONFIG ,IV_CONFIG_MGR

Output : ET_HOLES (List of found structure gaps)

Based on a given equipment, this method can be used to return proposal values for possibleinstallation locations (structure gaps).

This BAdI contains several methods for generating default values during the installation. Wheninstalling equipment with transaction IE4N, default values for the installation location and theallowed material number can be generated.

DETERMINE_INSTALLATION_LOCInput: IV_EQUNR (Equipment to be installed)

IV_TOP_TPLNR, IV_TOP_EQUNR (Physical top-level object of the actual

configuration, where equipment can be installed) IV_AS_MAINTND_CONFIG ,IV_CONFIG_MGR

Output: ET_HOLES (list of the structure gaps found)

Based on a particular piece of equipment, this method can be used to return default values forpossible installation locations (structure gaps). IV_AS_MAINTND_CONFIG Output: EV_EQUNR,ET_VALID_PARTS (list of the material numbers allowed)

Based on a particular structure gap (IV_STPLNR or IV_SEQUNR+ IV_POSNR), you can usethis mthod to return a list of the valid material numbers as default for the installation (UnderUse of the Data Structure from MPL nodes)

DISPLAY_PROPOSAL_VALUES

Input: IT_MPL_NODES (Table of the MPL nodes)

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 453

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Output: RV_MATNR_SELECTED (a particular material number)

If the selection of the possible material numbers (see DETERMINE_VALID_PART) was notunique, you can use this method to implement a logic to restrict the select to exactly onematerial number. The values resulting from this are transferred directly to the screen.

ACTIVATE_INSTLOC_BTN / ACTIVATE_VPARTS_BTN

By implementing this method you can control whether the pushbuttons that trigger the generationof the default values should be visible or not.

Standard settings

The BadI will be delivered with a SAP default implementation that ensures complete integrationwith the configuration control functionality / processes.

DETERMINE_INSTALLATION_LOCFor any given equipment the system first tries to find exactly one structure gap where theremoved object is equal to equipment to be installed . This will cover the closed loop-scenario,where the same equipment is installed into same location again. An additional check isperformed when the top element of the configuration is entered by the user to ensure that onlystructure gaps are used from the same technical structure (e.g. aircraft).

This first search will only return successful in case it finds exactly one gap for the equipment .

Otherwise (none or more gaps) the system proceeds with a second check.

Here, all gaps in the allowed configuration (given by top element) are searched, for which theFID is equal to the FID value from the equipment to be installed. This should support theopen-loop scenario, where different parts are used as replacements. The FID approach will makesure that only valid locations are returned for which the equipment can be used.

IF exactly one gap is found the system will return this directly. If multiple gaps are found thesystem will pass on the table of gaps to the method #DISPLAY_HOLE_SELECTION# forfurther selection.

If no gap is found, the 3rd check is executed which searches for all structure gaps with thesame material number then the one from the equipment to be installed.

The rest of the logic is the same as above.

DISPLAY_HOLE_SELECTION

This method has the intention to return one specific structure gap out of a list of several gaps.Within the IE4N installation process it is called automatically after theDETERMINE_INST_LOCATION method when the structure gap selection is not unique.

By default, this method sends a popup (F4-Search help-technique) with all table entries, so that

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 454

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



the user can select one for later processing, however other implementations using othertechniques (e.g. always use the first found gap without manual user selection) are possible.

DETERMINE_VALID_PAR T

For any given installation location (structure gap) specified by superior object ( tplnr, equnr,posnr ) the system calls an MPL service method to retrieve all allowed (valid) parts for thatlocation . Precondition for the valid parts service is that at least one structure gap exists for thelocation and that this gaps has a FID and material number assigned.

With FID and material number the MPL function is able to determine a list of valid parts.

DISPLAY_PROPOSAL_VALUES

This method has the intention to return one specific material number out of a list of severalmaterials. Within the IE4N installation process it is called automatically after theDETERMINE_VALID_PART method when the material selection is not unique.

By default, this method sends s popup (F4-Search help-technique) with all table entries, so thatthe user can select one entry for later processing, however other implementations using other

techniques (e.g. always use the first found material without manual user selection) are possible.

ACTIVATE_INSTLOC_BTN / ACTIVATE_VPARTS_BTN

These two methods control whether the buttons on the installation screen should be displayed ornot. In the default implementation they are only visible when a FID value is found for theequipment ( for the INSTLOC_BTN) or the structure gap (for the VPARTS_BTN).

19.6.2.3.13 BAdI: Generate/Update Notification

This BAdI is used (internally) to create notifications or update existing notifications to documentan equipment removal or installation. The method CREATE creates a new notification, themethod MODIFY updates an existing one (notification number must exist). WithFILL_CUST_DATA you can maintain any customer-specific fields etc. in the notification tablesimmediately before the methods CREATE/MODIFY are called.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 455

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Standard settings

Default implementations exist for CREATE and MODIFY notification.

Recommendation

The default implementations for CREATE and MODIFY should not be replaced by otherimplementations.

Further notes

Commit Work and Rollback are handled outside by the calling application. Errors/messages arecollected in an application log (handle is change parameter). The notification type must be filledfrom outside, for MODIFY the notification number must also be filled (with an existingnumber).

19.6.2.4 Change of Equipment History

19.6.2.4.1 BAdI: Customer Checks for Reorganization of Equipment History

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the componentEquipment (PM-EQM-EQ). You canuse this BAdI to perform customer-specific checks and to fill customer-specific fields and updatecustomer-specific data.

The BAdI includes the following methods:

- Method WORKLIST_CONSISTENCY_CHECK Consistency check of the interim status

- Methode EVENT_CONSISTENCY_CHECK Consistency of an event

- Method WORKAREA_SET_PROPOSALSet default data in detail screen

Activities


If implementations of this Business Add-In have already been created, the system displays them

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 456

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



in a dialog box. You then choose one of them by choosingCreate , and continue as follows:




4. Save your entries and assign the Add-In to a package.

5. To edit a method, double-click its name.



8. Choose Activate .

When the application program is executed, the code you created is run through.

19.6.2.4.2 BAdI: Update Structure Gaps

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the componentEquipment (PM-EQM-EQ). You canuse this BAdI to create, update, or delete structure gaps after the reorganization of theequipment history.


- Method CREATE_HOLECreate structure gap

- Method DELETE_HOLEDelete structure gap

- Method UPDATE_FID_EQUIUpdate function indicator

- Method UPDATE_HOLE_FOR_INSTALLUpdate created structure gaps during exchange

- Method SELECT_HOLE_FOR_INSTALLDetermine structure gap to be deleted

- Method INITIALIZEInitialize buffer tables

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 457

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Method UPDATE_DBUpdate database

Standard settings

There is a default implementation for all the methods listed above.

Activities











Example

An equipment was installed at technical object A before the reorganization of the history. Afterthe reorganization it is installed at technical object B. The above method now generates astructure gap for technical object A and simultaneously deletes a structure gap in technicalobject B.

19.6.2.4.3 BAdI: Complete or Change Data for Goods Movement

Use

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 458

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the componentEquipment (PM-EQM-EQ). You canuse this BAdI to complete or change the header data and the segments for the goods movement.


- Method GOODS_MVMNT_UPD

Complete or change data for goods movement

Activities











19.6.2.4.4 BAdI: Process Notification After Restructuring of the EquipmentHistory

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the componentEquipment (PM-EQM-EQ). This BAdIis used (internally) for creating notifications or updating or deleting existing notifications, toreserve the installation or removal of equipment.


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 459

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Method CREATECreate notification

- Method MODIFYChange notification

- Method FILL_CUST_DATAChange customer-specific data in notification

- Method DELETEDelete notification

- Method SELECTSelect notification

Standard settings

There are default implementations available for the methods CREATE, MODIFY, and SELECT.

Recommendation

Do not replace the default implementations for the methods CREATE, MODIFY, and DELETEwith other implementations.

Activities










________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 460



technical object, or to a technical object that is below the technical object in the hierarchy, for

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



technical object, or to a technical object that is below the technical object in the hierarchy, forexample. You can overwrite the standard setting using this BAdI

The BAdI uses the following methods:

- MEASPOINT_CHECK_ORDER

- MEASPOINT_CHECK_TL- ALLOWED_MEASPOINTS_GET

Requirements

You have activated the function "Measuring Point as Production Resource/Tool" with theBusiness Function LOG_EAM_CI_3 (EAM: Continuous Improvement EhP4).

Standard settings

The standard system contains an active default implementation.

The BAdI is designed for multiple use and is not filter-dependent.

Activities

Information about the implementation of BAdIs in the context of the enhancement concept isavailable in the SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under BAdIs - Embedding in theEnhancement Framework.

Example

See the default implementation of the BAdI.

19.6.2.7 BAdI: Check Validity of Measurement Readings

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in thePlant Maintenance (PM) component. You can usethis BAdI to check measurement readings (measurement documents) that are entered formeasuring points.

This BAdI does not support measurement reading transfer in dialog (for example, when creatingor changing a piece of equipment) or the cancellation of measurement documents.

Documentation for BAdI method:

- CHECK_RDGS

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 462

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Standard settings

In the standard system, there is no activated BAdI implementation.

Activities


Example

Counter MC1 is assigned to equipment EQ1. The system is set up to issue an error message if the measurement reading exceeds a certain size (for example, if the measurement reading is10% above the previous measurement reading).

If you create a measurement reading for counter MC1 that is 10% higher than the previousmeasurement reading, and the implementation is activated, the implementation compares themeasurement reading entered with the previous measurement reading. It checks whether theentry is valid and issues an error message if appropriate.

For more information, see the example class CL_EX_IMRC_CHECK_RDGS with the exampleimplementation that calls SAP enhancement IMRC0004.

19.6.2.8 BAdI: External Checks for Serialization Levels

Use

You can use this Business Add-In (BAdI) to initiate checks, which should be performed whenchanging the serialization levels in the material master record.

If changes to the serialization level should be prevented, then you must trigger the exceptionUPDATE_NOT_ALLOWED.

Notes

This BAdI is potentially used by Industry Business Solutions.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 463

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

19.6.2.9 BAdI: Order Change

With this business add-in all changes (creation, change, set deletion flag) to PM/CS/PP/PS/PIorders can be processed further and if necessary prohibited.

Standard settings

Business add-ins are not active in the Standard System. The business add-in can be used severaltimes.

Recommendation

If you use different order types and want to handle these in different ways, note that this BADI

is used by all of the above-mentioned order types. To differentiate between the order types,evaluate the "AUTYP" field for the corresponding order header.

These are the possible entries in the "AUTYP" field:

10: Production order (PP order)

20: Networ k (PS order )

30: Service and plant maintenance order (CS/PM order)

40: Process order (PI order)

Activities

To activate the business add-in, you must create an active implementation. Note that businessadd-ins can be used several times and therefore all active implementations are called and runthrough.

Further notes

Note that no system messages may be sent in the methods. The only exception is theAT_SAVE method. Within this method, a system message may be issued, but only if youtrigger the exception ERROR_WITH_MESSAGE at the same time.

Also, note that within the methods, the "commit work" instruction may not be executed becausethis would inevitably lead to incorrect data in the database.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 464

19 6 2 10 BAdI E t Additi l A th i ti Ch k f O d

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.10 BAdI: Execute Additional Authorization Checks for Orders

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in thePlant Maintenance (PM) and Customer Service (CS) components.

You can use this Business Add-In (BAdI) to carry out additional authorization checks fororders.

Activities

Implement the BAdI.

For more information about the BAdI methods, see the BAdI interface.

19.6.2.11 BAdI: Field content and display modification

Use

You can use this Business Add-In (BAdI) to hide fields on the following screens of maintenance- and service orders:

- Order header

- Operation overview

- Operation detail screen: Relationship

- Relationship detail screen

- Dialog window for operation detail screen: Network graphic

Documentation for BAdI methods Change screenstructure

Activities

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 465

19 6 2 12 BAdI: Catalog Connection

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.12 BAdI: Catalog Connection

Use

With this Business Add-In (BAdI) you can copy components from an external catalog into anorder or a task list.

Integrating a catalog component into an order or task list can happen in very different ways.You can find further information in the documentation of the respective methods.

Documentation on the methods:

- COMPONENT_VIA_CATALOG_GET

- COMPONENT_VIA_CATALOG_MODIFY

- CATALOG_GET_ALTERNATIV

Documentation for BAdI Interface: IF_EX_PLM_CATALOG_IF

Activities

19.6.2.13 BAdI: Confirmation

With this business add-in, confirmations for PM/CS/PP/PS/PI orders can be processed furtherand checked when they are saved. The saving of the confirmations can be aborted if necessary.

Further checks can also be made when you cancel a confirmation.

Standard settings

Business add-in are not active in the Standard System. This business add-in can be used severaltimes.

Activities

To activate the business add-in, you must create an active implementation. Note that thebusiness add-in can be used several times and therefore all active implementations are called andrun through.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 466

Further notes

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



u t e otes

Note that in the methods, no system messages may be sent. The only exceptions are theAT_SAVE and AT_CANCEL_CHECK methods. Within these methods, a system message maybe issued, but only if you trigger the exception ERROR_WITH_MESSAGE (for AT_SAVEmethod) or NOT_ALLOWED (for AT_CANCEL_CHECK method) at the same time.Note also, that within the methods the "commit work" instruction may not be carried outbecause this would lead to incorrect data in the database.

19.6.2.14 BAdI: Maintenance-, Service- and Refurbishment Order

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) offers you the following functions:

- Methods for maintenance- or service notifications or orders:

- Completion date for maintenance planWith this method you can complete the objects "notification" or "order, that have areference to a maintenance plan. It is possible to control the transfer of data to themaintenance plan.

- Methods for refurbishment orders:

- Define MRP-relevance for refurbishment ordersYou can use the BAdI for controlling the MRP relevance for refurbishment orders.

- Methods for maintenance- or service orders:

- customer-specific authorization checkThis method allows you to create customer-specific authorization checks formaintenance orders or service orders.

- Method CONTRACT_PRICE_GET

- Forbid contract price determinationYou can use this method to determine whether the price from the contract specifiedshould be copied or ignored. If it should be ignored, then the price is determined inaccordance with the valuation variants.

- Methode NO_CONTRACT_DATA_GET

- Prevent contract data transfer.You can use this method to determine whether contract information should be copiedinto the order.

- REFERENCE_ORDER_CHK Method

- Check reference orderYou can use this method to run checks when you create using a reference.

- Method CHANGE_COSTRELEVNCY

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 467

- Change cost relevancyYo can se this method to a tomaticall set or re oke the costing rele ance of a

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You can use this method to automatically set or revoke the costing relevance of acomponent in a maintenance or service order.

- Method ORDER_SCHEDULE

- Influence order schedulingYou can use this method to influence whether the order should be scheduled.

- RKPF_MODIFY Method

- Change reservation headerYou can use this method to change the header of the reservation belonging to theorder.

- NO_RES_FOR_IND_STOCK Method

- No reservation for sales order stockYou can use this method to control whether no reservations are generated for salesorder stock, although sales order stock is available and the material master onlyprovides for individual requirements.

- CREATE_BANF_FOR_IND_STOCK Method

- Create purchase requisition for sales order stockYou can use this method to control automatically whether a purchase requisitionshould be generated for sales order stock reservations.

Activities

19.6.2.15 BAdI: Maintenance-/Service Order: Task List Integration

Use

You can use this customer enhancement (Business Add-In) to change the task list data when youcopy a task list to a maintenance- or service order.

You can also customize the data of a dummy operation generated.

Documentation on the BAdI methods:

- Transfer of task list planning data

- Transfer of task list components (PLMZ, STPOX)

- Transfer of task list components (RESBB)

- Issuing a dummy operation

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 468

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

19.6.2.16 BAdI: Adapt Transferred Data to BAPI

Use

The Business Add-In (BAdI) IBAPI_ALM_ORD_MODIFY can be used to check and change thetransferred data.

The BAdI is called up after the transfer structure has been converted in structure usedinternally. However, the method table is only only interpreted after the BAdI has been calledup. The methods remain in the transferred format. Additional data can be transferred using thetable EXSTENSION_IN. Only then is the data check performed.

With this BAdI, for example, data from SAP ERP can be read in addition to the transferreddata, or decoding tables can be used to convert the data to the required format.

Standard settings

The following tables are transferred:EXTENSION_IN Reference structure for BAPI Parameter ExtensionIn / ExtensionOutCT_METHODS Table with processing methods BAPI interfaceCT_HEADER Table with order header data BAPI interfaceCT_HEADER_UP Table with update flags for order header BAPI interfaceCT_HEADER_SRV Table with service data

CT_HEADER_SRV_UP Order BAPIS in PM/CS: service-specific data, ext. ext. structureCT_USERSTATUS Structure for maintenance-/service order, user status changeCT_PARTNER Order BAPIs in PM/CS: Table type for partner data (Multiorder)CT_OPERATION Table with operation data BAPI interfaceCT_OPERATION_UP Table with update flags for operations BAPI interfaceCT_RELATION Table with relationships BAPI interfaceCT_RELATION_UP Table with update flags for relationships BAPI interfaceCT_COMPONENT PM/CS BAPI order components (table type)CT_COMPONENT_UP Table with update flags for components BAPI interfaceCT_TEXT Table with text data for the BAPIs in PM/ CSCT_TEXT_LINES Tables with text lines for the BAPIs in PM/CS

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 469




SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






19.6.2.18 BAdI: Inspection of Contract

Use

With this Business Add-In (BAdI) you can check customer-specific contract data.Documentation for the methods:

- Contract check for external operation

- Contract check for external components

Activities

19.6.2.19 BAdI: List Processing

Use

This Business (BAdI) contains methods which you can use to influence various processes in listediting.

Documentation for the BAdI methods:

- Changing the BOM components from the structure list

- Changing the material quantity from the where-used-list

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 471

- Changing the search strategy for the flexible class search

- Changing the valuations in the replacement equipment search

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Changing the valuations in the replacement equipment search

- Changing the search strategy for the flexible class search

Activities

19.6.2.20 BAdI: Performance Tuning for Lists

Use

You can use the Business Add-In to exchange the views used for selections in PlantMaintenance and Customer Service lists.

To do this, you can use the methods CHANGE_VIEW to optimize the selection. In addition,you can exclude the main selection criterion from the selection, depending on the number of entries. The selected data records are then later checked according to these selection criteria.

Documentation on BAdI methods:

Change selection view

Activities

To implement the BAdI, contact your SAP consultant. He or she will find a solution dependingon your business process. In doing this, new customer-specific selection views are created,which must include the same fields as the standard views. However, the data can be partiallytaken from customer-specific tables, so that optimal database indices can be created. Thesecustomer-specific tables must be filled out with current data when saving the object concerned(orders or notifications).

Nach dem Aufrufen der IMG-Aktivität gelangen Sie zunächst auf ein Dialogfenster, in dem Sieeinen Namen für die Implementierung eingeben.

Falls bereits Implementierungen zu diesem BAdI angelegt wurden, gelangen Sie auf einDialogfenster, in dem die existierenden Implementierungen angezeigt werden. Wählen Sie indiesem DialogfensterAnlegen und fahren Sie wie folgt fort:

1. Geben Sie im Dialogfenster im FeldImplementierung einen Namen für dieImplementierung des BAdIs ein und wählen Sie danachAnlegen.Sie gelangen auf das Einstiegsbild zum Anlegen von BAdI-Implementierungen.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 472

2. Geben Sie in dem Einstiegsbild im FeldKurztext zur Implementierung einen Kurztextfür die Implementierung ein.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



1. Wählen Sie im RegisterindexInterface .Auf der Registerkarte ist das FeldName der implementierten Klasse automatisch gefüllt,da das System aufgrund des Namens Ihrer Implementierung einen Klassennamen vergibt.

2. Sichern Sie Ihre Eingaben und nehmen Sie die Zuordnung zu einer Entwicklungsklasse vor.3. Positionieren Sie den Cursor jeweils auf der Methode und verzweigen Sie per Doppelklick

in die Methodenbearbeitung.

4. Geben Sie zwischen den Anweisungenmethod <Interface-Name>~<Name derMethode>. und endmethod. das von Ihnen gewünschte Coding zur Implementierungein.

5. Sichern und aktivieren Sie Ihr Coding und navigieren Sie zurück zum BildÄndern Implementierung .

6. Sichern Sie auf dem BildÄndern Implementierung .Hinweis: Es ist ebenfalls möglich, für ein BAdI zunächst eine Implementierung anzulegenund diese später zu aktivieren. In diesem Fall schließen Sie die Bearbeitung zum jetzigenZeitpunkt ab.

7 . Wählen SieAktivieren.Bei der Ausführung des Anwendungsprogramms wird jetzt das von Ihnen in der Methodehinterlegte Coding durchlaufen.

Example

The BAdI includes sample coding.

19.6.2.21 BAdI: Assign Work Center to Service Product

You can use this BAdI to:

- Generate a missing entry in table T399A during runtime

- Change the results of accessing this table

Use

This BAdI is particularly suitable for simplified maintenance of service products.This ensuresthat exactly one combination of maintenance planning plant and responsible work center can beassigned to each service product.

Likewise, an interactive variant, in which the user can use a dialog box to enter data forgenerating orders, is conceivable.

By using BAPIs for the material master, the maintenance plant or work center methods can bedetermined according to rules that take into account data from the material master or the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 473

product hierarchy.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Restrictions

This BAdI cannot be implemented multiple times.

Further notes

The BAdI will run when table T399A is accessed from a sales order item for the serviceproduct and plant in accordance with the specifications.

The following data exists for the import parameter:

- The plant, which, for example, is transferred to an SD item as a supplying plant(I_WERK)

- The material number, which must be checked to see whether maintained parameters existfor a service product in the specified plant (I_SVOBJ)

- The service object ID (I_SVOBJ_ID)

- An indicator which shows whether repairs processing should be executed (I_RMA_ACTIVE)

- The system return value after accessing table T399A, which is not equal to zero fornon-existent entries (I_SELECTION_SUBRC)

- The contents of table lines from table T399A, if the selection returned data(I_SELECTION_RESULT)

You can deduce from the service object ID, whether table T399A is accessed withinmaintenance planning or for the generation of a service order from a sales order. Thisparameter has the value '06' for maintenance planning, and the value '01' for the generation of a service order from a sales order.

Depending on the value of the service object ID, not all the BAdI' s export parameters are used.If the value is '01' , the parameters which correspond to the fields from transaction OISD(create/process service products) are evaluated. If the value is '06' , those parameters thatcorrespond to the maintainable fields in transaction OISF (process service products formaintenance plan) are the most important.

For changing the results of the selection from table T399A when generating a service orderfrom a sales order, the following fields can be influenced:

- the responsible work center for maintenance tasks E_T399A_VAPLZ

- the plant for the responsible work center E_T399A_VAWRK

- the business area E_T399A_GSBER

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 474

- the key of the planning group of a task list to be integrated E_T399A_STDNR with groupcounter E_T399A_STDAL

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- the reference type for automatic creation of maintenance-/service order E_T399A_BZGSART

- the technical reference object category E_T399A_BZGSOBJTYP

- the equipment number of a sample piece of equipment E_T399A_BZGSOBJ

If the access to table T399A should be influenced from the maintenance plan view, thefollowing fields can be changed:

- the order category E_T399A_AUART

- the responsible work center for maintenance tasks E_T399A_VAPLZ

- the maintenance activitiy type E_T399A_ILART

- the plant for the responsible work center E_T399A_VAWRK

- the business area E_T399A_GSBER

- the key of the planning group of a task list to be integrated E_T399A_STDNR with groupcounter E_T399A_STDAL

Accordingly, the fields E_T399A_AUART and E_T399A_ILART are not evaluated during thegeneration of a service order from a sales order, for the determination of the service productfrom the maintenance plan view there is no evaluation of the reference object data.

After running through the customer-specific logic, the following conditions are checked:

- For the specification of reference type 03, only reference object category 02 is allowed.The value for the sample piece of equipment is only evaluated for this combination.

- The combination of task list number and planned alternative must correspond to an existingplan with category "A".

- The work center must exist and belong to the specified maintenance planning plant.

- The order type must be indicated as a service order type.- The maintenance activity type must be valid for the specified order type.

- The specified business area must exist.

If one of the conditions is not fulfilled, the system terminates the generation of the serviceorder.

Note that, in principle, the values transferred in the BAdI take precedence over existing entriesin table T399A.

If you do not want an active implementation of the BAdI to influence the selection results, you

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 475

should not fill any export variables, because the system will then exclusively use the valuedetermined by table T399A instead of the BAdI export parameter.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

19.6.2.22 BAdI: Set Up Synchronization of Work Center in Order/Notification

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMaintenance Processing (PM-WOC) component.It is used to adjust the responsible work center for a maintenance or service order and itsheader notification (maintenance or service notification ) to match each other.

The system behaves as follows:

- If the responsible work center for a maintenance or service order is changed, theresponsible work center in its header notification is adjusted automatically.

- If the responsible work center for a maintenance or service notification is changed, theresponsible work center in the related maintenance or service order is adjustedautomatically.However, this adjustment is only made if the notification is the header notification of theaffected order.

Interface: IF_EX_EAM_WKCTR_SYNC

Standard settings

In the standard system, the BAdI is not active.

The BAdI is not designed for multiple use.

The BAdI is not filter dependent.

There is an example implementation.

Activities

Information about the implementation of BAdIs in the context of the enhancement concept is

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 476

available in the SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under BAdIs - Embedding in theEnhancement Framework.

Example

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Example

19.6.2.23 BAdI: Changes to object info screen data

Use

You can use this Business Add-In (BAdI) to change the information of the object informationscreen.

Documentation for BAdI method: Determine Key Figure on Object Info Screen

Activities

Example

You can find further information in the sample coding.

19.6.2.24 Maintenance Plan

19.6.2.24.1 BAdI: Connect Digital Signature for the Maintenance Planning

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMaintenance Planning (PM-PRM-MP) component.

With this BAdI you can connect the "digital signature" to a maintenance plan or a maintenanceitem.

You can use the following methods:

- DIG_SIGNATURE_MAINT_ITEM

- DIG_SIGNATURE_MAINT_PLAN

- DIG_SIGNATURE_MAINT_PLAN_SCHED

For more information, see the documentation on the methods.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 477

Activities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________














19.6.2.24.2 BAdI: Adapt Plan/Basic Dates of Call Objects

Use


With this BAdI you can control the scheduling adjustments of dates that have already beenreleased (status Called ) for multiple counter plans.

Updating the schedule in the standard only leads to a check of the dates with the statusWaiting . Dates with the statusCalled are not adjusted.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 478

Standard settings

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



If you use this BAdI, and implement it actively accordingly, the dates of a multiple counterplan are determined as follows:

1. Dates with the statusWaiting are deleted.

2. Within the remaining dates, the scheduling determines a "fixed" starting point and checksthe scheduled dates, beginning with the latest date.The following dates are assessed as a fixed starting point:Date with the status Completed or Ignored

- Status Completed The completion date serves as starting point for the date adjustment.

- Status Ignored :The planned date serves as starting point for the date adjustment.

Date with scheduling type Restart or Start in Cycle The start time serves as starting point for the date adjustment.

Date whose call object does not allow any date adjustmentThis is the case if the corresponding call object is locked by a user at the time of ascheduling update or if a completion date is already specified in the maintenance plan.The status I0043 - Locked is also checked for the call object "Maintenance- orService Object.

3. Beginning at the determined starting point, the planned dates of the dates with the statusCalled are recalculated. The system recalculates the next planned date from the startingpoint, and uses this new planned date to calculate any subsequent dates.

4. If the corresponding dates with the statusCalled are adjusted, then the last date with thestatus Called is used as the basis for calculating the subsequent date(s).

5. The changed planned dates are not updated (either in the maintenance plan or in thecorresponding call objects) until the maintenance plan is saved.

Note

- Dates with the statusCalled and a planned date in the past are not adjusted.

- Dates with several call objects are not adjusted if one call object is completed.

Activities




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 479


3. From the tab index, chooseInterface .The Name of implemented class field is already filled on the tab page, as a class name

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



was automatically assigned to the implementation when you named it.







19.6.2.24.3 BAdI: Multiple Counter Plan: Adjust Dates During Scheduling

Use


With this BAdI you can individually adjust the scheduling of a multiple counter plan.

You can, for example, implement the following scenarios or functions:

- Implementation of shift factors (see single cycle plan)This can be used to take a premature or delayed confirmation of a preceding date intoaccount for the successor.The shift factors can be stored in a customer-specific table for a maintenance plan andtaken into account within the corresponding methods.

- Setting of particular counter readings for the further scheduling, for example, to bridge themaintenance time of the reference object.

- Calculation of planned counter reading (performance-based) and planned date (time-based)by user-defined logic

- Setting of a particular, fixed planned date, both for time-based and performance-basedcycles.

For more information, see the documentation of the individual methods.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 480

A ti iti

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities












19.6.2.24.4 BAdI: Check Whether Plan Date May Be in the Past

Use


With this BAdI, you can determine whether the schedules of a multiple counter plan calculatedin the past, should also appear in the schedule list with the past date.

Schedules of a multiple counter plan, whose planeed date was calculated in the past, aredisplayed in the schedule list with the current system date as standard.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 481

Note the scheduling algorithm for performance-based schedules in the past. You can find moreinformation on scheduling for multiple counter plans in the SAP library underPlant Maintenance .Using this BAdI may mean that depending on the status of the counter several schedules are

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Using this BAdI may mean that, depending on the status of the counter, several schedules arein the past and the scheduling is reliant on prompt measurement recording.

Activities










8. Save the entries on theEdit Implementation screen.

Note: You can also create an implementation, and then activate it at a later time. In sucha case, end the processing stage at this point.


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 482

19.6.2.24.5 BAdI: Do Not Run DB-Update in Scheduling

Use

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




With this BAdI you can decide whether scheduling a maintenance plan should produce adatabase update.

Normally, after a schedule update, the schedules are adjusted in the database - regardless of whether or not the schedule dates are adjusted.

With this BAdI, you can (if no adjustment is required, for example, for schedule adjustment)decide at field level within the corresponding method, whether or not you want the schedules tobe adjusted in the database.

Activities






4. Save your entries, and assign the implementation to a development class.5. Place the cursor on the method, and double-click to enter method processing.





________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 483

19 6 2 24 6 BAdU S R f D f S h d li M l i l C Pl

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.24.6 BAdU: Set Reference Date for Scheduling Multiple Counter Plan

This Business-Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMaintenance Planning (PM-PRM-MP) component.You can use this BAdI to externally influence the scheduling of a mulitple counter plan.

- You can use the method GET_EXT_DATE to determine the reference times for subsequentdates (see example).

- You can use the methods GET_EXTT_EXT_TIMESTAMP_START to pre-fill the start timeof a multiple counter plan.

Example

Determine proposal for start date and start time individually for the start

You want to determine the default values for the start date and start time for a start of amultiple counter plan yourself. The system proposes the current date and the current timerespectively.

End - Start relationship for subsequent dates

The calculation of a planned date in the scheduling of the multiple counter plan (apart from thefirst planned date) is based on the preceding date. On the basis of the preceding dates, thecounter readings are determined (in so far as performance-based cycles are used in the plan)and the cycle lengths are added.

Deviating from this standard, many industries need to be able to determine the basis for thesubsequent dates externally. If, for example, a notification generated from a maintenance plan isintegrated in a revision, then the end date of the revision should be taken into account forcalculating the subsequent date, instead of the original planned date of the notification.

For a multiple counter plan with a cycle of one month, without using this Business Add-In, youget the following date sequence:

Call number Planned date Call date Date type/ Status

1 15.08.2001 15.08.2001 Restart, wait ing

2 14.09.2001 14.09.2001 Scheduled, wait ing




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 484

For a called-up date (statusCalled ), this enhancement gives you the option of externallydetermining the "reference date" for calculating the next date.

If the date with the call number 1 for example on the 15 08 2001 generates a maintenance

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



If the date with the call number 1, for example, on the 15.08.2001 generates a maintenancecall object (such as an order), this gets the statusCalled . The actual maintenance activity,

however, lasts several days and will probably not be completed until the 25.08.2001. This dateis also in the order as the basic end date.

The Business Add-In gives you the option of determining this end date and use it as referencedate for calculating the second date. Finally, this "postponement" affects the entire schedulingand can produce the following schedule:

Call number Planned date Call date Date type/ status

1 15.08.2001 Restart, called up (End date call object 25.08.2001)




Activities



1. In the dialog box, enter a name for the BAdI implementation in theImplementation field,

and choose Create .The screen for creating BAdI implementations is now displayed.







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 485


9. Choose Activate

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



The code you stored in the method will be run when the application program is executed.

19.6.2.25 Maintenance Program Definition

19.6.2.25.1 BAdI: Maintenance Plan Creation/Update

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the component Maintenance Program Definition(IS-AD-MPD) .

This BAdI enables you to generate and update maintenance plans. The BAdI is called when youcreate an instance and then call the required method. The MPD Workbench calls the methodsfor this BAdI after you have run compliance reporting (consistency reporting for maintenanceplan creation, and change implementation reporting for maintenance plan update) and haveselected the documents for which maintenance plans will be created or updated. This is requiredfor carrying out all relevant checks necessary to ensure maintenance plan creation or update issuccessful.

Requirements

If you want to create your own BAdI implementation you have to copy the existing (default)code into your implementation, then modify it according to the requirements of the process.However, you are restricted to using the existing method interfaces.

If you want to use the default implementation, you do not have to do anything. The defaultinterface will automatically be used and set as the active one if no other is created.

Standard settings

- The Business Add-In is active in the standard system.

- The Business Add-In is not filter-dependent.

- The Business Add-In is not reusable.

- The default code is executed when there is no active customer implementation.Note: You have to make sure that all the data consistency checks have been carriedout before calling the methods for this BAdI. In the MPD Workbench, the BAdI

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 486

methods are called after all checks have been carried out by the compliance reportingBAdI.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities











See also:

Methods

Create maintenance plan

Update maintenance plan

Add Additional Data for Maintenance Plan Update

Add Additional Data for Maintenance Plan Creation

Example

For example implementation please see the default implementation using the application menu:

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 487

'Goto -> Default Implementation'.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.25.2 BAdI: Compliance Reporting

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the component Maintenance Program Definition(IS-AD-MPD) .

This BAdI enables you to handle the three reporting modes of the MPD program and is calledwhen you run one of these reportings. This BAdI interprets data from the Product StructureBrowser (PSB) and database tables and can present it in three different reporting modes,assisting the user in maintenance plan creation, update and status reporting. TheCOMPLIANCE_REPORTING method of the BAdI is called when one of these reporting modesis triggered and it, in turn, passes the data on to the respective reporting mode.

Requirements

There are no prerequisites if you use the default implementation.The planning and scheduling foreach document should be up-to-date and correctly maintained, as the data will be passed onfrom the reporting BAdI to the BAdI responsible for maintenance plan creation and up-date(BAdI_MPD_MP_GENER). The maintenance plans cannot be automatically created withoutplanning and scheduling data.

Standard settings

- The Business Add-In is active in the standard system.

- The Business Add-In is not filter-dependent.

- The Business Add-In is not reusable.

- The default code is executed when there is no active customer implementation.

Activities

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 488



1 h di l b f h i l i f h Add d h

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



1. In the dialog box, enter a name for the implementation of the Add-In and chooseCreate .

The system displays the initial screen for creating Business Add-In implementations.2. On this screen, enter a short description for your implementation in the Implementation

Short Text field.





7. Save and activate your code. Navigate back to theChange Implementation screen.Note: You can also create an implementation for an Add-In and not activate it until later.

If you want to do this, do not perform the following step:8. Choose Activate .

When the application program is executed, the code you created is run through.

See also:

Methods:

Data Processing for Total Compliance Reporting

Data Processing for Consistency Reporting

Data Processing for Change Implementation Reporting

Data Processing for Work Status Reporting

Example

To display the default code, chooseGoto -> Default Code -> Display .

19.6.2.26 Extractors

19.6.2.26.1 Extractor for Work Center Capacity

Use

The function modulePMEX_GET_WCCP for extracting DataSource0PM_WCCP consists of

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 489

three steps and works as follows:

1. If the BAdI BADI_WCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES is implemented, it determines downtimesfor the work centers from table VIQMEL, based on messages that match certain criteria.

2. The function module determines work center capacities using classCL_WORKCENTER_CAPACITY and method WORKCENTER_AVAILABLE_TIMES.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



_ _ _ _According to the selection criteria, it displays capacity for each work center at day or shiftlevel.

3. If the BAdI BADI_WCCP_CALC_LOSS_OF_TIME is implemented, it checks whetherdowntimes were determined for the work center determined in step 1. If they were, itdetermines the relevant shifts and calculates the loss of time for the shift.

19.6.2.26.2 BAdI: Determine Downtimes

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in thePlant Maintenance (PM) and Customer Service (CS) components in the context of BI Content. You can use it in the function modulePMEX_GET_WCCP to extract the DataSource0PM_WCCP .From table VIQMEL, the BAdI determines downtime for the work centers based on messagesthat match certain criteria. The BAdI write the downtimes to table T_BREAKDOWNINFO(structure PMWCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES).

The BAdI uses the method BREAKDOWN_TIMES.

The BAdI returns the following fields:

- ARBPL

- ARBPLWERK- AUSBS

- AUSVN

- AUZTV

- AUZTB

- KAPARYou can customize the capacity category that the BAdIBADI_WCCP_CALC_LOSS_OF_TIME uses to calculate the loss of time for a work center.This is transferred in the BAdI BADI_WCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 490

Standard settings

For more information about the standard settings (filters, single or multiple uses), see theEnh.Spot Element Definitionstab in the BAdI Builder (transaction SE18)

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Spot Element Definitions tab in the BAdI Builder (transaction SE18).

Activities


Example

You can find example implementations in the BAdI Builder on theEnhancement Spot Element Definitions tab in the Implementation Example Classes area.

The following example implementation exists:

- WCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES

19.6.2.26.3 BAdI: Work Center Capacity - Calculate Loss of Time

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in thePlant Maintenance (PM) and Customer Service (CS) components in the context of BI Content. You can use it in the function modulePMEX_GET_WCCP to extract the DataSource0PM_WCCP .The BAdI checks whether the BAdIBADI_WCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES has determineddowntimes for a work center. To do this, it considers the following tables:

- T_BREAKDOWNINFO (structure PMWCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES), that filled the BAdIBADI_WCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES.

- T_PMWCCCP_BW (structure PMWCCP_BW) with work center capacities

If downtimes were determined, the BAdI determines the relevant shifts and calculates the loss of time for the shift. You can customize the capacity category that it uses to calculate the loss of time for a work center. This is transferred in the BAdIBADI_WCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES .

The BAdI uses the method CALC_LOSS_OF_TIME.

Requirements

The BAdI BADI_WCCP_BREAKDOWN_TIMES must already have run.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 491

Standard settings

For more information about the standard settings (filters, single or multiple uses), see theEnh.Spot Element Definitions tab in the BAdI Builder (transaction SE18).

A ti iti

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities


Example

You can find example implementations in the BAdI Builder on theEnhancement Spot Element Definitions tab in the Implementation Example Classes area.

The following example implementation exists:

- WCCP_CALC_LOSS_OF_TIME_SAMPLE

19.6.2.27 Archiving

19.6.2.27.1 Equipment

19.6.2.27.1.1 BAdI: Check Archivability of Additional Data for Equipment

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in the Plant Maintenance (PM) component, for archivingequipment. The BAdI applies to the archiving object PM_EQUI.

You can use this BAdI in the preprocessing program for archiving, to check whether additionaldata for the equipment can be archived.


- Check Archivability

Standard settings

The BAdI is not filter-dependent.

The BAdI is designed for multiple use.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 492

Activities


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.6.2.27.1.2 BAdI: Write Additional Data for Equipment to the Archive File

Use


You can use this BAdI to write additional data for equipment to the archive file. It is called inthe write phase of the archiving of equipment.


- Write Data to Archive File

Standard settings

The BAdI is not filter dependent.


Activities


19.6.2.27.1.3 BAdI: Delete Additional Data for Equipment from the Database

Use


You can use this BAdI to delete additional table entries and objects for equipment from thedatabase. It is called in the deletion phase of the archiving of equipment.

Documentation of the method

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 493



19.6.2.27.2.2 BAdI: Check Archivability of Notifications in the WriteProgram

Use

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used for archiving in theService Processing andMaintenance Notifications components. The BAdI applies to the archiving object PM_QMEL.

You can use this BAdI to carry out industry-specific checks in the write program of thearchiving object for maintenance notifications and service notifications.


- Check Archivability of Business Objects

Standard settings


The BAdI is designed for multiple use.Activities


19.6.2.27.2.3 BAdI: Write Add-On-Specific Data from Notifications to theArchive File

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used for archiving in theService Processing andMaintenance Notifications components. The BAdI applies to the archiving object PM_QMELfor maintenance notifications.

You can use this BAdI to include industry-specific requirements for maintenance notificationsand service notifications in the archiving object.


- Write Add-On-Specific Data to the Archive File

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 495

Standard settings



Activities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities


19.6.2.27.2.4 BAdI: Delete Add-On-Specific Entries for Notifications from theDatabase

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used for archiving in theService Processing andMaintenance Notifications components. The BAdI applies to the archiving object PM_QMEL.

You can use this BAdI to include industry-specific requirements for maintenance notificationsand service notifications in the archiving object.


- Delete Add-On-Specific Table Entries from the Database

Standard settings



Activities


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 496

19.6.2.27.3 Orders

19.6.2.27.3.1 BAdI: Check Archivability of Orders in the PreparationProgram

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used for archiving in theService Processing andMaintenance Orders components. The BAdI applies to the archiving object PM_ORDER.

You can use this BAdI to carry out industry-specific checks in the preparation program of thearchiving object for maintenance orders and service orders.



Standard settings

The BAdI is not filter-dependent.The BAdI is designed for multiple use.

Activities


19.6.2.27.3.2 BAdI: Check Archivability of Orders in the Write Program

Use


You can use this BAdI to carry out industry-specific checks in the write program of thearchiving object for maintenance orders and service orders.



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 497

Standard settings


The BAdI can be used more than once.

Activities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




19.6.2.27.3.3 BAdI: Write Add-On-Specific Data from Orders to the ArchiveFile

Use


You can use this BAdI to include industry-specific requirements for maintenance orders andservice orders in the archiving object.


- Write Add-On-Specific Data to the Archive File

Standard settings



Activities


19.6.2.27.3.4 BAdI: Delete Add-On-Specific Entries for Orders from the

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 498

Database

Use


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You can use this BAdI to include industry-specific requirements for maintenance orders andservice orders in the archiving object.


- Delete Add-On-Specific Table Entries from the Database

Standard settings



Activities


19.6.2.27.3.5 BAdI: Check Conversion to Historical Order Upon Archiving

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used for archiving in theMaintenance Orders and Service Processing component. The BAdI applies to the archiving object PM_ORDER.

You can use this method to prevent a historical order from being created when archiving amaintenance or service order. The BAdI is called during the archiving run.

Standard settings



Activities

Information about the implementation of BAdIs in the context of the enhancement concept is

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 499



You can use this BAdI to include industry-specific requirements for task lists in the archivingobject.

For information on the method, see Write Additional Data into Archive File.

Standard settings

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



This BAdI is not filter dependent.

This is a multiple-use BAdI.

Activities


19.6.2.27.4.3 BAdI: Delete Add-On-Specific Entries for Task Lists fromDatabase

Use

This Business Add-In (BAdI) is used in theMaintenance Task Lists and Service Processing components. It refers to the archiving object PM_PLAN.

To date, add-on components or industry solutions (IS) are required to modify the standard(core) archiving programs to fulfill specific requirements during archiving.

You can use this BAdI to delete industry-specific data for task lists.

For information on the method, see Delete additional data.

Standard settings

This BAdI is not filter dependent.

This is a multiple-use BAdI.

Activities


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 501

19.6.3 Execute Data Transfer

In this step you process the data transfer from other systems to your SAP system.

The data transfer for all objects in plant maintenance and call management is performed usingtransaction IBIP (with the exception of service contracts).

A description of the proced re is doc mented in transactionIBIP

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



A description of the procedure is documented in transactionIBIP .Call transaction IBIP.

Documentation for transaction IBIP.

19.7 Work Clearance Management

19.7.1 Master Data

19.7.1.1 Maintain Application Profile

Use

In this IMG activity you define the application profile for work clearance management.

Standard settings

If you do not maintain the application profile, the system uses the following standard settings:

General Settings

- Valuation is not activated.

- Work clearance management at operation level is not activated.

- Electronic signature is not activated.

- You must create the WCM object manually.

Special settings for WCM-relevant orders

- Release for execution must be set manually.

- Completion of work must be confirmed manually.

Special settings for every WCM object

- Every WCM object is valid for 365 days.

- All fields in the change mode status are not ready for input.

- The user can change the user-specific settings.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 502

Special settings for work approvals

- The status Closed must be set manually.

Special settings for applications

- The status Closed must be set manually.

Special settings for lockout/tagout

G hi WCM l i i d i d

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Graphic WCM planning is deactivated.

- The reference object check is performed.

- In the time-frame check the system checks the following criteria:

- Operational condition

- Operat ional type

- Notes are also displayed as a result of conflict verification.

- The check for the test cycle is performed.

- The check for untagging is performed.

- During the multiple usage of operational tags the system checks for the following criteria:

- P rint categor y

- Maintenance planning plant

- Technical object

- Operat ional group

- Operational condition

- Operat ional type

- A work clearance document can only include the technical objects of your planning plant.

Notes

The current condition of the system determines whether you can change settings for thetime-frame check and for the multiple use of operational tags. If, for example, tags areavailable that are supported for multiple usage, you cannot change criteria for multiple usage.

If you work with work permits, note the following:

- We recommend that you create and prepare the WCM objectautomatically . If you wantthe WCM object to have the same number as the order, you must assign an appropriateexternal number range to the WCM object.

- Valuation and work clearance management at operation levelmust not be active.

- For WCM-relevant orders, we recommend that the release for execution is issuedautomatically .

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 503

- For work approvals, we recommend that the statusClosed is set automatically .

19.7.1.2 Architecture

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.7.1.2.1 Assistant for Model Selection

Use

In this IMG activity, you choose the model you want to use for your work clearancemanagement. You can choose one model for each maintenance planning plant. In this way, youdetermine which WCM objects you want to use in work clearance management.

The architecture recognizes two basic models: the standard model and the enhanced model.

The standard model contains the following WCM objects:

- Work clearance application

- Operational WCD

The enhanced model contains the following WCM objects:

- Wor k appr oval

- Applications

- Work clearance application

- Operational WCD

Requirements

You have maintained your maintenance planning plants in the Plant Maintenance application.

Activities

Perform the activities for the maintenance planning plant in which you want to use workclearance management. Perform the activities in the sequence specified.

Notes

If you do not perform this activity, you will not be able to use the components productively.The architecture of a maintenance planning plant cannot be altered once it has been set.

If you work with work permits, youmust use the enhanced model.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 504

19.7.1.2.2 Assistant for Maintaining Additional Applications

Use

In this IMG activity, you establish settings for implementation of additional applications.

Example

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p

A radiation protection application is added to the enhanced model.

As a result, the model contains the following WCM objects:

- Order

- Wor k appr oval

- Applications

- WC application

- Radiation protection application

- Operational WCD

Requirements

You used the Assistant for Model Selection to create the enhanced model.

Activities

Perform the actions in the specified sequence for the maintenance planning plants in which youwant to implement additional applications.

Notes

Program modifications and enhancements are necessary to completely perform this IMG activity.

19.7.1.2.3 Define Descriptions

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the descriptions for WCM objects that you use.

Requirements

You have created the necessary WCM objects.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 505

Activities

Define the descriptions (singular and plural) for the WCM objects.

Notes

We recommend that youonly change the proposed values for applications.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



y g p p pp

19.7.1.2.4 Define Generic Descriptions

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the generic descriptions for WCM objects that you use.

Requirements

You have created the necessary WCM objects.

Activities

Define the generic descriptions (singular and plural) for the WCM objects.

Notes

If you work with work permits, we recommend that youreplace the generic description"application" with "work permit".

19.7.1.2.5 Define Direct Processing Mode

In this IMG activity, you determine which direct processing modes (create, change) to permitfor individual maintenance of WCM objects.

If you want to create and change WCM objects directly from the menu, select both modes.

If you want to permit direct object creation, but changes only via links to another WCM objectthen only select Create.

If you only want to create WCM objects connected to other WCM objects then do not activatethe Create mode.

If a link to other WCM objects exists, you can suppress direct changes using the processing

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 506

mode restrictions. You can then only maintain the WCM object by navigating from the linkedWCM object.

Example

If you want to create a WC application that can only be reached by navigating from the workapproval, then do not activate the Create mode for the WC application.

If you only want to be able to change Operational WCDs by navigating from the assigned WCapplication then do not activate the Change mode for the WC documents

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



application then do not activate the Change mode for the WC documents.

If you have created a WC application and an Operational WCD, allocated the Operational WCDto the WC application and only want to maintain them using the Change WC applicationtransaction, then activate the restriction for linked WCM objects in the Operational WCD.

Activities

Make the settings for the WCM objects.

Further notes

You can check the settings for consistency using the closing checks for the model selection.

19.7.1.2.6 Define Relations

Use

In this IMG activity you define the relations between the WCM objects in work clearancemanagement. You can define how many WCM objects you want to allow for individualrelationships.

Standard settings

The model and architecture of work clearance management imply certain restrictions onrelationships. You must not change these under any circumstances. For the followingrelationships, only one is allowed:

Standard model:

- Order (OR) -> work clearance application (WA,1)

Enhanced model:

- Order (OR) -> work approval (WW)

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 507

Activities

Make your entries for the planning plant and the relationship.

Notes

You can check these settings for consistency with final checks for the model selection

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You can check these settings for consistency with final checks for the model selection.

If you work with work permits, note the following:

- A work approval can be assigned toonly one order.

- An application can be assigned toonly one work approval.

Example

You want to allow a maximum of five Operational WCDs to be assigned to a work clearanceapplication. You then restrict the relationship (WA,1) -> (WD,O) to 5.

19.7.1.2.7 Define Processing Mode for Relations

Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the processing mode for cases where you want to assign oneWCM object to another.

You have two options: Firstly, you can select an existing WCM object and assign it, orsecondly, you create a new WCM object and then assign it.

Requirements

The dialog box for assignment is displayed.

Notes

Note that, when selecting and assigning, the system checks whether the user has theauthorization for the transaction concerned.

Transaction Description

WCTU Assign ordersWCTP Assign work approvalsWCTS Assign applicationsWCTQ Assign work clearance applicationsWCTR Assign Operational WCDs

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 508


Example

If t t ll l i ti g O ti l WCD t b ig d h ig i g O ti l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



If you want to allow only existing Operational WCDs to be assigned when assigning OperationalWCDs to work clearance applications (and not allow new ones to be created), activate only the"Select" function.

If you want to allow a work approval and its work clearance application to be created andassigned in one dialog step, you must activate the "Create" function.

19.7.1.2.8 Define Processing Mode for Navigation

Use

In this IMG activity, you define which processing mode you allow when you navigate from oneWCM object to another WCM object that is linked to it.

You can navigate to the linked WCM object in either "Display" or "Change" mode. The defaultis display mode.

You need to explicitly activate navigation in change mode.

Requirements

The dialog box for assignment is displayed.

Activities

Make your settings for navigation.Notes


Example

If you navigate from a work approval to its work clearance application and want to makechanges there, you must activate the "Change" function.

If you navigate from a work clearance application to the assigned Operational WCDs, but donot want to release the Operational WCDs for changes from this transaction (only direct

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 509

changes are allowed), do not activate the "Change" function.

19.7.1.2.9 Do Not Display Dialog Box for Assignments

Use

In this IMG activity you define whether the dialog box for assignment is displayed.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



y y g g p y

Notes

If you work with work permits, we recommend that youhide the dialog box for assigningwork approvals.

19.7.1.2.10 Configure Work Permits

Use

In this IMG activity you define the settings for work permits. For example, you define whetherthe user can assign a work permit to either a WCM-relevant order or individual operations.

Requirements

You have chosen the enhanced model.

Activities

Note the following IMG activities in addition to this IMG activity:

1. Maintain Application ProfileWe recommend that you create and prepare the work approvalautomatically . If you wantthe WCM object to have the same number as the order, you must assign an appropriateexternal number range to the work approval.Valuation and work clearance management at operation levelmust not be active.For WCM-relevant orders, we recommend that the release for execution is issuedautomatically .For work approvals, we recommend that the statusClosed is set automatically .

2. Define Descriptions

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 510

We recommend that youreplace the proposed values for applications with the names of the relevant work permits.

3. Define Generic DescriptionsWe recommend that youreplace the generic description "application" with "work permit".

4. Define Direct Processing ModeWe recommend that you donot activate "Create" mode for applications.

5. Define RelationsA work approval can beonly be assigned to one order, and an application canonly bei d k l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



assigned to one work approval.

6. Do Not Display Dialog Box for AssignmentsWe recommend that youhide the dialog box for assigning work approvals.

7. Assign View ProfilesWe recommend that you create separate view profiles for work permits on different levels,and assign them accordingly.

19.7.1.3 Settings for WCM-Relevant Operations

Use

In this IMG activity you define the settings for WCM-relevant operations. You can assign botha work clearance document and an approval group to a WCM-relevant operation.

Requirements

You have activated work clearance management at operation level under Maintain ApplicationProfile.

You do not work with work permits.

Standard settings

If you do not maintain any settings, the system assumes the following standard settings:

- Assignment of work clearance documents

- N o assignment

- Assignment of approval groups

- The user must assign an approval group to each WCM-relevant operation.

- An approval group can be assigned to several WCM-relevant operations.

- An assignment to an approval group cannot be revoked.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 511

19.7.1.4 Define Valuation

Use

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this IMG activity, you define which applications must be valuated.

Requirements

You have activated valuation under Maintain Application Profile.

You do not work with work permits.

19.7.1.5 Number Ranges

19.7.1.5.1 Maintain Number Ranges for Work Approval

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the number range for the work approvals. The number for thework approvals can be allocated by the system (internal number range), or you can allocate anumber yourself which must lie within an external number range.

Activities

Create an external and internal number range for the work approvals.

Notes

If you want to manage work approvals in several different plants and require a different numberarea for each, then you can create a number range for every plant by allocating the respectivenumber ranges accordingly.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 512

19.7.1.5.2 Maintain Number Ranges for Applications

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the number ranges for the applications. The number for theapplications can be allocated by the system (internal number range),or you can allocate anumber yourself which must lie within an external number range

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



number yourself, which must lie within an external number range.

Activities

Create an external and internal number range for the applications.

If you want to manage applications in several different plants and require a different numberarea for each, then you can create a number range for every plant by allocating the respectivenumber ranges accordingly.

19.7.1.5.3 Maintain Number Ranges for Work Clearance Documents

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the number ranges for the WC documents. The number for theWC documents can either be allocated by the system (internal number range) or you canallocate a number yourself which must lie within an external number range.

Activities

Create an external and internal number range for the WC documents.

Notes

If you want to manage WC documents in several different plants and require a different numberarea for each, then you can create a number range for every plant by allocating the respectivenumber ranges accordingly.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 513

19.7.1.5.4 Maintain Number Ranges for Operational Tags

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the number range for assigning numbers to tags.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

Create a number range using internal number assignment.

Notes

External number assignment is not possible for tags.

19.7.1.5.5 Assign Number Ranges

Use

In this IMG activity, you allocate the number ranges (internal and external) to the WCMobjects.

Notes

Note the following:

- You must assign the internal number range fortags to theWCD item.

- For some functions, you need internal number assignment for the corresponding WCMobjects.

Requirements

You have already created the number ranges.

Activities

Enter the numbers of the internal and external number ranges for the maintenance planningplant and the WCM object.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 514

19.7.1.6 Usages

19.7.1.6.1 Maintain Usage for Work Approval

In this IMG activity, you define the use for the work approvals.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

Maintain the use and allocate it to the work approvals.

The use for work approvals does not currently affect any other activities.

19.7.1.6.2 Maintain Usage for Applications

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the usage for your applications.

Note the following special features:

- You can shift the start of an application's validity. You therefore have the option of creating the applications earlier.

- You define the duration of the validity (in hours).

- You can define a function-based extension of the validity (of a certain number of hours).In this context, you also define the maximum number of hours by which the validity can

be extended.

Activities

Maintain the usage and assign it to applications.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 515

19.7.1.6.3 Maintain Usage for Work Clearance Documents

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the usage for your work clearance documents. Depending onthe usage (for example, lockout/tagout, simulation, test run), an Operational WCD behaves

differently in the following ways:- Type of operational cycle

The following types exist:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




- Tagging cycle with temporary untagging cycle

- Test cycle

- Tagging cycle without temporary untagging cycleIn an operational phase you can also have certain operational steps (for example, tagging)performed automatically by the system.

- Approval-dependent switch

- If a phase-specific approval is not issued, the switch is only blocked in this specificphase.

- If a cross-phase approval is not issued, the switch is blocked regardless of thecurrent operational phase.

- Operational protection (protected area)

- Multiple use of operational tagsThe criteria for multiple use of operational tags are defined in the application profile.

- Mobile processing of operational listsNote that there are restrictions on the reduction of the operational cycle if mobileprocessing is active. This means that the first status of each operational phase, the statusthat signifies the activity, isalways visible.

Activities

Maintain the usage and assign it to work clearance documents.

Example

If you want an Operational WCD to only be switched if approval A has been issued, youspecify approval A as the cross-phase approval in the usage.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 516

19.7.1.7 Define Work

Use

In this IMG activity you define the settings for work.

You can use groupings to group work and distribute it to different subscreens of a view profileas follows:- Work for group W1 belongs to the subscreen with the internal number 8410.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Work for group W2 belongs to the subscreen with the internal number 8411.



19.7.1.8 Define Requirements

Use

In this IMG activity you define the settings for requirements.

You can use groupings to group requirements and distribute them to different subscreens of aview profile as follows:

- Requirements for group N1 belong to the subscreen with the internal number 8420.




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 517

19.7.1.9 Define Parameter for Text Processing

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the parameters for text processing. If you donot maintain theparameters for word processing, the system uses the following standard settings:

Standard settings

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



g

- A log line is incorporated into the long text when the text is changed.

- Subsequent changes to an existing long text are not possible.

19.7 .1.10 Catalogs

19.7.1.10.1 Define Catalog Types and Code Groups for Catalog Types

Use

In this section, you define the catalog types for work clearance management and you define thecode groups for the catalog types.

If you want to store information in a structured format for the WCM objects, the easiest wayto do so is to use catalogs with predefined contents (code groups and codes).

Example

Working with catalogs is, for example, particularly suitable for integrating information aboutprotective clother or further safety information into work clearance management.

19.7.1.10.2 Display Catalog Directory with All Sub-Items

In this section, you can display and print a directory of the catalogs.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 518

Activities

Check all the catalogs relevant for maintenance and service for completeness and possibleredundancy.

If you determine that your catalogs are not correctly maintained, you should process this activity

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



again.

19.7.1.10.3 Define Catalog Profile

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the catalog profiles for the WCM objects. They define whichcatalogs and which code groups should be drawn from the individual catalogs for WCM objects.

By specifying the generic key for the code groups, you can make a selection from the codegroups contained in the catalog. Use the special characters ' + ' and '*' . If, for example, youenter ' + A * ' in the field for the code groups, then the selection only contains code groupswhose key has the letter A as the second character.

Requirements

You have created the catalogs.

Note

Note that the settings on the detail screen for work clearance management are not relevant.

19.7.1.10.4 Assign Catalog Types, List Type, and Catalog Profile

Use

In this IMG activity, you assign the catalog types to the WCM objects. You can assign up totwo catalogs to a WCM object.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 519

You are free to choose the importance and content of the catalog. No dependencies to or fromother WCM objects exist.

You can also assign a catalog profile, to restrict selection in catalogs further.

You can specify a list type for each catalog.

Requirements

You have maintained the catalogs and the catalog profile.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

Assign the previously-created catalog types and catalog profile to the WCM objects.

19.7.1.11 Document Management

19.7.1.11.1 Define Document TypesIn this step, you define the settings for the document type.

Activities

To define a document type, perform the following steps:

- Define document types

- Define language-dependent document descriptions- Define document statuses

- Define object links

- Define descriptions for object links

- Define document status descriptions

- Define transport of originals for ALE

Further notes

Online documentation is available directly on the maintenance screen for each work step.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 520

19.7.1.12 Priorities

19.7.1.12.1 Define Priority Types

Use

In this activity, you define the priority types for work clearance management. You can definei di id l i i i f h i i

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



individual priorities for each priority type.

19.7.1.12.2 Assign Priority Types

Use

In this section, you assign priority types to WCM objects. This assignment of priority types isa prerequisite for assigning a priority to work approvals, applications or WC documents.

You can define an internal priority type and therefore also internal priorities for each WCMobject. However, if you create WCM objects with references to other WCM objects and wantto copy the priority, it is recommended that you define a priority type for all WCM objects.

Requirements

You have already defined the priority types.

Activities

Assign the priority types to the WCM objects.

19.7.1.13 User Status

19.7.1.13.1 Maintain Status Profiles

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 521

Use

In this section, you maintain the user statuses and the corresponding status profiles and theWCM objects in work clearance management.

You can create user statuses for WCM objects and the items of a WC document.

You have to assign every status profile to at least one WCM object or to the items of a work

clearance document.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Note

The following restriction applies both to the header and the items of Operational WCDs:

For technical reasons, the system status of the operational cycle (for example,ETG (tagged)cannot be affected.

19.7.1.13.2 Assign Status Profiles

Use

In this IMG activity, you assign a status profile for the user status to WCM objects or to theitems of a WC document.

Requirements

You have created the status profile

Activities

Assign the catalog profile to the WCM objects or to the items of a WC document.

19.7.1.14 Partner

19.7.1.14.1 Define Partner Determination Procedure and Partner Functions

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 522




19.7.1.14.2 Assign Partner Determination Procedure

Use

In this section, you assign a partner determination procedure to the WCM objects

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Requirements

You have defined the partner determination procedure for the WCM objects for the partnerobject "Plant Maintenance", and also created the roles for the procedures, which you need forwork clearance management.

Activities

Assign the partner determination procedures to the WCM objects.

19.7.1.15 Check Consistency of Master Data

Use

In this IMG activity, you check the consistency of the model you have selected and defined forwork clearance management.

The check applies to three areas:

- Individual WCM objects and their settings that only apply immediately to the WCM object.

- The relationships between WCM objects- Settings for creating and changing WCM objects This area covers both direct and indirect

maintenance of WCM objects.

The check is carried out for each maintenance planning plant.

Activities

Carry out the checks in the sequence specified.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 524

Do not continue Customizing if an error is found during checks.

19.7.1.16 Data Transfer When Creating with Template

19.7.1.16.1 Generate Basic Settings

Use

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this section, you generate the basic settings for data transfer when creating with template.

Standard settings

These basic settings represent the maximum amount of data to be copied. You can restrict thesein the IMG activity Define Fields.

Activities

Generate the basic settings for data transfer.

Note

If you execute this activity, all existing settings are overwritten.

19.7.1.16.2 Define Fields

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the settings for copying data when creating with a template.For each transaction in which you want to create a WCM object with a template, you candefine the following here:

- Whether the related fields are copied

- In which sequence the fields in the dialog box are displayed for copying

- Whether a field is displayed in the dialog box

Requirements

You have defined the Basic Settings.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 525

Standard settings

If you want to hide fields or display them in a different sequence when copying data, definedthese settings in the basic settings.

Notes

We recommend that you leave the proposed values for the sequence unchanged.If you work with work permits, hide the validity and do not copy it.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.7.1.16.3 Display Dialog Box

Use

In this section you define whether the user should be taken to the dialog box, in which (s)hecan see and select the data to be copied, when (s)he uses a template to create a WCM object.

Requirements

You have generated the Basic Settings.

Standard settings

In the standard setting, the dialog box is displayed.


19.7.1.17.1 Define Revision Phases

Use

In this IMG activity, you determine the revision phases.

The revision phases enable you to structure a revision or a shutdown into several phases. Youcan allocate a revision phase to every WCM object.

Allocating the WCM objects to revision phases supports you when you plan and perform

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 526

revisions.

Activities

Define your revision phases.

Example

You can divide a revision in a power plant into the following phases:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Startup

- Vessel o verhaul

- Shut down

19.7.1.17.2 Define Overall Conditions of Technical System

Use

In this IMG activity, you create the overall conditions for your assets. You use the overallcondition to describe under which operating conditions the assets are run.

Activities

Define your overall conditions.

Example

The following descriptions are valid overall conditions:

- Full load- Par tial load

- Shut down

- Start up

Note

For mode-dependent tagging, the untagging condition/type is determined automatically based onthe overall condition of the technical system.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 527



user B must only be able to process WCM objects from "GAS".

To establish this, you must define two authorization groups and assign them to the two users inthe user master. You must also allocate the two authorization groups to the WCM objects.

As a result, the two users can only process WCM objects from their respective units.

19.7.1.17.5 Define Physical Blocking Types

Use

I thi IMG ti it d fi hi h h i l bl ki t th

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this IMG activity you define which physical blocking types there are.

Example

Examples for physical blocking types:

- Bolts- Chain

19.7.1.18 Print Control

19.7.1.18.1 Generate Print Settings

Use

In this IMG activity, you generate the basic print settings for maintenance planning plants.

The program creates basic settings for print formats and reports used for structuring output andlayout. The settings can be established for all existing print categories.

Activities

Establish basic settings for maintenance planning plants.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 529

19.7.1.18.2 Define Shop Papers and Layout for Printout

Use

In this IMG activity, you can define the various shop papers and determine their print layout.

Requirements

You have created the basic print settings.

Standard settings

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Standard settings

Before making any changes, check the SAP standard settings.

If you want to change the layout of individual lists, do not change standard forms. Instead, usethe standard forms as a template and only process the forms you have created yourself.

Activities

When you maintain the print layout, note that you can maintain the layout of the shop papersseparately for the following:

- Header data

- Operational lists for tagging

- Operational list for untagging

- Tag/Copies

- Test tag/Copies

- Work permit

- You have generated the basic print settings

- You cannot alter the print formats for the header data, the operational lists, or the workpermits, since these are set by the program.

- You can maintain your own print formats for operational tags. To do this, copy the

generated entry with the format XXXX to a print format of your own. When you havemaintained your entries, you can delete the generated entries.

- Note that you must define default values for the print formats of the tags and test tags.

- Note that for tags and test tags, the dialog box for print parameterscannot be displayed.

- For each shop paper you can find the name of a report and the description of an assignedform in the detail view. The individual reports are used for the print output. The formdetermines the layout and the scope of the fields printed for the shop paper.

- The approval status only influences the printing of the work permit.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 530

19.7.1.18.3 Configure User-Specific Print Defaults

Use

In this IMG activity, you can determine the printer and the shop papers to be printed. This isdependent on the user and other parameters.

Requirements

You have generated the Print Settings and defined the Shop Papers and Layout for Printing.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Notes

If the system does not find any entry for a user, the general settings for the print category areused.

19.7.1.19 Enhancements for Technical Objects

19.7.1.19.1 Create Characteristics and Classes for Enhancement

Use

In this IMG activity, you can create field enhancements for the technical objects. This is doneusing classification. The contents of the fields can be copied into the WCM objects.

You can store default values for thetrain and switching location fields in the master data of the technical objects. Since these fields are not contained in the standard system, they areappended to the master data via characteristics.

Requirements

You have defined the data for the Train.

Activities

Create a class in the application with the nameWCM (Cross-Application Components -> Classification .

Create the following characteristic for thetrain field:Name: TRAINDescription: train

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 531

Data type: CHAR (3)Check routine: function module "WCFU_WCCH_CHECK"Table reference: WCCH-TRAIN

Create the following characteristic for theswitching location field:Name: CONTROLDescription: switching locationData type: CHAR (30)Check routine: no checks in the standard systemTable reference: WCSWCITM-CONTROL

Assign the characteristics to the class.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Assign the class to the functional locations or the equipment master records for which yourequire a default from the master data.

In the master data transactions, maintain the class assignment for the technical objects and theclassification of the characteristics.

Further notes

If you want to use F4 Help when maintaining the characteristics for thetrain field, assign thevalues of the current maintenance planning plant to the parameter IDWCM . You then only

receive the entries from the check table that you have created for the corresponding plant.

19.7.1.20 Field Selection

19.7.1.20.1 Define Field Selection for Work Approval

Use

In this section, you define the field selection for work approvals.








________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 532






SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



For example, you define that the work center is a required entry for a certain order type.

Activities











b) Choose Influencing .

All of the fields, for which you can enter influencing values, appear on the screen.c) Double-click on the influencing field, to which you wish to assign a concrete value.

All of the fields, which can be modified depending on the influencing value, appearon the screen.




________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 533






d) Place the cursor on a influencing field, for which you wish to assign a value, andpress New Values

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







19.7.1.20.2 Define Field Selection for Applications

Use

In this IMG activity you define the field selection for the applications.







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 534







b) Choose Modifiable .

All the fields, which you can modify for this screen modification group, appear onthe screen.


d) Place the cursor on a influencing field, for which you wish to assign a value, and

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







19.7.1.20.3 Define Field Selection for Work Clearance Application

Use

In this section, you define the field selection for work clearance applications.







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 536






- Influencing FieldsFor the influencing fields, you specify how the modifiable screen is represented in thescreen, depending on a value

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



p gFor example, you define that the work center is a required entry for a certain order type.

Activities
















________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 537








d) Place the cursor on a influencing field, for which you wish to assign a value, andN V l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







19.7.1.20.4 Define Field Selection for Work Clearance Documents

Use

In this section, you define the field selection for work clearance documents.







________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 538






- Influencing FieldsFor the influencing fields, you specify how the modifiable screen is represented in thescreen, depending on a valueF l d fi th t th k t i i d t f t i d t

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



For example, you define that the work center is a required entry for a certain order type.

Activities
















________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 539








d) Place the cursor on a influencing field, for which you wish to assign a value, andpress New Values

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________







19.7.1.21 Maintain Operation Data for Work Clearance Management

Use

The control key WCM exists for orders inwork clearance management. Operations with thiscontrol key activate work clearance management. Orders for which work clearance managementis activated are calledWCM-relevant orders.

Furthermore, you have the option of assigning further data on work clearance managementbehind the user fields.

Thus you can automatically generate the correspondingWCM objects, in particular for orders thatwere created during the scheduling ofmaintenance plans.

Requirements

- The orders have operations with the control keyWCM .

- AWCD template are stored in the first line of each of these operations.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 540

- The orders have the statuscreated .- No WCM object has yet been assigned to the orders.

- The orders are not locked by a user.

Activities

1. Define the user fields in Customizing for Plant Maintenance and Customer ServiceunderDefine User Fields .The first user fieldText (20) is required for work clearance management. Assign it anappropriate heading.If you wish to show the input help for the first user field, use the customer exitIWO10015with the function module WCFU_FIRST_USER_FIELD_F4 .

d h l d f k l

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



We recommend that you create a specialpassword ID for work clearance management.

2. To issue WCM objects automatically, execute program RIWC0016.

19.7.1.22 Integration with a Graphic WCM Planning

Use

There is the option of integrating any external systems for processing WC documents.

The most prevalent example is the integration of a graphic planning system which you can useto process items for WC documents.

Integrating the two systems is realized through an individual RFC server, which acts asmiddleware between the SAP system and the external system. The server consists of twocomponents:

- Generic componentThis is the statistical server library (WCMRFC.LIB) delivered by SAP. It gives you RFCfunctions tailored for WC documents which simplify the development of a specific RFCserver. This library encapsulates relevant functions of the RFC server which are included

in the standard RFC library.- Individual component

This is an executable program based on the above server library. You must develop thisprogram additionally to implement an individual integration with a specific external system.

Activities

You must activate the graphic WCM planning in the application profile and enter the name of a

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 541

logical RFC destination. Each RFC server that acts as middleware between the SAP system andthe external system must use a connection with this destination.

The settings named are valid at the level of the planning plant.

Effects

If you have made the required settings, a corresponding menu function appears on the itemoverview of the WC document. If the user executes this function, the RFC server is called up,thereby allowing the WC document to be processed via the external system.

If you change item data in the external system, then a consistency check is performedautomatically, before it can be processed further in the SAP system.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.7.1.23 Archiving

19.7.1.23.1 Archive Work Approvals

Use

In this section, you use archiving object WCM_WAP to archive work approvals.

Here you branch directly to Archive Administration, in which the following functions areavailable for work approvals:

1. Initial runThe work approvals to be archived are determined using the deletion flag and supported bythe system using a deletion indicator.

2. ArchivingThe work approvals with deletion indicators are written to an archive file.

3. DeletionThe archived work approvals are deleted from the database.

19.7.1.23.2 Archive Applications

Use

In this section, you use archiving object WCM_WAPI to archive applications.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 542

Here you branch directly to Archive Administration, in which the following functions areavailable for applications:

1. Initial runThe applications to be archived are determined using the deletion flag and supported by thesystem using a deletion indicator.

2. ArchivingThe applications with deletion indicators are written to an archive file.

3. DeletionThe applications archived are deleted from the database.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.7.1.23.3 Archive Work Clearance Documents

Use

In this section, you use archiving object WCM_WCD to archive WC documents.

Here you branch directly to Archive Administration, in which the following functions areavailable for WC documents:

1. Initial runThe WC documents to be archived are determined using the deletion flag and supported bythe system using a deletion indicator.

2. ArchivingThe WC documents with deletion indicators are written to an archive file.

3. DeletionThe archived WC documents are deleted from the database.

19.7.1.24 Groups/Groupings

19.7.1.24.1 Define Groups

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 543

Use

In this activity, you define the keys and short texts for the groups.

Note

In general you can abstain from using groups, as groups are used to support very specializedfunctions.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.7.1.24.2 Group System and User Statuses

Use

In this IMG activity, you define which system statuses and user statuses are grouped into onegroup.

Requirements

You have created the group under Define Groups.

19.7.1.24.3 Group Approval Status

Use

In this IMG activity, you define which approval statuses should be grouped into one group.

Requirements

You have created the group under Define Groups.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 544

19.7.1.24.4 Group Additional Data

Use

In this activity you define which additional data (for example, partners) should be grouped intoone group.

Requirements

Y d h d D fi G

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You created the group under Define Groups.

19.7.1.24.5 Functions Dependent on System/User Status

19.7.1.24.5.1 Assignment Forbidden

Use

In this IMG activity, depending on the system status and user status you limit whether a WCMobject can be assigned to another WCM object.

Requirements

You have grouped the system statuses into one group under Group System and User Statuses.

Standard settings

WCM objects that have one of the following system statuses cannot be assigned:

- Completed

- Rejected

- Deletion f lag set

- Inactive

A work clearance application with the system statusTest Cycle cannot be assigned.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 545

Example

An Operational WCD that is eithertemporarily untagged or untagged cannot be assigned toa work clearance application.

1. Define a group containing the above system statuses.

2. Assign the relation "WC application (WA,1) -> Operational WCD (WD,O)" to this group.

19.7.1.24.5.2 Creation Using Templates Forbidden

Use

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this IMG activity, depending on the system status and user status you limit whether a WCMobject can be used as a template.

Requirements

You have grouped the system statuses into one group under Group System and User Statuses.

Example

A work clearance application that is eitherinactive or rejected cannot be used as a template.

1. Define a group containing the above system statuses.

2. Assign this group to the work clearance application.

19.7.1.24.5.3 Changes to Additional Data Forbidden

Use

In this IMG activity, depending on the system status and user status, you limit which additionaldata can be changed for a WCM object.

Requirements

1. You have grouped the additional data into one group under Group Additional Data.

2. You have grouped the statuses into one group under Group System and User Statuses.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 546

Standard settings

For WCM objects, which have one of the following system statuses,no additional data may bechanged:

- Completed

- Rejected

- Flagged for deletion- Inactive

For WCM objects, which areprepared , you cannot change the following additional data:

- Partner

- Catalogs

Di

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Diver se texts

- Documents

- Object list

Example

The additional dataPartner and Catalogs may not be changed, if thework permit is printed for the work clearance application.

1. Define a group that contains the above additional data.

2. Define a group that contains the above system statuses.

3. Assign both of these groups to the WC application.

19.7.1.24.5.4 Revoke Approvals

Use

In this IMG activity, depending on the system status and user status, you define whether anapproval is automatically revoked for a WCM object.

Requirements

You have grouped the statuses into a group under Group System and User Statuses.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 547

Example

Approval "X" is automatically revoked for a work clearance application with the statuschange mode or rejected .1. You define a group that contains the above system statuses.

2. You assign this group to approval "X" for the work clearance application.

19.7.1.24.5.5 Revoke Assignments

Use

In this IMG activity, depending on the system status and user status, you define that the

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this IMG activity, depending on the system status and user status, you define that theassignments between two WCM objects are automatically revoked.

Requirements

You have grouped the statuses into one group under Group System and User Statuses.

Example

The assignment between a work clearance application and an Operational WCD is automaticallyrevoked if the work clearance application is eitherrejected or inactive .1. Define a group that contains the above system statuses.

2. Assign this group to the relation "WC application (WA,1) -> Operational WCD (WD,O)".

19.7.1.24.6 Functions Dependent on Approval Status

19.7.1.24.6.1 Assignment Forbidden

Use

In this IMG activity, depending on the approval status, you limit how a WCM object can beassigned to another WCM object.

Requirements

You have grouped the approval statuses into one group under Group Approval Status.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 548

Example

An Operational WCD which is eitherred or yellow may not be assigned to a WCapplication.

1. You define a group that contains the above approval statuses.

2. You assign this group to the relation "WC application (WA,1) -> Operational WCD(WD,O)".

19.7.1.24.6.2 Creation Using Templates Forbidden

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Use

In this IMG activity, depending on the approval status, you limit how a WCM object can beused as a template.

Requirements

You have grouped the approval statuses under Group Approval Status.

Example

A WC application, which is eitherred or yellow , may not be used as a template.

1. Define a group that contains the above approval statuses.

2. Assign this group to the WC application.

19.7.1.24.6.3 Changes to Additional Data Forbidden

Use

In this IMG activity, depending on the approval status, you limit which additional data can bechanged for a WCM object.

Requirements

1. You have grouped the additional data into one group under Group Additional Data.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 549

2. You have grouped the approval statuses into one group under Group Approval Status.

Example

The additional dataPartner and Catalogs cannot be changed, if the WC application isgreen .

1. Define a group that contains the above additional data.2. Define a group that contains the above approval statuses.

3. Assign both of these groups to the WC application.

19.7.1.25 Lineup

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.7.1.25 Lineup

19.7.1.25.1 Maintain Number Ranges for Lineups

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the number ranges for Lineups. You can get the system toassign a number to Lineups (internal number range) or you can assign a number from within anexternal number range yourself.

Activities

Create an external number range and an internal number range for Lineups.

Notes

If you manage Lineups in different plants, and therefore want to use separate number ranges,you can create separate number ranges for each plant and then assign them.

19.7.1.25.2 Maintain Usages for Lineups

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the usage for Lineups.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 550

Activities

Maintain the usage and assign it to the Lineups.

19.7.1.25.3 Define Field Selection for Lineups

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the field selection for Lineups.


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________






- Modif iable Fie lds- For the modifiable fields, use indicators to specify how the individual fields in the screen

are represented. You have the following options:








Activities


________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 551










SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________
















________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 552


19.7.1.26 View Profiles

19.7.1.26.1 Define View Profiles

Use

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



In this IMG activity you define the view profiles for WCM objects. You can use a view profileto set up the entire header data screen of a WCM object according to individual criteria.

A range of subscreens are available for this purpose:

- Numerous data screens with related fields

- Six tabstrips with freely definable tabs.

You can define a view profile with either two or four levels:

- You need a two-level view profile if you do not want to use tab pages on the header datascreen (see level 1-2 below).

- You need a four-level view profile if want to use only tab pages or mainly tab pages onthe header data screen (see level 1-4 below).

You define view profiles as follows:

- On the first level , you define the basic definition of the view profile (for example, nameand description). The maximum width of the header data screen is predefined by thesystem and cannot be changed.

- On the second level , you assign each of the desired areas (up to six) of the header datascreen to a subscreen - either a data screen or a tabstrip. For each assigned subscreen of

the header screen, you have the following options:- Assignment of a sequence number, to define the vertical sequence of the assigned

subscreens (mandatory entry)

- Display of a closing blank line below the assigned subscreen (optional entry)

- Display of a border with a title around the assigned subscreen (optional entry)Note that this option is only used for data screens (not for tabstrips).

- Positioning of the subscreen on the right-hand side of the screen area (optional entry)Note that this option is only used for data screens (not for tabstrips). In addition, thefollowing conditions must be fulfilled:

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 553

- The width of the subscreen (including any border) doesnot exceed half of themaximum screen width of the header data.- The subscreen with the next lowest sequence number is positioned on the left-handside of the screen and also has a width that doesnot exceed half of the maximumscreen width.

- On the third level (only relevant for screen areas to which a tabstrip is assigned), enterthe desired tab pages and their sequence. For each specified tab page, you have thefollowing options:

- Definition of a tab page title (mandatory entry)- Definition of an icon for the tab page (optional entry)

- Deactivation of the tab page as a (temporary) alternative to final deletion (optionalentry)

- On the fourth level , you assign each of the desired areas (up to six) for a tab page toone data screen. For each data screen assigned to a tab page, you have the followingoptions:

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Assignment of a sequence number, to define the vertical sequence of the assigned datascreens (mandatory entry)

- Display of a closing blank line below the assigned data screen (optional entry)

- Display of a border with a title around the assigned data screen (optional entry)

- Positioning of the data screen on the right-hand side of the screen area (optionalentry)Note that the following conditions must be fulfilled:- The width of the data screen (including any border) doesnot exceed half of themaximum screen width of a tab.- The data screen with the next lowest sequence number is positioned on the left-handside of the screen and also has a width that doesnot exceed half of the maximumscreen width.

For the (optional) titles of individual data screens, the internal description is used. However,you can also define individual titles at plant level.

Requirements

Note that the use of individual data screens can be coupled to the following prerequisites:

- The use can be restricted to specific WCM objects. This kind of restriction is visible inthe input help for the subscreens. For example, data screens for work and requirementscan only be used for applications.

- The processing of further IMG activities can be a prerequisite for use. For example, datascreens for work and requirements can only be used if you have defined the correspondingwork and requirements.

If you assign a data screen that cannot be used for a WCM object, the assignment is ignoredat runtime, so that the data screen is not displayed for the WCM object.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 554

Activities

Maintain the view profiles and assign them to the WCM objects.

Note that the standard Customizing settings for work clearance management contain sampleprofiles. If you require customer-specific view profiles, we recommend that you copy the sampleprofiles, rather than change them.

19.7.1.26.2 Assign View Profiles

Use

In this IMG activity, you define for each WCM object which view profile is relevant for the

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



structure of the header data screen.

Notes

If you do not assign a view profile to a WCM object, the header data screen has the followingvertical structure:

- Screen area 1: Identification of the WCM object

- Screen area 2: General data of the WCM object (with closing blank line)

- Screen area 3: Reference object of the WCM object (with border, title, and closing blankline)

- Screen area 4: Tabstrip with the following tab pages:

- Responsibi li ties

- Location Data

- Planning Data (not for WCD templates)

Requirements

You have defined the relevant view profiles.

Activities

Assign the view profiles to the WCM objects.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 555

19.7.2 Approvals

19.7.2.1 Standard

19.7.2.1.1 Define Permit Categories

Use

In this Customizing activity, you define the permit categories. You can use the permit categoryto group permits together. Every permit must be assigned to a permit category.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Example

You want to group your permits together into:

- Wor k permits

- Access per mits

To do this, you must define two permit categories and assign each permit to a permit category.

19.7.2.1.2 Maintain Approvals

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the approvals you need for work clearance management.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 556

19.7.2.2 Enhancements

19.7.2.2.1 Assign Approval

Use

In this IMG activity, you assign approvals to the WCM objects and define the following:

- Whether the approval is obligatoryIf so, it cannot be deleted.

- Whether the approval is copied to the WCM object automatically, once the WCM object iscreated.

- An approval is issued automatically, as soon as the corresponding prerequisites are fulfilled.

- Which approvals influence the approval status.

Wh h h l i i ll i d h WCM bj h b i f h

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



- Whether the approval is automatically copied to the WCM object on the basis of thereference object

Activities

Assign the approvals to the WCM objects and maintain the attributes of the assigned approvals.

19.7.2.2.2 Define Hierarchy for Approvals

Use

In this IMG activity, you maintain the hierarchy of approvals belonging to a WCM object. Youcan also define that approvals issued on the basis of the hierarchy level are automaticallyrevoked.

Requirements

You have assigned approvals to the WCM objects.

Example

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 557

Approval A is to be issued prior to approval B.

Allocate level 1 to approval A and level 2 to approval B. The system will then not allow theapproval at the higher level to be issued until the approval at the lower level has been issued.

When you deactivate approvals at lower levels, then set the corresponding indicator if you alsowish to deactivate approvals at higher levels.

19.7.2.2.3 Define Cross-Document Approval Process

Use

In this IMG activity, you establish settings for cross-object maintenance of approvals.

Within anapproval category you can establish settings so that an approval cannot be issued for acertain WCM object unless an approval was also issued for an assigned WCM object. To dothis you must set approvals as relevant to processing

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



this, you must set approvals as relevant to processing.

The direction of a dependency can be either to a higher-level WCM object, to a lower-levelWCM object, or neutral.

The direction of the dependency indicates whether approvals from higher-level WCM objects("UP") or permits from lower-level WCM objects ("DN") must be taken into account when an

approval is to be issued.Requirements


Notes

Dependencies are ignored if permits in a higher-level WCM object are assigned to approvals ina lower-level WCM object. This is also the case if approvals in a lower-level WCM object areassigned to approvals in a higher-level WCM object.

19.7.2.2.4 Block Issuing of Approvals

19.7.2.2.4.1 Define Dependent on System Status

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 558

Use

In this IMG activity, you establish settings for linking the issue of approvals to the systemstatus of the WCM object.

Example

You wish to establish settings so that an approval for an Operational WCD is not to be issuedunless it has been completely tagged.

Assign the status tagged to this approval. In this way, the person responsible for taggingcannot issue the approval until the Operational WCD has the appropriate system status.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.7.2.2.4.2 Define Dependent on User Status

Use

In this section, you make the settings, with which you can couple the issuing of approvals tothe user status of the WCM object.

Requirements

In Customizing for work clearance management, you have performed the following IMGactivities:

1. Maintain Status Profiles

2. Assign Status Profile

Example

You want an approval to be issued for a work approval only if a specific user status is active.

To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Define this user status for the status object of the work approval.

2. Assign this user status to the dependent approval.The person responsible can therefore only issue approval, if the work approval has thisuser status.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 559

19.7.2.2.4.3 Define Dependent on Assignments

Use

In this IMG activity, you establish settings for linking the issue of approvals to the assignmentof additional WCM objects. Approvals cannot be issued until the appropriate assignment hasbeen made.

The type of assignment required depends on settings established in the activity DefineCross-Document Approval Process .

Requirements


SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Example

You want to configure the system such that an approval for a WC application cannot be issueduntil an Operational WCD has been assigned.

Activate the assignment function for the approval of the WC application and ensure that a linkto lower-level WCM objects exists.

19.7.2.2.4.4 Define Depending on Validity

Use

In this IMG activity, you make the settings with which you can couple the issuing of approvalsto the validity of WCM objects. This means that the issuing of these approvals is only possibleif the WCM object is valid.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 560

19.7.2.3 Activate Work Clearance Management for Maintenance Orders

Use

In this IMG activity, you make settings for approvals. You use these to activate the workclearance management functions for maintenance orders. Orders for which work clearancemanagement must be activated are called WCM-relevant orders.

You must indicate which maintenance processing approvals require work clearance management.You then assign the object type and object subtype for the application.

By assigning a permit of this type to a maintenance order, you activate work clearancemanagement.

Give the permit that activates work clearance management an appropriate name, such as thename of the desired application.

Requirements

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________




Notes

Note that work clearance management for maintenance orders is also activated by operationswith control key WCM.

19.7.2.4 Define Approval Groups

Use

In this IMG activity, you specify which approvals are grouped together in an approval group.

Requirements

You have activated work clearance management at operation level in the IMG activity MaintainApplication Profile.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 561

19.7.2.5 Assign Processor for Approval Workflow

Use

In this IMG activity, you make settings that are important for the workflow that issuesapprovals.

Information about approvals (such as those approvals waiting to be issued or that have been

issued) can be passed on in the system via workflows.You can allocate the agent responsible for work items via general allocations in the workflow.

Another option is to directly assign an agent to a WCM object.

Activities

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



You only need to make these settings if you are implementing the approval workflow.

Example

If user BROWN is responsible for granting approval A in the work clearance document

(of which she/he is informed via workflow) then user BROWN must be entered as the agentfor that particular approval.

19.7.3 Lockout/Tagout

19.7.3.1 Maintain Usage for Work Clearance Documents

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the usage for your work clearance documents. Depending onthe usage (for example, lockout/tagout, simulation, test run), an Operational WCD behavesdifferently in the following ways:- Type of operational cycle


- Tagging cycle with temporary untagging cycle

- Test cycle

- Tagging cycle without temporary untagging cycleIn an operational phase you can also have certain operational steps (for example, tagging)performed automatically by the system.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 562

- Approval-dependent switch

- If a phase-specific approval is not issued, the switch is only blocked in this specificphase.

- If a cross-phase approval is not issued, the switch is blocked regardless of thecurrent operational phase.

- Operational protection (protected area)

- Multiple use of operational tags

The criteria for multiple use of operational tags are defined in the application profile.- Mobile processing of operational lists

Note that there are restrictions on the reduction of the operational cycle if mobileprocessing is active. This means that the first status of each operational phase, the statusthat signifies the activity, isalways visible.

A i i i

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Activities

Maintain the usage and assign it to work clearance documents.

Example

If you want an Operational WCD to only be switched if approval A has been issued, youspecify approval A as the cross-phase approval in the usage.

19.7.3.2 Operational Steps

19.7.3.2.1 General Settings

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the general settings for operational steps.

Requirements

You have created operational steps under Define Operational Steps.

________________________ ____________________________ __________

SAP AG 563

Note

If you select the processing ruleOptional , the user does not have to assign an operational stepto an item. However, the system requires an assignment in order to automatically generateoperational steps. For this reason, you must specify default values for operational steps.

We recommend the use of synchronous operational steps.

19.7.3.2.2 Define Operational Steps

Use

In this IMG activity, you define which operational steps can be used.

You can also define the following:

- The switch for an operational step is only possible if the approval assigned to thei l h b i d

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



operational step has been issued.

- An approval cannot be issued until the assigned operational step has been performed.

- Approvals should be assigned automatically.

19.7.3.3 Operational Cycle

19.7.3.3.1 Maintain Operational Groups

Use

In this IMG activity, you define the operational groups for your company. Operational groupsserve to categorize operational conditions.

Rules for conflict verification are defined within the operational group.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 564



You must allocate the operational condition to an operational group. The operational conditioncan be further differentiated using an operational type.

In the case of untagging, you can specify a default value for the operational condition.

In addition, you must determine:

- Whether the tagging condition requires physical blocking.

- Whether a tag has to be printed.

In the Use as column, you must determine whether the operational condition is to be used fortagging, untagging, or for both processes.

Requirements

In Customizing for work clearance management you have performed the following IMGactivities:

1. Maintain Operational Groups

2. Maintain Operational Conditions

3 M i i O i l T

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



3. Maintain Operational Types

Notes

The settings can be checked to make sure they do not contradict each other.

19.7.3.3.5 Check Consistency of Operational Data

Use

You can use this IMG activity to check if the data settings for the switch are correct.

Requirements

You have defined the operational data that is valid in your company.

Activities

Start the check for each planning plant. Execute the check for all rules to ensure that yoursettings are consistent.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 566

The switch data must be checked, because all checks and simulations are based on thesesettings.

19.7.3.3.6 Define Print Format for Operational Tags

Use

In this IMG activity, you define default print formats for der operational tags.

By assigning an operational group and an operational type, the program can automaticallydetermine a default value.

Requirements

You have already created print formats for the operational tags.

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.7.3.4 Maintain Conflict Rules

In this IMG activity, you specify the user-defined conflict rules that are used in the operationalcycle.

The conflict rules are defined in an operational group. Within the operational group, for allcombinations of operational conditions/ -types and their subsequent operational conditions/-types,you define whether that particular combination:

- Is allowed

- Should yield a warning

- Is not allowed

If no rule has been defined for a combination, the program interprets this combination as anerror.

As soon as you have specified a user-specific conflict rule, the conflict verification is no longerbased on the general confict rules. Conflict verification now takes place on the basis of theuser- specific rule.

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 567

Requirements

You must first perform the IMG activities:

- Maintain Operational Conditions

- Check Consistency of Operational Conditions.

19.7.3.5 Operational Classes

19.7.3.5.1 Maintain Operational Classes

SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



Use

In this IMG activity you define the operational classes.Operational classes are used to group

togethertechnical objects that have the sameoperational conditions in work clearance management.In this way, you can ensure that only operational conditions that are relevant to the technicalobjects can be used in the work clearance documents.

Activities

For the groups of technical objects, define the operational classes for which you want toimplement restrictions when maintaining operational conditions.

Example

If you wish to permit only the operational conditions "open" and "closed" for certain type of valve, then create an operational class for these valves.You then assign the operational conditions you require, then the technical objects that belong tothat type of valve.

19.7.3.5.2 Assign Technical Objects

Use

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 568



SAP System ________________________ ____________________________ __________



________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG 571

Plant Maintenance and Customer Service



________________________ ____________________________ __________

CopyrightCopyright(c) 2013 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Neither this document nor any part of it may be copied or reproduced in any formor by any means or translated into another language, without the prior consent of SAP AG. The information contained in this document is subject to change withoutnotice.

SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG.

All other products which are mentioned in this documentation are registered or notregistered trademarks of their respective companies.



19 Plant Maint enance and Customer Service 119.1 Master Data in Plant Maintenance and Customer Service 119.1 .1 Basic Settings 119.1 .1.1 Maintain Authorizations for Master Data 119.1 .1.2 Define User Status 2619.1 .1.3 Create Authorization Keys for User Status Authorizations 2819.1 .1.4 Define Currency for Maintenance Statistics 2919.1.1.5 Permits 3019.1 .1.5 .1 Define Permit Categories 3019.1 .1.5 .2 Define Permit Groups 3019.1 .1.5 .3 Set List Editing for Permits 3119.1 .1.6 Measuring Points, Counters and Measurement Documents 3319.1 .1.6 .1 Make System Settings for Measuring Points and Measurement

Documents 3319.1 .1.6 .2 Define Measuring Point Categories 3519.1 .1.6 .3 Create Number Ranges for Measuring Points 3619.1 .1.6 .4 Create Number Ranges for Measurement Documents 3619 1 1 6 5 D fi Fi ld S l ti f M i P i t d M t

Release Notes Table of Contents SAP AG ________________________ ____________________________ __________



19.1 .1.6 .5 Define Field Selection for Measuring Points and MeasurementDocuments 37

19.1 .1.6 .6 Set List Editing for Measuring Point Lists 39

19.1 .1.6 .7 Set List Editing for Measurement Document Lists 4119.1.1.7 Warranties 4219.1 .1.7 .1 Check Warranty Categories 4219.1 .1.7 .2 Define Warranty Types 4319.1 .1.7 .3 Define Number Ranges for Warranty Types 4319.1 .1.7 .4 Maintain Transaction Start Default Values for Sample

Warranties 4419.1 .1.7 .5 Define Warranty Counters 4519.1 .1.8 Partners 4519.1 .1.8 .1 Define Partner Determination Procedure and Partner Function 4519.1 .1.8 .2 Copy Partner Functions to Master and Movement Data 4619.1 .1.8 .3 Define Field Selection for List Display of Customer Data 4719.1 .1.8 .4 Define Field Selection for List Display of Vendor Data 48

19.1 .1.8 .5 Define Field Selection for List Display of Personnel Data 4819.1 .1.8 .6 Define Field Selection for List Display of Contact People 4919.1 .1.8 .7 Define Field Selection for List Display of Organizational

Units 5019.1 .1.8 .8 Define Field Selection for List Display of Positions 5019.1 .1.8 .9 Define Field Selection for List Display of User Data 5119.1 .1.8 .10 Define Field Selection for List Display of Address Data 5219.1 .1.8 .11 Field Selection for Partner Addresses 5219.1 .1.9 Search Helps in Plant Maintenance and Customer Service 53

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG iii

19.1 .1.1 0 Define Object Information Keys 5319.1 .2 Technical Objects 5619.1 .2.1 General Data 5619.1 .2.1 .1 Define Types of Technical Objects 5619.1 .2.1 .2 Define Plant Sections 5619.1 .2.1 .3 Define Planner Groups 5719.1 .2.1 .4 Define ABC Indicators 5719.1 .2.1 .5 Define Authorization Groups 5819.1 .2.1 .6 Set View Profiles for Technical Objects 5919.1 .2.1 .7 Define Object Information Keys 5919.1 .2.1 .8 Define Selection Procedure for Structural Display and BOMs 6119.1 .2.2 Functional Locations 6219.1 .2.2 .1 Create Structure Indicator for Reference

Locations/Functional Locations 6219.1 .2.2 .2 Alternative Labeling of Functional Locations 6319.1 .2.2 .2.1 Activate Alternative Labeling 6419.1 .2.2 .2.2 Define Labeling Systems for Functional Locations 6519 1 2 2 3 D fi C f R f F i l L i 65




19.1 .2.2 .3 Define Category of Reference Functional Location 6519.1 .2.2 .4 Define Structural Display for Reference Functional Locations 6619.1 .2.2 .5 Define Category of Functional Location 67

19.1 .2.2 .6 Define Field Selection for Data Screen for ReferenceFunctional Locations 68

19.1 .2.2 .7 Define Structural Display for Functional Locations 6819.1 .2.2 .8 Define Field Selection for Functional Locations 6819.1 .2.2 .9 Set List Editing for Reference Functional Locations 7119.1 .2.2 .10 Set List Editing for Functional Locations 7219.1 .2.2 .11 Set List Editing for Functional Locations in Service 7419.1 .2.2 .12 Field Selection for Multi-Level List Displays of Functional

Locations 7519.1 .2.2 .12. 1 Define Field Selection for Functional Location Fields 7619.1 .2.2 .12. 2 Define Field Selection for Equipment Usage Data Fields 7619.1 .2.2 .12. 3 Define Field Selection for Equipment Master Data Fields 7719.1 .2.2 .12. 4 Define Field Selection for Partner Data Fields 7719.1 .2.2 .12. 5 Define Field Selection for Notification Data Fields 7719.1 .2.2 .12. 6 Define Field Selection for Order Data Fields 7819.1 .2.2 .12. 7 Define Field Selection for Class Data Fields 7819.1 .2.2 .12. 8 Define Field Selection for Characteristic Data Fields 7819.1 .2.2 .12. 9 Define Field Selection for Document Management Fields 7919.1 .2.2 .12. 10 Define Field Selection for Object Link Data Fields 7919.1 .2.2 .12. 11 Define Field Selection for Measuring Point and Counter

Fields 79

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG iv

19.1 .2.2 .12. 12 Define Field Selection for Measurement Document andCounter

Reading Fields 7919.1 .2.2 .12. 13 Define Field Selection for Permit Fields 8019.1 .2.2 .13 Field Selection for List Displays of Multi-Level Ref.

Functional Locations 8019.1 .2.2 .13. 1 Define Field Selection for Fields of the Reference

Functional Location 8019.1 .2.2 .13. 2 Define Field Selection for Reference Measuring Points and

-Counters 8019.1 .2.2 .13. 3 Define Field Selection for Class Data Fields 8119.1 .2.2 .13. 4 Define Field Selection for Characteristic Data Fields 8119.1 .2.2 .13. 5 Define Field Selection for Document Management Fields 8219.1 .2.3 Equipment 8219.1 .2.3 .1 Equipment Categories 8219.1 .2.3 .1.1 Maintain Equiment Category 8319.1 .2.3 .1.2 Define Additional Business Views for Equipment Categories 8419.1 .2.3 .1.3 Define Number Ranges 8419.1 .2.3 .2 Equipment Usage Period 85




19.1 .2.3 .2 Equipment Usage Period 8519.1 .2.3 .2.1 Usage History Update 8519.1 .2.3 .2.2 Define History-Related Fields 86

19.1 .2.3 .2.3 Define Installation at Functional Location 8619.1 .2.3 .2.4 Field Selection for Usage List 8719.1 .2.3 .3 Assign User Status Profile to Equipment Category 8719.1 .2.3 .4 Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Equipment Category 8819.1 .2.3 .5 Define Field Selection for the Equipment Master Record 8819.1 .2.3 .6 Allow Multilingual Text Maintenance for Each Equipment

Category 9019.1 .2.3 .7 Define List Structure for Structural Display 9119.1 .2.3 .8 Define List Stucture for Structural Display of Installed

Bases 9119.1 .2.3 .9 Set List Editing for Equipment 9219.1 .2.3 .10 Set List Editing for Equipment in Customer Service 9319.1 .2.3 .11 Define Field Selection for Multi-Level List Displays of

Equipment 9519.1 .2.3 .11. 1 Define Field Selection for Equipment Master Data Fields 9619.1 .2.3 .11. 2 Define Field Selection for Equipment Usage Data Fields 9619.1 .2.3 .11. 3 Define Field Selection for Functional Location Fields 9619.1 .2.3 .11. 4 Define Field Selection for Partner Data Fields 9719.1 .2.3 .11. 5 Define Field Selection for Notification Data Fields 9719.1 .2.3 .11. 6 Define Field Selection for Order Data Fields 9719.1 .2.3 .11. 7 Define Field Selection for Class Data Fields 9819.1 .2.3 .11. 8 Define Field Selection for Characteristic Data Fields 98

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG v

19.1 .2.3 .11. 9 Define Field Selection for Document Management Fields 9819.1 .2.3 .11. 10 Define Field Selection for Object Link Data Fields 9819.1 .2.3 .11. 11 Define Field Selection for Measuring Point and Counter

Fields 9919.1 .2.3 .11. 12 Define Field Selection for Measurement Document andCounter

Reading Fields 9919.1 .2.3 .11. 13 Define Field Selection for Permit Fields 9919.1 .2.4 Settings for Fleet Management 10019.1 .2.4 .1 Assign View Profile and Equipment Categories to Fleet Object Types 10019.1 .2.4 .2 Define Consumable Types 10119.1 .2.4 .3 Define Usage Types for Fleet Objects 10119.1 .2.4 .4 Define Engine Types for Fleet Objects 10219.1 .2.4 .5 Make Settings for Units of Measurement for Monitoring of

Consumption 10219.1 .2.4 .6 Define Special Measurement Positions for Fleet Objects 10319.1 .2.4 .7 Define Calculation Method for Fleet Consumption Values 104




p19.1 .2.4 .8 Set Field Selection for Specific Fields in Fleet Management 10519.1 .2.4 .9 Set List Processing for Fleet Management Objects 10719.1 .2.4 .10 Set Reference Object Screen for Vehicles 10919.1 .2.4 .11 Consumption-Relevant Counter Reading Update 10919.1 .2.4 .11. 1 Define Tolerance Check for Usage Control 10919.1 .2.4 .11. 2 Create Gas Station 11019.1 .2.4 .11. 3 Assign Auxiliary Materials and Consumables 11019.1 .2.4 .11. 4 Define Key and Cost Object for Updating Material Documents 11119.1 .2.5 Object Links 11119.1 .2.5 .1 Define Object Types 11119.1 .2.5 .2 Define Media for Object Links 11219.1 .2.5 .3 Define Number Ranges for Object Links 11219.1 .2.5 .4 Set List Editing for Object Links from Equipment 11319.1 .2.5 .5 Set List Editing for Object Links from Functional Locations 11519.1 .2.6 Define Transaction-Based Default Values for Object Types 116

19.1 .2.7 Material Data Settings for Plant Maintenance 11719.1 .2.7 .1 Define Structural Display for Material Data 11719.1 .2.7 .2 Set List Editing for Material Data 11819.1 .2.8 Serial Number Management 11919.1 .2.8 .1 Define Serial Number Profiles 12019.1 .2.8 .2 Define Serialization Att ributes for Movement Types 12119.1 .2.8 .3 Define Default Equipment Categories for Serial Numbers 12219.1 .2.8 .4 Deactivate Lock for Internal Assignment of Serial Numbers 12319.1 .2.8 .5 Transfer of Stock Check Indicator to Serial Numbers 123

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG vi

19.1 .2.8 .6 Set List Editing for Serial Numbers 12419.1 .2.8 .7 Field Selection for Multi-Level List Display of Serial

Numbers 12519.1 .2.8 .7.1 Define Field Selection for Goods Movement Fields 12619.1 .2.8 .7.2 Define Field Selection for Delivery Fields 12619.1 .2.8 .7.3 Define Field Selection for Inspection Lot Fields 12619.1 .2.8 .7.4 Define Field Selection for Sales Order Fields 12719.1 .2.8 .7.5 Define Field Selection for Maintenance Order Fields 12719.1 .2.8 .7.6 Define Field Selection for Maintenance Notification Fields 12719.1 .2.8 .7.7 Define Field Selection for Refurbishment Order Fields 12819.1 .2.8 .7.8 Define Field Selection for Production Order Fields 12819.1 .2.8 .7.9 Define Field Selection for Inventory Data Fields 12819.1 .2.8 .8 Archive Serial Number History 12919.1 .3 Bills of Material 12919.1 .3.1 Control Data for Bills of Material 13019.1 .3.1 .1 Set Modification Parameters 13019.1 .3.1 .2 Define BOM Status 13119.1 .3.1 .3 Define Default Values 13219.1 .3.2 General Data 133




19.1 .3.2 .1 BOM Usage 13319.1 .3.2 .1.1 Define BOM Usages 134

19.1 .3.2 .1.2 Define Default Values for Item Status 13419.1 .3.2 .1.3 Define Copy Default Values for Item Status 13519.1 .3.2 .2 Define Valid Material Types for BOM Header 13619.1 .3.2 .3 Define Responsible Designers/Laboratories 13619.1 .3.2 .4 Define History Requirement for Bills of Material 13719.1.3.3 Item Data 13719.1 .3.3 .1 Define Item Categories 13819.1 .3.3 .2 Define Object Types 13919.1 .3.3 .3 Define Material Types Allowed for BOM Item 13919.1 .3.3 .4 Maintain Variable-Size Item Formulas 14019.1 .3.3 .5 Define Spare Part Indicators 14119.1 .3.3 .6 Define Material Provision Indicators 14119.1 .3.4 Determination of Alternative Bills of Material 142

19.1 .3.4 .1 Define Priorities for BOM Usage 14219.1 .3.4 .2 PM-Specific Selection Criteria for Alternative Determination 14319.1 .3.4 .2.1 Define Selection Criteria for Alternative Determination 14319.1 .3.4 .2.2 Check Selection Term for Alternative Determination 14419.1 .3.4 .3 Define Alternative Selection by Material 14419.1 .3.5 Make User-Specific Settings 14519 .2 Maint enance Plans, Work Centers, Task Lists and PRTs 14 519.2 .1 Basic Settings 146

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG vii

19.2 .1.1 Maintain Authorizations for Planning 14619.2 .1.2 Define Plant Sections 17019.2 .1.3 Define Maintenance Planner Groups 17019.2 .1.4 Define ABC Indicators 17119.2 .2 Maintenance Plans 17119.2 .2.1 Set Maintenance Plan Categories 17119.2 .2.2 Define Number Ranges for Maintenance Plans 17219.2 .2.3 Define Number Ranges for Maintenance Items 17319.2 .2.4 Define Sort Fields for Maintenance Plan 17419.2 .2.5 Define Field Selection for Maintenance Plan 17419.2 .2.6 Define Field Selection for Operation Data 17519.2 .2.7 Set List Editing for Maintenance Plan Overall Overview 17619.2 .2.8 Set List Editing for Maintenance Items 17719.2 .2.9 Set List Editing for Maintenance Plans 17919.2 .2.1 0 Set List Editing for Maintenance Item Dates 18019.2 .2.1 1 Configure Special Functions for Maintenance Planning 18219.2 .3 Work Centers 18219.2 .3.1 General Data 182




19.2 .3.1 .1 Define Work Center Types and Link to Task List Application 18219.2 .3.1 .2 Define Field Selection 183

19.2 .3.1 .3 Set Parameters 18619.2 .3.1 .4 Define Standard Value Keys 18619.2 .3.1 .5 Define Employees Responsible for Work Centers 18719.2 .3.1 .6 Create Default Work Center 18719.2 .3.2 Task List Data 18819.2 .3.2 .1 Define Task List Usage Keys 18819.2 .3.2 .2 Maintain Control Keys 18919.2 .3.2 .3 Define Suitabilities 19019.2 .3.3 Configure Screen Sequence for Work Center 19019.2 .4 Task Lists 19119.2 .4.1 General Data 19119.2 .4.1 .1 Maintain Task List Status 19119.2 .4.1 .2 Define Task List Usage 192

19.2 .4.1 .3 Configure Planner Group 19219.2.4.2 Control Data 19219.2 .4.2 .1 Define Number Ranges for General Maintenance Task Lists 19219.2 .4.2 .2 Define Number Ranges for Equipment Task Lists 19319.2 .4.2 .3 Define Number Ranges for Task Lists for Functional Locations 19319.2 .4.2 .4 Define Profiles wit h Default Values 19419.2 .4.2 .5 Define Presett ing for Free Assignment of Material 19419.2 .4.2 .6 Define Field Selection 195

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG viii

19.2 .4.3 Operation Data 19719.2 .4.3 .1 Maintain Control Keys 19719.2 .4.3 .2 Maintain Suitabilities 19819.2 .4.3 .3 Define User Fields 19919.2 .4.4 Set List Editing for Task Lists 19919.2 .4.5 Presetting for List Display of Multi-Level Task Lists 20019.2 .4.5 .1 Make Field Selection for Functional Location Fields 20119.2 .4.5 .2 Make Field Selection for Equipment Data Fields 20119.2 .4.5 .3 Make Field Selection for Task List Header Data Fields 20119.2 .4.5 .4 Make Field Selection for Task List Operation Data Fields 20119.2 .4.5 .5 Make Field Selection for Task List Sub-Operation Data Fields 20119.2 .4.5 .6 Make Field Selection for Task List Relationship Fields 20219.2 .4.5 .7 Make Field Selection for Task List Component Fields 20219.2 .4.5 .8 Make Field Selection for Task List PRT Fields 20219.2 .4.5 .9 Make Field Selection for Task List Maintenance Package

Fields 20219.2 .4.5 .10 Make Field Selection for Task List Inspection Characteristic Fields 20 219.2 .4.5 .11 Make Field Selection for Task List Service Package Fields 203




19.2 .4.5 .12 Make Field Selection for Task List Object Dependency Fields 20319.2 .4.6 Interface for Procurement Using Catalogs (OCI) 203

19.2 .4.6 .1 Define Catalogs 20319.2 .4.6 .2 Assign Catalog to Task List Type 20419.2 .4.6 .3 Convert HTML fields to SAP fields 20419.2 .4.6 .4 Convert HTML Field Values 20719.2 .4.6 .5 Define Conversion Modules 20719.2 .5 Production Resources/Tools 20819.2 .5.1 General Data 20919.2 .5.1 .1 Define PRT Authorization Group 20919.2 .5.1 .2 Define PRT Status 20919.2 .5.1 .3 Define Task List Usage Keys 21019.2 .5.1 .4 Define PRT Group Keys 21019.2 .5.2 Production Resource/Tool Assignments 21119.2 .5.2 .1 Define PRT Control Keys 211

19.2.5.2 .2 Formulas 21119.2 .5.2 .2.1 Set Formula Parameters 21119.2 .5.2 .2.2 Configure Formula Definition 21219.2 .6 Service Contracts 21219.2 .6.1 Set List Editing for Service Contracts 21219.3 Maintenance and Service Processing 21419.3 .1 Basic Settings 21419.3 .1.1 Maintain Authorizations for Processing 214

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG ix



19.3 .2.2 .1.4 Set Field Selection for Notifications 27319.3 .2.2 .1.5 Define Number Ranges 27519.3 .2.2 .1.6 Define Transaction Start Values 27619.3 .2.2 .1.7 Assign Standard Texts for Short Messages to Notification

Types 27619.3 .2.2 .1.8 Allowed Change of Notification Type 27619.3 .2.2 .1.9 Assign Notification Types to Order Types 27719.3 .2.2 .1.1 0 Define Order Types and Special Notification Parameters 27819.3.2.2 .2 Notification Content 27919.3.2.2 .2.1 Maintain Catalogs 27919.3 .2.2 .2.2 Display Catalog Directory wit h All Sub-Items 28019.3 .2.2 .2.3 Define Catalog Profile 28119.3 .2.2 .2.4 Change Catalogs and Catalog Profile for Notification Type 28219.3.2.2 .3 Partners 28219.3 .2.2 .3.1 Define Partner Determination Procedure and Partner Function 28 219.3 .2.2 .3.2 Field Selection for List Display of Partner Data 28419.3 .2.2 .3.2 .1 Define Field Selection for List Display of Customer Data 28419.3 .2.2 .3.2 .2 Define Field Selection for List Display of Vendor Data 28519.3 .2.2 .3.2 .3 Define Field Selection for List Display of Personnel Data 28519 3 2 2 3 2 4 Define Field Selection for List Displa of Contact People 286




19.3 .2.2 .3.2 .4 Define Field Selection for List Display of Contact People 28619.3 .2.2 .3.2 .5 Define Field Selection for List Display of Organizational

Units 28619.3 .2.2 .3.2 .6 Define Field Selection for List Display of Positions 28719.3 .2.2 .3.2 .7 Define Field Selection for List Display of User Data 28719.3 .2.2 .3.2 .8 Define Field Selection for List Display of Address Data 28819.3 .2.3 Notification Processing 28919.3 .2.3 .1 Response Time Monitoring 28919.3 .2.3 .1.1 Define Priorities 28919.3 .2.3 .1.2 Define Response Monitoring 29019.3 .2.3 .2 Additional Functions 29119.3.2.3 .2.1 Define Action Box 29119.3 .2.3 .2.2 Define Follow-Up Actions for Tasks 29219.3 .2.3 .3 Notification Print Control 29419.3 .2.3 .3.1 Define Shop Papers, Forms and Output Programs 294

19.3.2.3 .3.2 Define Printer 29519.3 .2.3 .4 User Status for Notifications 29619.3 .2.3 .4.1 Define Status Profile 29619.3 .2.3 .4.2 Create Authorization Keys for User Status Authorizations 29919.3 .2.3 .4.3 Maintain Selection Profiles 30019.3.2.3 .5 Object Information 30219.3 .2.3 .5.1 Define Object Information Keys 30219.3 .2.3 .5.2 Assign Object Information Keys to Notification Types 304

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xi



Types 32819.3 .3.1 .21. 3 Default Values for Maintenance Activit y Type for Each Order

Type 32919.3 .3.1 .22 Costing Data for Maintenance and Service Orders 32919.3 .3.1 .22. 1 Maintain Costing Sheet 33019.3 .3.1 .22. 2 Maintain Costing Variants 33519.3 .3.1 .22. 3 Define Valuation Variants 33719.3 .3.1 .22. 4 Assign Costing Parameters and Results Analysis Keys 33919.3 .3.1 .23 Define Change Docs, Collective Purc. Req. Indicator,

Operation No. Interval 33919.3.3.1 .24 Set Workflow for Orders 34019.3 .3.1 .25 Goods Movements for Order 34219.3 .3.1 .25. 1 Define Documentation for Goods Movements for the Order 34219.3 .3.1 .25. 2 Set List Editing for Goods Movements for Orders 34219.3 .3.1 .25. 3 Reorganization of List for Goods Movements for Orders 34419.3 .3.1 .26 Availability Check for Material, PRTs, and Capacities 34419.3 .3.1 .26. 1 Define Checking Rules 34419.3 .3.1 .26. 2 Define Scope of Check 34519.3 .3.1 .26. 3 Define Inspection Control 34519.3 .3.1 .27 Assign Standard Texts for Short Messages to Order Types 347




19.3 .3.1 .27 Assign Standard Texts for Short Messages to Order Types 34719.3 .3.1 .28 Basic Order View 34719.3.3.1 .28.1 Define View Profiles 34719.3 .3.1 .28. 2 Assign View Profiles to Order Types 34819.3 .3.2 General Data 34919.3 .3.2 .1 Define Default Values for Component Item Categories 34919.3 .3.2 .2 Define Movement Types for Material Reservations 35019.3 .3.2 .3 Define Account Assignment Cat. and Document Type for

Purchase Requisitions 35 019.3 .3.2 .4 Define Accounting Indicators 35119.3 .3.2 .5 Define Priorities 35119.3 .3.2 .6 Create System Conditions or Operating Conditions 35219.3 .3.2 .7 Activate Default Value for Current Date as Basic Date 35319.3 .3.2 .8 Define Default Values for Units for Operation 35319.3 .3.2 .9 User Status for Orders 353

19.3 .3.2 .9.1 Define Status Profile 35419.3 .3.2 .9.2 Create Authorization Keys for User Status Authorizations 35619.3.3.3 Partner 35719.3 .3.3 .1 Define Partner Determination Procedure and Partner Function 35719.3.3.4 Scheduling 35819.3 .3.4 .1 Maintain Scheduling Types 35819.3 .3.4 .2 Set Scheduling Parameters 35919.3 .3.4 .3 External Scheduling 359

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xiii

19.3 .3.4 .3.1 Define for Each Order Type 35919.3 .3.4 .3.2 Configure Communication 36019.3 .3.4 .3.3 Set External Scheduling Parameters 36119.3 .3.5 Create Revisions 36119.3 .3.6 Production Resource/Tool Assignments 36219.3 .3.6 .1 Define PRT Control Keys 36219.3.3.6 .2 Formulas 36219.3 .3.6 .2.1 Set Formula Parameters 36319.3 .3.6 .2.2 Configure Formula Definition 36319.3.3.7 Print Control 36419.3 .3.7 .1 Define Shop Papers, Forms and Output Programs 36419.3 .3.7 .2 Define Printer 36419.3 .3.8 Message Control 36619.3 .3.9 Assign Default Values for Settlement Areas to Order Types 36719.3.3.1 0 Object Information 36719.3 .3.1 0.1 Define Object Information Keys 36719.3 .3.1 0.2 Assign Object Information Keys to Order Types 37019.3 .3.1 1 Define Field Selection for Order Header Data (PM) 37019.3 .3.1 2 Define Field Selection for Order Header Data (CS) 373




( )19.3 .3.1 3 Define Field Selection for Order Operation (PM and CS) 37519.3 .3.1 4 Define Field Selection for Components (PM and CS) 37519.3 .3.1 5 Interface for Procurement Using Catalogs (OCI) 37619.3 .3.1 5.1 Define Catalogs 37619.3 .3.1 5.2 Assign Catalog to Order Type 37619.3 .3.1 5.3 Convert HTML fields to SAP fields 37719.3 .3.1 5.4 Convert HTML Field Values 37919.3 .3.1 5.5 Define Conversion Modules 38019.3.3.1 6 List Editing 38119.3 .3.1 6.1 Define List Variants 38119.3 .3.1 6.2 Field Selection for Multilevel List Displays of Orders 38319.3 .3.1 6.2. 1 Define Field Selection for Order Data Fields 38419.3 .3.1 6.2. 2 Define Field Selection for Sub-Order Data Fields 38419.3 .3.1 6.2. 3 Define Field Selection for Functional Location Fields 384

19.3 .3.1 6.2. 4 Define Field Selection for Equipment Master Data Fields 38419.3 .3.1 6.2. 5 Define Field Selection for Notification Data Fields 38419.3 .3.1 6.2. 6 Define Field Selection for Partner Data Fields 38519.3 .3.1 6.2. 7 Define Field Selection for Operation Data Fields 38519.3 .3.1 6.2. 8 Define Field Selection for Component Data Fields 38519.3 .3.1 6.2. 9 Define Field Selection for Confirmation Data Fields 38519.3 .3.1 6.2. 10 Define Field Selection for Production Resource/Tool Data

Fields 386

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xiv

19.3 .3.1 6.2. 11 Define Field Selection for Permit Data Fields 38619.3 .3.1 6.2. 12 Define Field Selection for Issued Permit Fields 38619.3 .3.1 6.2. 13 Define Field Selection for Goods Movement Fields 38619.3 .3.1 6.2. 14 Define Field Selection for Relationship Fields 38619.3 .3.1 6.2. 15 Define Field Selection for Revenue and Costing Data Fields38 719.3 .4 Completion Confirmations 38719.3 .4.1 Define Control Parameters for Completion Confirmations 38719.3 .4.2 Define Causes for Variances 389

19.3 .4.3 Define Execution Time for Confirmation Processes 38919.3 .4.4 Parallelized Confirmation Processes 39019.3 .4.5 Schedule background jobs confirmation processes 39119.3 .4.6 Set Screen Templates for Completion Confirmation 39319.3 .4.7 Set Field Selection for Completion Confirmation 39419.3 .4.8 Set List Editing for Confirmations Using Operation List 39619.3 .4.9 Set List Editing for Completion Confirmations 39819.3 .5 Configuration Control 39919.3 .5.1 Make General Settings for Installation/Dismantling 39919.3 .5.2 Determine Properties of Notifications for Installing and

Dismantling Parts 400f b f




19.3 .5.3 Define Att ributes for System Messages 40019.3 .5.4 Make General Settings for Interface to iPPE Workbench 40019.3 .6 Mobile Asset Management 40119.3 .6.1 Determine Order Processing 40119.3 .6.2 Determine Notification Processing 40219.3 .6.3 Assign Orders and Stocks to a Technician 40219.3 .6.4 Define scenario 40219.3 .6.5 Configure User-Dependent Data 40319.3 .6.6 Perform General Settings 40319.3 .6.7 Define Trigger of Push Messages 40419.3 .6.8 Define Profile for Template Equipment 40419.3 .6.9 Define Settings for Multilanguage Support 40519.3 .6.1 0 Business Add-Ins 40519.3.6.1 0.1 BAdI: Notification 405

19.3 .6.1 0.2 BAdI: Order and Operation Data 40619.3 .6.1 0.3 BAdI: Time Confirmation 40619.3 .6.1 0.4 BAdI: Material Confirmation 40619.3 .6.1 0.5 BAdI: Code Catalogs 40619.3 .6.1 0.6 BAdI: Catalog Profiles 40719.3 .6.1 0.7 BAdI: Code Groups 40719.3 .6.1 0.8 BAdI: Functional Location 40719.3 .6.1 0.9 BAdI: Equipment 40819.3 .6.1 0.10 BAdI: Measurement Document 408

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xv

19.3 .6.1 0.11 BAdI: Measuring Point 40819.3 .6.1 0.12 BAdI: Partner Data 40919.3 .6.1 0.13 BAdI: Signature Recording 40919.3 .6.1 0.14 BAdI: User Data 40919.3 .6.1 0.15 BAdI: Scenario-Specific Customizing 41019.3 .6.1 0.16 BAdI: Determination of Push Data 41019.3 .6.1 0.17 BAdI: Back-End Controlled Replication 41119.3 .6.1 0.18 BAdI: User Data Enhancement 411

19.3 .6.1 0.19 BAdI: Classification Data 41119.3 .6.1 0.20 BAdI: Address Data for Equipment 41219.4 Information Systems for Plant Maintenance and Customer

Service 41319.4 .1 Define Currency for Maintenance Statistics 41319.4 .2 Assign Value Categories to Maintenance Cost Key Figures 41419.4 .3 Customer-Specific Key Figures 41519.4 .3.1 Define Customer-Specific Key Figures 41519.4 .3.2 Value Categories and/or Accounting Indicators for Internal

Key Figures 41 619.4 .4 Configure Measurement Document Update 416




19.5 Maintenance Roles 41719.5.1 Confirmation 41719.5 .1.1 Define Confirmation Layouts 41719.5 .1.2 Assign Layouts to Plant/Order Type 41919.5 .2 Reporting 42019.5 .2.1 Compile Report List 42019.5 .2.2 Transfer Default Values for LaunchPad 42119.5 .3 Business Add-Ins 42119.5 .3.1 Change URL Parameter 42119.5 .3.2 Generate URLS for DMS Documents 42219.6 System Enhancements and Data Transfer 42319.6 .1 Develop Enhancements 42319.6 .2 Business Add-Ins 42919.6 .2.1 BADI: Equipment Master Data 429

19.6.2.2 Configuration Control 42919.6 .2.2 .1 BAdI: Adjust the Configuration Check Result by Technical

Object 42919.6 .2.2 .2 BAdI: Restrict Structure Explosion of Actual Configuration 43019.6 .2.2 .3 BAdI: Restrict Structure Explosion of Actual and Allowed

Configuration 43219.6 .2.2 .4 BAdI: Convert Function Identifier (FID) 43319.6 .2.2 .5 BAdI: Perform Quantity Check 434

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xvi

19.6 .2.2 .6 BAdI: Define Customer-Specific Checks wit hin OverallConfiguration Check 435

19.6 .2.2 .7 BAdI: Adjust Message Type According to Configuration CheckTypes 436

19.6 .2.2 .8 BAdI: Create Logs for Multiple Configuration Checks 43719.6 .2.2 .9 BAdI: Check Part Condition at Installation 43819.6 .2.2 .10 BAdI:Perform Stock Check for Part Condition When Dismantling43 919.6 .2.3 Installation/Dismantling of Equipment 440

19.6 .2.3 .1 BAdI: Actions for Screen-Related Checks for IE4N 44019.6 .2.3 .2 BAdI: Customer-Specific Checks During Installation/Removal 44119.6 .2.3 .3 BAdI: Perform Checks During Installation/Dismantling 44219.6 .2.3 .4 BAdI: Actions Before/Aft er Saving (Database Update) 44419.6 .2.3 .5 BAdI: Exit for Mandatory Fields 44519.6 .2.3 .6 BAdI: User-Specific Subscreen for Installation (802) 44619.6 .2.3 .7 BAdI: User-Specific Subscreen for Removal (801) 44819.6 .2.3 .8 BAdI: Activate MM Posting W/O Update of PM Structure on

Install./Dismantlng 44919.6 .2.3 .9 BAdI: Get Data for Installation/Dismantling from Reference

Order 45119 6 2 3 10 BAdI: Update "Struct ure Gap" Table after




19.6 .2.3 .10 BAdI: Update Struct ure Gap Table afterInstallation/Dismantling 451

19.6 .2.3 .11 BAdI: Perform Local Configuration Checks During Installation 45219.6 .2.3 .12 BAdI: Create Proposal for Installation Location 45319.6 .2.3 .13 BAdI: Generate/Update Notification 45519.6 .2.4 Change of Equipment History 45619.6 .2.4 .1 BAdI: Customer Checks for Reorganization of Equipment

History 45619.6 .2.4 .2 BAdI: Update Structure Gaps 45719.6 .2.4 .3 BAdI: Complete or Change Data for Goods Movement 45819.6 .2.4 .4 BAdI: Process Notification Aft er Restructuring of the

Equipment History 45919.6 .2.5 BAdI: Make Checks When Changing Technical Objects 46119.6 .2.6 BAdI: Perform Measuring Point Checks in PRT Environment 46119.6 .2.7 BAdI: Check Validity of Measurement Readings 46219.6 .2.8 BAdI: External Checks for Serialization Levels 46319.6 .2.9 BAdI: Order Change 46419.6 .2.1 0 BAdI: Execute Additional Authorization Checks for Orders 46419.6 .2.1 1 BAdI: Field content and display modification 46519.6 .2.1 2 BAdI: Catalog Connection 46519.6.2.1 3 BAdI: Confirmation 46619.6 .2.1 4 BAdI: Maintenance-, Service- and Refurbishment Order 46719.6 .2.1 5 BAdI: Maintenance-/Service Order: Task List Integration 468

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xvii

19.6 .2.1 6 BAdI: Adapt Transferred Data to BAPI 46919.6 .2.1 7 BAdI: Manipulate Purchase Requisitions from Orders and

Networks 47019.6 .2.1 8 BAdI: Inspection of Contract 47119.6 .2.1 9 BAdI: List Processing 47119.6 .2.2 0 BAdI: Performance Tuning for Lists 47219.6 .2.2 1 BAdI: Assign Work Center to Service Product 47319.6 .2.2 2 BAdI: Set Up Synchronization of Work Center in

Order/Notification 47619.6 .2.2 3 BAdI: Changes to object info screen data 47719.6 .2.2 4 Maintenance Plan 47719.6 .2.2 4.1 BAdI: Connect Digital Signature for the Maintenance Planning 47719.6 .2.2 4.2 BAdI: Adapt Plan/Basic Dates of Call Objects 47819.6 .2.2 4.3 BAdI: Multiple Counter Plan: Adjust Dates During Scheduling 48019.6 .2.2 4.4 BAdI: Check Whether Plan Date May Be in the Past 48119.6 .2.2 4.5 BAdI: Do Not Run DB-Update in Scheduling 48219.6 .2.2 4.6 BAdU: Set Reference Date for Scheduling Multiple Counter

Plan 48419.6 .2.2 5 Maintenance Program Definition 48619 6 2 2 5 1 BAdI: Maintenance Plan Creation/Update 486




19.6 .2.2 5.1 BAdI: Maintenance Plan Creation/Update 48619.6 .2.2 5.2 BAdI: Compliance Reporting 48819.6.2.2 6 Extractors 48919.6 .2.2 6.1 Extractor for Work Center Capacity 48919.6 .2.2 6.2 BAdI: Determine Downtimes 49019.6 .2.2 6.3 BAdI: Work Center Capacity - Calculate Loss of Time 49119.6.2.2 7 Archiving 49219.6.2.2 7.1 Equipment 49219.6 .2.2 7.1. 1 BAdI: Check Archivability of Additional Data for Equipment 49219.6 .2.2 7.1. 2 BAdI: Write Additional Data for Equipment to the Archive

File 49319.6 .2.2 7.1. 3 BAdI: Delete Additional Data for Equipment from the Database 49319.6.2.2 7.2 Notifications 49419.6 .2.2 7.2. 1 BAdI: Check Archivability of Notifications in the

Preparation Program 49 419.6 .2.2 7.2. 2 BAdI: Check Archivability of Notifications in the Write

Program 49519.6 .2.2 7.2. 3 BAdI: Write Add-On-Specific Data from Notifications to the

Archive File 49519.6 .2.2 7.2. 4 BAdI: Delete Add-On-Specific Entries for Notifications from

the Database 49619.6.2.2 7.3 Orders 496

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xviii

19.6 .2.2 7.3. 1 BAdI: Check Archivability of Orders in the PreparationProgram 496

19.6 .2.2 7.3. 2 BAdI: Check Archivability of Orders in the Write Program 49719.6 .2.2 7.3. 3 BAdI: Write Add-On-Specific Data from Orders to the Archive

File 49819.6 .2.2 7.3. 4 BAdI: Delete Add-On-Specific Entries for Orders from the

Database 49819.6 .2.2 7.3. 5 BAdI: Check Conversion to Historical Order Upon Archiving 49919.6.2.2 7.4 Task Lists 500

19.6 .2.2 7.4. 1 BAdI: Check Archivability of Task Lists in Write Program 50019.6 .2.2 7.4. 2 BAdI: Write Add-On-Specific Data of Task Lists to Archive

File 50019.6 .2.2 7.4. 3 BAdI: Delete Add-On-Specific Entries for Task Lists from

Database 50119.6 .3 Execute Data Transfer 50119.7 Work Clearance Management 50219.7.1 Master Data 50219.7 .1.1 Maintain Application Profile 50219.7.1.2 Architecture 50419.7 .1.2 .1 Assistant for Model Selection 50419 7 1 2 2 Assistant for Maintaining Additional Applications 504




19.7 .1.2 .2 Assistant for Maintaining Additional Applications 50419.7 .1.2 .3 Define Descriptions 50519.7 .1.2 .4 Define Generic Descriptions 50619.7 .1.2 .5 Define Direct Processing Mode 50619.7 .1.2 .6 Define Relations 50719.7 .1.2 .7 Define Processing Mode for Relations 50819.7 .1.2 .8 Define Processing Mode for Navigation 50919.7 .1.2 .9 Do Not Display Dialog Box for Assignments 51019.7 .1.2 .10 Configure Work Permits 51019.7 .1.3 Settings for WCM-Relevant Operations 51119.7 .1.4 Define Valuation 51219.7 .1.5 Number Ranges 51219.7 .1.5 .1 Maintain Number Ranges for Work Approval 51219.7 .1.5 .2 Maintain Number Ranges for Applications 513

19.7 .1.5 .3 Maintain Number Ranges for Work Clearance Documents 51319.7 .1.5 .4 Maintain Number Ranges for Operational Tags 51319.7 .1.5 .5 Assign Number Ranges 51419.7.1.6 Usages 51519.7 .1.6 .1 Maintain Usage for Work Approval 51519.7 .1.6 .2 Maintain Usage for Applications 51519.7 .1.6 .3 Maintain Usage for Work Clearance Documents 51519.7.1.7 Define Work 516

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xix

19.7 .1.8 Define Requirements 51719.7 .1.9 Define Parameter for Text Processing 51719.7.1.1 0 Catalogs 51819.7 .1.1 0.1 Define Catalog Types and Code Groups for Catalog Types 51819.7 .1.1 0.2 Display Catalog Directory wit h All Sub-Items 51819.7 .1.1 0.3 Define Catalog Profile 51919.7 .1.1 0.4 Assign Catalog Types, List Type, and Catalog Profile 51919.7 .1.1 1 Document Management 520

19.7 .1.1 1.1 Define Document Types 52019.7.1.1 2 Priorities 52119.7 .1.1 2.1 Define Priority Types 52119.7 .1.1 2.2 Assign Priority Types 52119.7.1.1 3 User Status 52119.7 .1.1 3.1 Maintain Status Profiles 52119.7 .1.1 3.2 Assign Status Profiles 52219.7.1.1 4 Partner 52219.7 .1.1 4.1 Define Partner Determination Procedure and Partner Functions 52219.7 .1.1 4.2 Assign Partner Determination Procedure 52419.7 .1.1 5 Check Consistency of Master Data 52419.7 .1.1 6 Data Transfer When Creating wit h Template 525




g p19.7 .1.1 6.1 Generate Basic Settings 52519.7 .1.1 6.2 Define Fields 52519.7 .1.1 6.3 Display Dialog Box 52619.7 .1.1 7 General Data 52619.7 .1.1 7.1 Define Revision Phases 52619.7 .1.1 7.2 Define Overall Conditions of Technical System 52719.7.1.1 7.3 Define Trains 52819.7 .1.1 7.4 Define Authorization Groups 52819.7 .1.1 7.5 Define Physical Blocking Types 52919.7.1.1 8 Print Control 52919.7 .1.1 8.1 Generate Print Settings 52919.7 .1.1 8.2 Define Shop Papers and Layout for Printout 53019.7 .1.1 8.3 Configure User-Specific Print Defaults 530

19.7 .1.1 9 Enhancements for Technical Objects 53119.7 .1.1 9.1 Create Characteristics and Classes for Enhancement 53119.7 .1.2 0 Field Selection 53219.7 .1.2 0.1 Define Field Selection for Work Approval 53219.7 .1.2 0.2 Define Field Selection for Applications 53419.7 .1.2 0.3 Define Field Selection for Work Clearance Application 53619.7 .1.2 0.4 Define Field Selection for Work Clearance Documents 53819.7 .1.2 1 Maintain Operation Data for Work Clearance Management 540

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xx



19.7 .2.5 Assign Processor for Approval Workflow 56119.7.3 Lockout/Tagout 56219.7 .3.1 Maintain Usage for Work Clearance Documents 56219.7 .3.2 Operational Steps 56319.7 .3.2 .1 General Settings 56319.7 .3.2 .2 Define Operational Steps 56419.7 .3.3 Operational Cycle 56419.7 .3.3 .1 Maintain Operational Groups 564

19.7 .3.3 .2 Maintain Operational Conditions 56519.7 .3.3 .3 Maintain Operational Types 56519.7 .3.3 .4 Maintain Operational Data 56519.7 .3.3 .5 Check Consistency of Operational Data 56619.7 .3.3 .6 Define Print Format for Operational Tags 56719.7 .3.4 Maintain Conflict Rules 56719.7 .3.5 Operational Classes 56819.7 .3.5 .1 Maintain Operational Classes 56819.7 .3.5 .2 Assign Technical Objects 56819.7 .3.5 .3 Assign Operational Conditions 56919.7 .3.6 Mobile Processing 57019.7 .3.6 .1 General User Settings 570




19.7 .3.6 .2 Plant-Specific User Settings 570

________________________ ____________________________ __________ SAP AG xxii